Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
SAFE ROOM PROJECT/SOUTH HICKORY HILL/2012
SAFE ROOM PROJECT/ SOUTH HICKORY HILL/ 2012 SR-rp etom / s",R 14i C-worri oCED(l�k fJe 1 6f_ 4 Ar- lia cut'SA- rk--CA * a; AIL �arK t Rmrn �o�-ec'�c�-•- _o sa; r�r .L3 'l_eSa f k �-;. sem -. r 3 - / !'° -- GP2rov'rn-a.-pJ rt n S�--- SQ��---1�:- ca l- � n n s , -Farm a- Con4,,zjj- - --�- __ —_Gna es%'r . a� orf rcos4- -F-0, 4-t,, consi r �tci cTn {- a _4-4i Soy, I }r�'r %�: (t Par-� S,^ t �n0 _ �r�eL I,..{�5'htc1bi;S ;h (j QYr/D, r4 o- -b,'d- S, Q_C kY'r �� �, LZ-CC�YhA ri. Fly QGtG� lJ 4/ &-cr-T/l7o ClT/ O( K _i t, r _ �N.h4�s • nafi;� _ -Ea �.' �///�/rS anal _ ^1�r�1C; � ?.`ine li�rz� {a11�<Q — Prow- �wL I i C r 1 P1-, n� CA GbtA�) �� Dr'tzo tL 'WI, 1 �+ i 40 ct -L�gs'I-� 0. cJ __rfi.t-r -1.+r cans -'roc fir: �, s=f-- /5r-A1Q� 13 �orrr oY F}QrccMen -- � CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA i -a PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA Sondrae Fort From: Kumi Morris Sent: Wednesday, January 02, 2013 11:54 AM To: Sondrae Fort Subject: RE: Engineer's Estimate of Cost- Safe Room South Hickory Hill Park Thanks Sondrae, just got back from vacation. The estimate is: $ 275,774.00 Kumi FORM OF PROPOSAL SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:30 PM local time on February 14, 2013 r, TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City >� City Hall ra e 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement land (2ontracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated December 17, 2012, including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by Neumann Monson for the Base Bid Lump Sum of: BASE BID: Dollars The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: LED Lighting. Add or Deduct the Sum of: Alternate No. 2: Hand Dryers. Deduct the Sum of: Alternate No. 3: Precast Concrete Roof Deck Deduct the Sum of: Dollars Dollars ($ ) Dollars Alternate No. 4: Factory Finished Metal Roofing Material Deduct the Sum of: Dollars The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before July 31, 2013. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: Phone: Contact: SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 000101 -PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL FOR DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS,IIOWA CITY SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM Iowa ISSUE DATE: 14 December 2012 NM PROJECT NO: 12.046 AN IOWA STATE TAX EXEMPT PROJECT THIS PROJECT MANUALINCLUDES PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 221 East College Street, Suite 303 Iowa City, IA 52240 12046 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0101 - 1 4J �� ;a PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0101 - 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 000103 - PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY Contact: Kumi Morris, Architectural Services Coordinator Address: 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone: (319)356-5044 e-mail: kumi-morris@iowa-city.org ARCHITECT: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 221 E College St, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone: (319) 338-7878' Fax: (319) 338-7879 1• �K Principal -in -Charge: Chris DeGroot Project Manager and Contract Administration: Levi Robb - e-mail: Irobb@neumannmonson.com INEERING CONSULTANTS: Structural: Select Strustural Engineering 2435 Kimberly Rd., Bettendorf, IA 52722 Telephone: (563) 359-3117 Fax: (563)355-2547 Project Structural Engineer: Eric danielson email: edanielson@select-structural.com Civil: Shoemaker& Haaland 160 Holiday Rd., Coralville, IA 52241 Telephone: (319) 351-7150 Fax: (319) 351-7150 Project Engineer: Adrian Holmes email: aholmes@shoemaker-haaland.com Mech I Elec: Modus Engineering 1717 Ingersoll Ave., Des Moines, IA 50309 Telephone: (515)251-7280 Fax: (515)251-7349 Project Engineer: Wes Meier email: wmeier@modus-eng.com END OF DIRECTORY PROJECT DIRECTORY 000103-1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM ner-by certify tha`. the portion of this technical s..brn-ssion described here n was prepared by me or under-ny direct supervision and respons'ble charge. I _ -'i a-.uly req 'stered Architect under the Icws of the State of IOWA. CHRISTOPH4E P. DeGROOT Pr istra6on expires_ /eb41ee Fege= or meets c rea b/ tele seal: �G �%6ryt/7 fC �l V� I hereby certify that the portion of this tectirti r�;;< submission deseribed herein was prepared by me or lis x,,a'•` ender my direct scpervision and responsible charge. I r sn a duly licensee Professional Engineer ander the latus of :he State of Iowa 2. "etre oe Registration expires: y ••.•° i�.;-`� payee al sneers c a by tris seal: 111U i� 2�f 2� hereby certify that he portion of Lha technical /511A so brr'ssion described herein was prepa-ed by me or under my direct supervision and responsi'ale charge. I nd r my direct supers sign and responsible charge. I ���pp1rY1H11����/ Ssl��� ni s al if ar^.cd P of esional d eeunder the lae Enginr w � ^e Stat if Iowa 21080 : ^� `�.�41�Q�,•"".i r �Z , Dote ADRIAN L. ° = HOIMES :M� 'til �Y st/ ve r� V� I .:3 's 17935 �zz ' J�>//9�ii j •., Registration expires: trlR , •' ,*4,�a Poges or sheets covered b 'h s seal: �y I hereby certify that the portion of this tectirti r�;;< submission deseribed herein was prepared by me or lis x,,a'•` ender my direct scpervision and responsible charge. I r sn a duly licensee Professional Engineer ander the latus of :he State of Iowa 2. "etre oe Registration expires: y ••.•° i�.;-`� payee al sneers c a by tris seal: 111U i� 2�f 2� 12046 SEALS PAGE SECTION 00 01 07 - PAGE 1 Here certify that he portion of r technical /511A sa bmissisi on described Ferein was prepared by me or �:Gd. under my direct supervision and responsi'ale charge. I `\<Q�S •,.-•- em a duly licersed Professional Engineer under the Isms ���� • ti� of .n_ State of Iowa. ��� �+ ERIK P. =caL v DANIELSON :m. 21080 : ^� , Dote ? �_yne, ��� -•'V�� i ` ' //*f,� �i1 Reg'strotion expires: by insseolaLS�Vy l D/L 'til �Y st/ ve r� I 12046 SEALS PAGE SECTION 00 01 07 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000103 PROJECT DIRECTORY 000107 SEALS PAGE 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTE TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS FORM OF PROPOSAL BID BOND FORM OF AGREEMENT PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANTI -DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON -FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CFR Section 13.36(1) 002613 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 003100 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT t�1MT,jlfflm 12046 NP -1 NTB-1 NB -1 IB -1 FP -1 BB -1 AG -1 PB -1 CC -1 (thru pg.7) GC -1 SC -1 R-1 FCCR-1 011000 SUMMARY PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES - fa 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2300 ALTERNATES. c ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS - =i 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS r , 01 3300 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014313 QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS AND TESTING TABLE OF CONTENTs SECTION 00 0110 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016116 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 030010 CONCRETE 033310 CONCRETE WALL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 033931 CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS 034000 PRECAST CONCRETE DIVISION 05 - METALS 055000 METALS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071400 FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071900 WATER REPELLENTS 072613 UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 079005 JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 085613 FEMA COMPLIANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 710Q,a DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 09:F.INISHES 09 9000 ` ' .. -PAINTING AND COATING 12046 TABLE OFCONTENTs SECTION 00 0110 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 SIGNAGE 102119 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 11Pl6][U2FY7]IIII J11.1121r1 220050 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 6 220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 1 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 2 22 1116 DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 6 22 1119 DOMESTIC PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 4 DIVISION 23 HVAC 230050 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 6 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 4 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASING 4 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 2 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 2 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 6 260519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 3 262416 PANELBOARDS. 3 262726 WIRING DEVICES. 3 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 2 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 4 DIVISION 31 -EARTHWORK 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL _ C . W u TABLE OFCONTENTs SECTION 00 0110 - PAGE 3 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Project in said City at 7 p.m. on the E�h day of January, 2013, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Coun- cil of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK S. ENG ARCHITECTPRF FILE PeojrciiS-1h Hickory Hill Se@Ran, A jcePHld Dowmwls and FEMA Rtlocu,nenm'nyM1 for Soul H1,0., Hill PmR Safe R.o. P""7 t *o R-1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 2:30 P.M. on the 14th day of February, 2013. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "scaled bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 19th day of February, 2013, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. There will be a pre-bid meeting on Tuesday, January 22"' at 10 a.m. in the Engineering Conference Room in City Hall, at 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa. The Project will involve the following: The construction of a single story structure, with ADA accessible restrooms and Saferoom facility at South Hickory Hill Park. Construction shall include, but will not be limited to: cast in place concrete walls, mechanical, electrical and plumbing, site paving, an asphalt trail and finished site grading. This project will be funded by HMESD Funding and FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CFR Section 13.36(i) are incorporated into the specifications. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Neumann Monson Architects, of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred pegcent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City; and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save h9rmless ihCity,, from all Claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the. cgntracj, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1 year(s) from -and after its' com- pletion and formal acceptance by the City Council M = The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: April 15,2013 f, Completion Date: July 31, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $ 400.00per day r_7 The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of YPre City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphics Inc 415 Highland Ave Suite 100 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 319-354-5950 and 31-354-8973 (fax), by bona fide bidders. A $30.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics. The fee will be returned if the plans are returned in unmarked and reusable condition within 15 days of Council Award. A separate and nonrefundable $15.00 shipping and handling fee will apply to plans that are sent through postal mail. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK SI ENOV,RCHITEC7URE FILIPrcfog915cNe Hlckwy HIII Sal, Room Pr,,IlBid D--!, and FEMA Rcvlex docvn,enLslnotio: to bldo.m SOUTH HICKOr ' HILL SAF3ROOM PROJECT- NO BATES doc F 1 1 • CJ c f 'y NOTE TO BIDDERS 1. The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Envelope 2: Bid Bond Form of Proposal NB -1 <:7 1 J INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS r-• ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract d6eQments. TKA l bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instrucfi'o'ns to Bidders'j the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2007 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. A sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. RM 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidders personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 — BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of Office of Technioraphics Inc. 415 Highland Ave. Suite 100 Iowa City, 52240 319-354- 5950 and 31-354-8973 (fax for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who return the bidding documents in good condition within 15 days after receipt of bids. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and the deposit will be refunded. Successful sub -bidders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will be issued. C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are. -not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are ncgrporated therein by reference. 3.2 Interpretawn or Correction of Bidding Documents A= `The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Im C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. Refer to Section 00 2613 Substitution Request Form for substitution requirements. Make request for approval of substitute products on "Substitution Request Form" in Section 00 2613 Substitution Request Form of this Project Manual. Submit a separate Substitution Request Form for each proposed substitution. Verbal or written requests without completed Substitution Request Form will not be considered. The bidder is advised that vagueness of submittal, inadequate warranty, insufficient data and failure to meet project requirements may be cause for rejection of request. Approval is subject to later reconsideration at any time during the life of the contract. B. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.4 Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have a complete set of bidding documents. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than four (4) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. na c D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that h&Pias reeivec al addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt -in th'proper Je location on the bid form. - -_ J ARTICLE 4- BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 Form and Style of Bids A. A separate copy of the bid form is contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. iH C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter "No Change". F. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder. H. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2 Bid Security A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. Surety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond" form bound within the project imanual and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety r shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. m :; `The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an yard is being considered until either: 1 The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB — Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids ("City Clerk, City of Iowa City"), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1. Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Before 2:30 p.m. on the 14"' day of February. 2013. C. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. D. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. E. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder by certified mail or by telegram. If by certified mail or telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid 4A5 madified;'pr resubmitted. " a -! (- ca ARTICLE 5—CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 Opening of Bids C_' _.; A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 5.2 Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. L -M 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsive responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. ARTICLE 6— POST -BID INFORMATION 6.1 Submittals A. The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. B. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect: 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. C. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. D. Prior to the award of the contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: 1 Withdraw the bid. 2._ Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the =' bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. D:" fhe Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the i -event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7— PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.1 Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 7.2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 — PRE-BID CONFERENCE tJ 8.1 Conference 3 73 A. Bidder is encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on Tuesday; Ji� rluary•�2.Z, 2013 at 10:00 AM local time, in the Engineering Conference Roohx)A.City_�Hall,�414 E. Washington Street, in Iowa City, Iowa. 8.2 Parking c.:) A Limited metered parking is available neighboring City Hall. Otherwise a hourly pre -pay parking is available south of City Hall at Chauncey Swan Ramp or a hourly -fee parking is available in Tower Place, located west of City Hall at 335 East Iowa Avenue, the entrance is on the Iowa Avenue side of the ramp. V t 1 ACTIVEprojetlst2012 Aoject,V12046 IC -Hickory Hill Sate RoomlRle CebinetlC2-blddoc\SpecTtoa1 City working UoosulB- Instructions to Bidders South Hii Hill Sate Ruom 08 14 2012doc FORM OF PROPOSAL SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY BIDDERS PLEASE NOTE: 1. PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:30 PM local time on February 14, 2013 TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated December 17, 2012, including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by Neumann Monson for the Base Bid Lump Sum of: BASE BID: The undersigned bidder submits herewith ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: LED Lighting. Add or Deduct the Sum of: Alternate No. 2: Hand Dryers. Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ($ co ., bid security in the amount of $ c 1 Dollars Dollars Alternate No. 3: Precast Concrete Roof Deck Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 4: Factory Finished Metal Roofing: Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ( The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before July 31, 2013. Fi rm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: Phone: Contact: iZFJ C3 J I I17=ii7,1�7 as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated February 142013 for SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate,'-_ (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and -deliver a-jcontract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this A.D., 20 Witness Witness IMM, day of (Seal) Principal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By (Attorney-in-fact) Attach Power -of -Attorney FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 17`h day of December, 2013 for the SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT ("Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA..DOC A2D1-2007, as amended; c. g 4 i c. Plans; 2 " — _ .. ora 3.,.- d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects; i. Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements); j. FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CFR Section 13.36(i) k. Proposal and Bid Documents; and L This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 5. The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of. To be completed after award and no/100 Dollars 0.00 . DATED this 19`h day of February, 2013 [DATE BASED ON FORMAL COUNCIL MEETING AWARDING CONTRACT BY RESOLUTION NUMBER citv Contractor (Signature) (Printed name) ATTEST: rl (Signature) (Printed name) Mayor Title ATTEST: City Clerk (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office (Signature) (Printed name) Mayor Title ATTEST: City Clerk (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and as (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner. in the amount of Dollars for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, (lntly and F severally. a 7 l t'� 3 WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of TBA -DATE entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner for the SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT: rZ) and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Neumann Monson Architects, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of One (1) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF 20 IN THE PRESENCE OF; (Principal) Witness (Title) (Surety) Witness (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) e i - (Phone) Compliance Program CITY OF IOWA CITY Contract Compliance Program CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION I - GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. CC -1 SECTION II -ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et sem.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. CC -2 T`J c,5 ti yr CC -2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature Print Name Phone Number Title Date CC -3 SECTION III - SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 1. COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equ kemplq jnent opportunity laws. r7 r t 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This cp'D' be'dbne by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer"..`_ (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word-oBnouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use job-related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non -biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them - CC -4 Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 — 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC -5 2-3-1 SECTION: 2-3-1 CHAPTER 3 ©_ F5 N DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES 3 2-3-1: Employment; Exceptions 2-3-2: Public Accommodation; Exceptions 2-3.3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions 2-3-4: Education 2-3-5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; Intimidation 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT: EXCEPTIONS: A. It shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender Identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- nization to refuse to admit to member- ship, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprentice- ship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or train- ing because of age, color, creed, disability, gender Identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- plicant or member. —a C J C. it shall be unlawful. I' r any employer, employment agency;-`IatYei organize - tion or the employees k members thereof to directly or indirectly adver- tise or in any other manner indicate or publicize that individuals are unwel- come, objectionable or not solicited for employment or membership be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) D. Employment policies relating to preg- nancy and childbirth shall be governed by the following: 1. A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes from employment applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima facie violation of this Title. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- riage, childbirth and recovery there- from are, for all job-related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available In connection with employment or any written or unwrit- ten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other tem- porary disabilities. E. It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro - 697 Iowa City CC -6 2-3-1 spective employee a test for the pres- ence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus. An agree- ment between an employer, employ- ment agency, labor organization or their employees, agents or members and an employee or prospective em- ployee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or pro- spective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the State epidemiologist determines and the Director of Public Health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- ment of Health and Human Services, that a person with a condition related to acquired Immune deficiency syn- drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunode- ficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this Section: 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifica- tions are related to a bona fide reli- gious purpose. A religious qualifica- tion for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or reli- gious institution shall be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualifica- tion. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) Iowa City CC -7 2-3-1 2. An employer or employment agency which chooses to offer employment or advertise for employment to only the disabled or elderly. Any such employ- ment or offer of employment shall not discriminate among the disabled or elderly on the basis of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, mari- tal status, national origin, race, reli- gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) 3. The employment of individuals for work within the home of the employer if the employer or members of the family reside therein during such em- ployment. 4. The employment of individuals to render personal service to the person of the employer or members of the employer's family. 5. To employ on the basis of sex in those certain instances where sex is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- rowly. 6. A State or Federal program de- signed to benefit a specific age classi- fication which serves a bona fide pub- fic purpose. 7. To employ on the basis of disability in those certain instances where pres- ence of disability is a bona fide occu- pational qualification reasonably nec- essary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) GENERAL CONDITIONS "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007 amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. GC -1 ILJ - « GC -1 CITY OF IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 1 -GENERAL co v 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract forConstrr{etion", AIA Document A201-2007. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. R. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as strike and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold !land'. D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations in respect to any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety 12 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follows: 1.1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed as AG in the project manual. B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 1.3 ARTICLE 2- OWNER A. Change paragraph 2.4 to read as follows: 2.4 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after feeept-ef written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. - In such case a apprepr ate !`Fang. Order shall be issued deduct n^ the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -1 Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's and/or Consultant's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and atforneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. Such action by the n,....,,r and arrinunts charged to the Contractor are-both--subject-to-prior-approval he ArGh eot If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work. carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. It the Contractor performs any construction activity knewing it involves involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume appreprWa responsibility for such performance and shall bear an ^^^•^^r^t^ amount of the attributable all costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. Change paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, vendors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. C. Add the following 3.3.4: 3.3.4 Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. Contractor shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. D. Change_paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: `..3.4.1 'finless otherwise provided In the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilNes, transportation, storage, parking and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not _incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work'- 'be performed after regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to jierform.work after regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. y SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -2 Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 0160 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor: .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. ,2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. .5 will adhere to the contract schedule Change paragraphs 3.5 to read as follows: -� 3.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials" and -equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Gokrtracfbocurf etas require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work -wiH conform with°the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects;,--,....-,, aan, *h^ e i,.I w '^rt in the quality . mirk. ..,von. Den memorequire_ . _y., .., ,�.o ,nr...4 the Co„„w_, ___. e. n.-141drk, rraaterials or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. Thegbntractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. G. Change paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. All such information for said certificates shall be submitted to the City/Owner together in one submission. H. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall temp! perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. Change paragraph 3.7.3 to read as follows: 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume fuNapprepriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to the serrest ea and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -3 Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are 1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those Indicated In the Contract Documents or 2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and In no event later than the next business day 'i� after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's costs of or time required for performance of any part of the work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. It the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those Indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. It either pat„ disputes the Architect's det^rm'^^t'n^ ar rei;Gmmepdat nn that part, p preGeed a provided in Article 15 Change paragraph 3.11 to read as follows: 3.11 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and ene sepy of all approved Shop Drawings, MSDS Sheets, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. K. Change paragraph 3.13 to read as follows: 3.13 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located may be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. L. Change paragraph 3.17 to read as follows: 3.17 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. M. c-, Change paragraphs 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18:1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them ftom and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death. or to 5 injury3e or destruction of tangible property (other th R the Work itself), but only to the extent -caused Jin whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subconiractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -4 may be liable, ..dies ,s whether , not si cla m, damage less -T ,_n a 'a A pa4by-a-par'y indemnified herenr Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing in the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. N. Change paragraph 3.18.2 to read as follows: 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. rU 1.5 ARTICLE 4- ARCHITECT A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as -§6t forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without wr4ten-consdnt of 4th% Owner, Gop#aGtor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld..,':_ t 44 B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: e� 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the -Contract Documents and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein during construction and until the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment to the Contractor on the Project. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner 1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and 2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify recommend to the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -5 performing portions of the Work. E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist In carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The -duties respo^s'h'r. ps and limitations of authority .,t such project repr s tom os shall -b et forth h ' an anexhibit t be 'nnn'nnn.pert^d4r4he-CoF�"ct Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then the Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and recommendations dpo,,;ons, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations decisions rendered in good faith. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: 5.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 1. if no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3 to read as follows: 5.3 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such _ rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights. remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor; by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub; subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Soboontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the i Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at `-`.,variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable -;portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub -subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -6 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: N 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor_ causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner 64 -)separate con'tradors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5., 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect"aritl signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.2 as follows: 7.2.2 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed directly by the Contractor's employees, not including oversight of such work performed by subcontractor, fifteen percent (1591o) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub -subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub -subcontractor. .5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, an proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8- TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -7 enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes. fire, unusuaEdelay-irdelfveres, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay a theirized by !he OwHer pepding arbiiraiiqn, Gr by ether causes which t e Architect etermines may -justify delay; then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. D. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. Add paragraph 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES to read as follows: Since the actual monetary value of damages sustained by the Owner as a result of delayed completion of the Work is extremely difficult or impractical to assess, the Owner and Contractor agree as follows: f. Upon failure of the Contractor to achieve "Substantial Completion" of the Work in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents: The Contractor shall pay as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum of amount as listed in the Notice to Bidders (or Instruction to Bidders) for each calendar day that "Substantial Completion" is delayed beyond the date written in the Agreement, subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents. 2. The Owner shall give written notice to the Contractor of intent to assess liquidated damages pursuant to provisions of this Article. Calculation of the amount of liquidated damages shall commence on the date the Owner notifies the Contractor of this intent. 3. Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with these provisions are exclusive of other monetary damages to which the Owner may be entitled as a direct result of the Contractor's failure to achieve final completion of the Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. These liquidated damages are not intended to be exclusive of Owner's right to terminate this Contract based on Contractors' failure to comply with the terms and provisions of the Contract. 4r Partial performance of the Work of this Contract shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for liquidated damages. 5:- Contractor's liability for liquidated damages shall cease upon issuance of r - Substantial Completion Certificate for the Work of the Contract. -6., Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, amounts a assessed to the Contractor as liquidated damages may be deducted by the Owner from any money payable to the Contractor pursuant to this Contract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of a claim for liquidated damages prior to the date the Owner deducts such sum from money payable to the Contractor. 1.10 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -8 .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers. r-� B. Change paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: `?,. 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contraot;;Appbcation=for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy te4,W,,Contractq, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contiagtor and' Owner p writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or iwpart;as provided i'h Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring`Tfie Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. Ali certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and cghditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1: 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 The Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor within 30 days after the Owner has received a Certificate for Payment from the Architect. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. o., , ..t n the manner .,rid._within the tm prov in the (;9H aG1 n..,. .,tom and shall s not'fy the Arr:h'te.d E. Change paragraph 9.8.4 to read as follows: When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and Insurance, and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. `:'aFrant es required by the rentraGt Add paragraph 9.10.6: 9.10.6 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa (2009), as amended. G. Add paragraph 9.10.7: 9.10.7 Warranties required by the Contract Documents, including those stated in the performance and payment bond, shall commence on the date of final, formal acceptance of the work by the City. 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add paragraph 10.1.1: 1. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -9 chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. B. Change paragraph 10.2.4 to read as follows: 1. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. C. Add paragraph 10.2.9: 10.2.9 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. The Owner shall be notified once these notices have been served and before the work is performed. 1.12 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom: B. Change paragraph 11.1.2 to read as follows: 11.1 .2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage whethe shall be written on an occurrence ^•o Ala sad�^ basis and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the contractor's completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: _ 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to < ,- commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of.. insurance. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must.accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall cdhta07: a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire -,until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted upon final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and -:thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by ,-Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. D. Delete paragraph 11.1.4 in its entirety and add the following paragraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.14: 11.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -10 in the following type and minimum amounts: Type of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage" Automobile Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage Excess Liability Employer's Liability Each Accident Each Employee Policy Limit Professional Liability (if applicable) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $500,000 $500,000 $500,000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. Aggregate $2,000,000c�7' $I'000'000:_ -'C-3 $1,000,000 Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Comprehensive General Liability using Insurance Services Office CG000 i or equivalent, shall include Contractual, Premises & Operations, Products & Completed Operations, Independent Contractors, Personal & Advertising injury coverages, and Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) endorsement. Automobile Liability shall include all owned, non -owned and hired autos and also coverage for Contractual Liability. Excess Liability shall provide no less than following form coverage to the primary underlying policies. Workers Compensation shall include the Alternative Employer and Waiver of Subrogation endorsements in favor of the Owner. Professional Liability, if applicable: Tthe Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Professional Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance. The Contractor will notify the Owner if claims made erode the policy limits below those required above. All liability policies above, except for Workers Compensation and Professional Liability, shall include the Owner's Governmental immunities Endorsement. [See attached]. 11. 1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. in addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11.1.6The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -11 11. 1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance and copies of such shall be attached thereto. 11.1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. The Contractor shall include the Owner (City of Iowa City, including its employees, agents and assigns) as additional insured on all policies, except worker's compensation and professional liability. Such additional insured endorsement(s) shall make the Contractor's liability insurance primary to the Owner's and, furthermore, shall not be contributing with any other insurance or similar protection available to the Owner, whether such available protection be primary, contributing or excess. Owner shall be an Additional insured with repect to all required aforementioned coverages, which shall be stated on all Certificates of Insurance. Such Certificates shall also state that the Governmental immunities Endorsement (see attached) apply and said endorsements shall be attached thereto. The Contractor shall require any of its agents and subcontractors who perform work and/or services pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement to purchase and maintain the same types of insurance as are required of the Contractor. 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims -made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail' coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase 'prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or 'prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 11.1.11 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. 11.1.12 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -12 due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.13 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. r�� 11.1.14 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. ri 4 1 E. Delete paragraphs 11.3 in its entirety and add paragraphs 11.3 as follows: ' ca i 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 1 11.3.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Workdt the Sift in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws. and Reg,_alations). This insurance shall: .1 include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Owner's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; .2 be written on a Builder's Risk 'all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; .3 include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property; .4 include $100,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; .5 allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; .6 include testing and startup; and be maintained in effect until final payment is made. .B Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -13 11.3.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. 11.3.3A11 the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.3.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. Delete section 11.4 in Its entirety and add paragraph 11.4 to read as follows: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American Institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a financial rating from A.M. Best of A, VII or higher. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and'affect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract Documents. 4 -The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -14 -5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. 11.4.2 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. ra E2 1.13 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS t::, y 71 A. Change paragraph 13.1 to read as follows: 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa dLJi plaee ::"�ez.`"^ Project located o ept *4ai; it the -p rties have seloGto, arb 1ratiorr as the-witiW of Ions -Ig d spate r85o at e the Federal Arbitral o, Act -shall govern Spec ^ 15) 4. B. Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: c a 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in pefson to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was Intended, or if delivered at -or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. C. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect and Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of 1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded and 2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. D. Delete paragraphs 13.7. E. Add the following Section 13.8: 13.8 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -15 employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance Add the following Section 13.9: 13.9 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) for all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. B. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages Incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. 1.15 ARTICLE 15- CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Change paragraphs 15.1 .1 through 15.1.3 to read as follows: 15.1.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other similar relief with respect to the administration terms of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. --15.1.-2 Notice of Claims. Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be Initiated by written noticeelo the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect If the ,--Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated withln'21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the `claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor. ..nloccc,.b: ;Agri in a timely manner. 15.1.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14. the Contractor shall SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -16 proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. B. Change paragraph 15.2.5 to read as follows: 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim. This initial decision shall 1) be in writing, 2) state the reasons therefore, and 3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Th I i Gl h the 'ti aI d hall be final Contract Time or both. �,�,-oo„-���,�a. ,,,, ,.. ...,,....,...... ......,.. C. Delete paragraphs 15.2.6 and 15.2.6.1 in their entirety. D. Delete Section 15.3 MEDIATION in its entirety. Delete Section 15.4 ARBITRATION in its entirety. Add the following paragraph 15.5 to read as follows: 15.5 The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -17 l � t . Z. u C7 RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON -FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: TYPE OF WORK: DATE OF LETTING: A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a non-resident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. That preference is equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the non-resident bidder is a resident. 'Resident bidder" is defined as a person authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business within the state, and has conducted business for at least six months prior to the first advertisement for the public improvement. In the case of a corporation, the above requirements apply as well as the requirement that the corporation have at least fifty percent of its common stock owned by residents of this state. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the bidder and his/her contractors and subcontractors at the work site until the project is completed. I hereby certify that the undersigned is a resident bidder as defined above and will remain such from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME: CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE: DATE: R-1 iTr FEDERAL CONTRACT Clause Requirements OMB Circular A-102 & 44 CFR Section 13.36(i) Contract Provisions "The FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- OMB CIR UTAK A- 102 & 44 CFR Section 13.36(1) contract provisions," shall apply to the-agreeRent except as specifically amended in the document below.`` ° ' _ -mom (i) Contract provisions. A grantee's and subgrantee's contracts mus'(;conta,i4 provisions in paragraph (i) of this section. Federal agencies are permitted to -' require changes, remedies, changed conditions, access and records retention, suspension of work, and other clauses approved by the Office of Federal Procurement Policy. (1) Administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors violate or breach contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be appropriate. (Contracts more than the simplified acquisition threshold) (2) Termination for cause and for convenience by the grantee or subgrantee including the manner by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement. (All contracts in excess of $10,000) (3) Compliance with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, entitled "Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967, and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR chapter 60). (All construction contracts awarded in excess of $10,000 by grantees and their contractors or subgrantees) (4) Compliance with the Copeland "Anti -Kickback' Act (18 U.S.C. 874) as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 3). (All contracts and subgrants for construction or repair) (5) Compliance with the Davis -Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a to 276a-7) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 5). (Construction contracts in excess of $2000 awarded by grantees and subgrantees when required by Federal grant program legislation) *THIS DOES NOT APPLY TO DISASTER FUNDING AND THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT. (6) Compliance with Sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 327-330) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 5). (Construction contracts awarded by grantees and subgrantees in excess of $2000, and in excess of $2500 for other contracts which involve the employment of mechanics or laborers) FCCR —1 of 2 FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CFR SECTION 13.36(1) (7) Notice of awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to reporting. (8) Notice of awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to patent rights with respect to any discovery or invention which arises or is developed in the course of or under such contract. (9) Awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to copyrights and rights in data. (10) Access by the grantee, the subgrantee, the Federal grantor agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives to any books, documents, papers, and records of the contractor which are directly pertinent to that specific contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions. (11) Retention of all required records for three years after grantees or subgrantees make final payments and all other pending matters are closed. (12) Compliance with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857(h)), section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR part 15). (Contracts, subcontracts, and subgrants of amounts in excess of $100,000) (13) Mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub. L. 94-163, 89 Stat. 871). [53 FR 8078, 8087, Mar. 11, 1988, as amended at 60 FR 19639, 19645, Apr. 19, 1995] FCCR —2 of 2 FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS -44 CFR SECTION I3.36(i) SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 002613 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM BID DATE: 2013 SUBMIT REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTIONS DURING THE BIDDING PHASE TO: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECT P.C., 221 E College St, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 REQUEST FROM: DATE: _/_/2013. SPECIFICATION SECTION/TITLE: Description: ; Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Trade Name: Model: ACKNOWLEDGEMENTSAND ATTACHMENTS 12046 In submitting this Request, the Undersigned acknowledges and represents that: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Attachments: The following attachments are considered an integral part of this Request: Product Data, descriptions and specifications necessary for evaluation. Drawings necessary to indicate proper installation in the Work. Tests and Reports consistent with specified performance requirements. SUBMITTED BY: (Title) r Firm name: Telephone: Fax ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION s co Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specificatign-Section 01 3300. :. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Reviewed by: Date: END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 2613 - 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 003100 -AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION EXISTING CONDITIONS 1.01 Certain information relating to existing surface and subsurface conditions and structures is available to bidders but will not be part of the Contract Documents, as follows: A. Geotechnical Report prepared by: TERRACON Consultants, Inc., Cedar Rapids, IA. 1. Title: Geotechnical Engineering Report - Porposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park 2. Date of Report: August 8, 2012. 3. A copy of the Report is bound in the Project Manual following this page. 4. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of Arch itecUEngineer. S. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents. 6. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to City of Iowa City. H AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 003100-1 A I � y l.) AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 003100-1 Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park SE of Intersection of E. Davenport Street and E. Bloomington Street Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Prepared for: Neumann Monson Architects Iowa City, Iowa Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Iowa City, Iowa Cs ra x 'l August 8, 2012 Neumann Monson Architects 221 East College Street, Suite 303 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Attn: Mr. Chris DeGroot P: 319.338.7878 F: 319.338.7879 E: CDeGroot(a)neumannmonson. com Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park SE of Intersection of E. Davenport Street and E. Bloomington Street Iowa City, Iowa Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Dear Mr. `be Groot Terracon.:Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has completed the subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services for the above referenced project. These services were performed; in general accordance with our proposal number P06120481 dated July 13, 2012. This geotechnical engineering report presents the results of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations and floor slabs for the proposed project. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this phase of your project, and look forward in assisting you during the construction phase. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. Al � ./ " . i Nicholas L. Hussey, E.I., M.S. Staff Engineer Brett E. Bradfield, P.E. Iowa No. 20703 NLH;BEB: N:\Projects\20124061256461PROJECT DOCUMENTS (Reports -Letters -Drafts to Clients)106125646.01.docx Copies to: 1 —Client Terracon Consultants. Inc. 783 Highway 1 West, Unit 5 Iowa City, Iowa 52245 P 1.3191 688 3007 F 11191 688 3008 tPrrar_.0p_rpip TABLE OF CONTENTS l✓ rV Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY............................................................................................................ i 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION.............................................................................................1 2.1 Project Description...............................................................................................1 2.2 Site Location and Description...............................................................................2 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS........................................................................................2 3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile...................................................................................2 �-7 3.2 Groundwater Conditions......................................................................................3 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION......................................3 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations...............................................................................3 4.2 Earthwork.............................................................................................................4 4.2.1 Site Preparation........................................................................................4 4.2.2 Excavation Considerations.......................................................................5 4.2.3 Fill Types and Compaction .................................................. ...........5 4.2.4 Compaction Requirements.......................................................................6 4.2.5 Grading and Drainage..............................................................................7 4.3 Shallow Foundations............................................................................................8 4.3.1 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations........................................8 4.3.2 Shallow Foundation Construction Considerations.....................................9 4.4 Seismic Considerations............................................................... ..... .........10 4.5 Floor Slab..........................................................................................................10 4.5.1 Floor Slab Design Recommendations.....................................................10 4.5.2 Floor Slab Construction Considerations..................................................11 4.6 Frost Considerations....................................................................... .............12 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS...............................................................................................13 l✓ rV -o �-7 Responsive a Resourceful ■ Reliable TABLE OF CONTENTS— continued Exhibit No. Appendix A — Field Exploration SiteLocation Plan ......... ...................................................................................... A-1 Boring Location Plan.......................................................................................... A-2 BoringLog..........................................................................................................A-3 Field Exploration Description..............................................................................A-4 Appendix B — Laboratory Testing Laboratory Test Description................................................................................ B-1 Appendix C — Supporting Documents Explanation of Boring Log Information ......... ............................... ........................ C-1 Unified Soil Classification System.......................................................................0-2 Responsive it Resourceful ■ Reliable `- Responsive it Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report I�erraeon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY A geotechnical exploration has been performed for the proposed safe room to be located in Hickory Hill Park in Iowa City, Iowa. Terracon's geotechnical scope of work included the advancement of one (1) boring to an approximate depth of 20 feet below existing site grade in the planned location of the structure. Based on the information obtained from our subsurface exploration, the following geotechnical considerations were identified: ■ The proposed structure may be supported on shallow foundations bearing on the stiff to very stiff native clay or on new structural fill extended to suitable native materials. Some moisture conditioning and recompaction of desiccated materials should be anticipated. ■ Assuming proper site preparation and any necessary foundation bearing soil corrections, total and differential settlement should be less than about 1 inch and two-thirds (2/3) of total settlement, respectively. ■ The near surface clay soils encountered in the borings may be susceptible to instability during construction. These soils are easily disturbed by wetting and/or construction. ■ On-site soils appear suitable for use as compacted structural fill. Significant moisture conditioning (e.g. wetting of desiccated soils) should be anticipated if the on-site soils are used as fill. ■ Based on the limited subsurface information obtained during our site exploration, the 2009 International Building Code (IBC), seismic site classification for this site is C. ■ Earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Terracon. The evaluation of earthwork should include observation and testing of structural fill, subgrade preparation, foundation bearing materials, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during construction. M1n) f.> This summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for deato por oses,;_,„It should be recognized that details were not included or fully developed in th s;Poctib�1, and the report must be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the"'ifem Tontained herein. The section titled GENERAL COMMENTS should be read for an und'e'rstanding of A# e report limitations. - -- . ca Responsive Resourceful Reliable GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED SAFE ROOM AT HICKORY HILL PARK IOWA CITY, IOWA Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 August 8, 2012 1.0 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services performed for the proposed safe room to be located at Hickory Hill Park in Iowa City, Iowa. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: rr subsurface soil conditions ■ groundwater conditions ■ foundation design and construction a floor slab design and construction site preparation and earthwork ■ estimated seismic site classification ■ excavation considerations r frost considerations The geotechnical engineering scope of work for this project included the advancement of one (1) boring -to a depth of approximately 20 feet below existing site grade at the location for the proposed structure. A Site Lacatioln'FTan (Exhibit A-1), a Boring Location Plan (Exhibit A-2), and the log of the boring (Exhibit &=3) are included in Appendix A of this report. The results of the laboratory testing performf,�daon soil"samples obtained from the site during the field exploration are included on the boring log Descriptions of the field exploration and laboratory testing are included in Appendix A and B, respectively. 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 2.1 Project Description Item Site layout Structure (provided) ■ Refer to the Boring Location Plan Appendix A) Single -story building with a proposed footprint of approximately 600 square feet (plan dimension of about 22 feet by 28 feet) in 11 Responsive ■ Resourceful w Reliable 1 Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Building construction (provided) Finished floor elevation (assumed) Maximum loads (provided) Maximum allowable settlement (assumed) Site grading (assumed) Pavements (assumed) 2.2 Site Location and Description 1rerracan Reinforced concrete (cast -in-place or precast) storm shelter structure Partial stone veneer Peaked wood roof over concrete roofed shelter structure Near 678 feet Walls: 7 klf 0 12 klf under FEMA 250 mph wind load Slabs: 125 psf ■ Total: 1 inch ■ Differential: 2/3 of total settlement ■ Cuts and fills of less than about 2 feet ■ New sidewalks to shelter (not in scope of services) Item Descrtptton ■ Lower Hickory Hill Park in Iowa City, Iowa. Location ■ Near southeast corner of intersection of E. Davenport Street and E. Bloomington Street. Existing site features Site topography Current ground cover ■ Parking lot and driveway ■ Open shelters ■ Slopes down to the east, with elevations ranging from about 670 to 680 feet (based on Johnson County GIS) ■ Grass ■ Trees C7 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile` _ lJ Specific conditions encountered at the boring location are indicated on the boring log. Stratification boundaries on the boring log represent the approximate location of changes in soil types. In-situ, the transition between native materials may be gradual. Based on the results of the boring, subsurface conditions on the project site can be generalized as follows: 1 Approximate Depth to Description Material Encountered ConsistencylDensity Bottom of Stratum (feet) Surficial /a Root zone N/A Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 lrerracon Approximate Depth to Description Material Encountered ConsistencylDensity Bottom of Stratum (feet) Hard to very stiff and Stratum 1 20 Lean clay and silt desiccated, becoming stiff to medium stiff with depth Stratum 2Undetermined Apparent bedrock Auger refusal --- _- _ -- -- ---- - --- 1. Boring B-1 terminated— on apparent bedrock at about 20 feet below grade. Please review the attached boring log for a detailed description of the conditions encountered at the boring location. 3.2 Groundwater Conditions The boring was observed for the presence of groundwater during drilling and sampling. Groundwater was encountered while sampling at a depth of about 17 feet below grade. After completion of our drilling operation, the borehole was backfilled with on-site soils Longer-term observations with cased holes or piezometers, sealed from the influence of surface water, would be required for a better evaluation of the groundwater conditions on this site. Fluctuations of the groundwater levels will likely occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, the level of Ralston Creek, runoff, and other factors not evident at the time the boring was performed. Therefore, groundwater levels during construction or at other times in the life of the structure may be different than the levels indicated on the boring log. The possibility of groundwater level fluctuations and perched water should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. -ry 4.0 j 1ECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 4.1Geoteginical Considerations Based oo the subsurface data and conditions encountered in the boring, it is our opinion that the lbrbpose(tF stru-cf-6ire can be supported on spread footings. However, special design and construction considerations will be required due to: ■ Moisture conditioning of desiccated soils; • Easily disturbed subgrades; Further details are provided herein. Responsive Resourceful Reliable 3 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 �err�eon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Moisture Conditioning of Desiccated Soils: The near surface soils encountered in the boring appear to be dry of their plastic limit (and below anticipated optimum moisture contents). The desiccation of the soils could be attributed to loss of moisture from tree root systems. Low plasticity soils can have some inherent swell potential if their moisture contents are initially very low, and later increase in moisture content due to the elimination of tree root systems and coverage by slabs. We recommend that the floor subgrade be developed by removing the site soils to depths of at least 2 feet below the planned bottom of floor elevation, exposed soils moistened to levels above their plastic limit, and the zone replaced with suitable low plasticity soil structural fill. Subgrade Stability: It should be noted that the near surface clay soils encountered on the site can also be susceptible to disturbance from construction activities if the soils are subject to increased moisture contents by wetting from surface water or seepage. Care should be taken during construction to minimize disturbance of the exposed soils. Consideration should be given to establishing graveled haul roads and staging areas to help minimize distgrr ance of bearing soils. =` 4.2 Earthwork 4.2.1 Site Preparation Topsoil, vegetation, and any otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from the' construction areas. Root systems of trees should be satisfactorily grubbed. W2for drNexnaterial should either be removed or moisture conditioned and recompacted. Soft, dry and or low- density soil should be removed or compacted in place prior to placing new fill. After rough grade has been established and desiccated soils removed to depths of at least 2 feet below bottom of floor elevation, we recommend the subgrade be scarified and adjusted to moisture contents within -2 to +3 percent of the optimum moisture content determined by standard Proctor tests (ASTM D698). The subgrade should then be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material's maximum dry density (ASTM D698). This recompaction process will help to identify soft or loose areas below the subgrade level. Soft or loose areas should be undercut, moisture conditioned, and recompacted or replaced with approved structural fill. Subgrade conditions should be observed by Terracon during construction. Dewatering during construction could be required. We expect that sump pits and pumps would generally be adequate for dewatering excavations in clay soils. More extensive dewatering measures, such as well points and sheeting may be required for excavations depending on the flood stage of Ralston Creek. Where fill is placed on existing slopes steeper than 51-1: 1V, benches should be cut into the existing slopes prior to fill placement. The benches should have a minimum vertical face height of 1 foot and a maximum vertical face height of 3 feet and should be cut wide enough to Responsive a Resourceful . Reliable 4 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 �err�con Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 accommodate the compaction equipment. This benching will help provide a positive bond between the fill and natural soils and reduce the possibility of failure along the fill/natural soil interface. Furthermore, we recommend that fill slopes be over filled and then cut back to develop an adequately compacted slope face. Although the exposed subgrade is anticipated to be relatively stable upon initial exposure, unstable subgrade conditions could develop during general construction operations, particularly if the soils are wetted and/or subjected to repetitive construction traffic. The use of light construction equipment would aid in reducing subgrade disturbance. The use of remotely operated equipment, such as a backhoe, would be beneficial to perform cuts and reduce subgrade disturbance. Should unstable subgrade conditions develop, stabilization measures will need to be employed. Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture content prior to construction of floor slabs. Construction traffic over the completed subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. The site should also be graded to prevent ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. If the subgrade should become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to floor slab construction. 4.2.2 Excavation Considerations As a minimum, all temporary excavations should be sloped or braced as required by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations to provide stability and safe working' conditions. Temporary excavations will probably be required during grading operations and installation of utilities. Contractors, by their contract, are usually responsible for designing ,arid constructilig stable, temporary excavations and should shore, slope or bench the sides of `the excavationg, as required, to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. All r,^ -exoavafions'should comply with applicable local, state and federal safety regulations, including the current OSHP Excavation and Trench Safety Standards. e -a 4.2.3 Fill Types and Compaction Fill placed in the building area should be low volume change cohesive soil or granular soil. If foundation overexcavations are needed, granular fill should be used below foundation bearing elevations. Fill placed in confined excavations and utility trenches crossing pavements should consist of relatively clean and well -graded granular material. Use of granular fill material should provide for greater ease of placement and compaction in confined areas where larger compaction equipment cannot be operated. The inorganic lean clay and silt cohesive soils encountered in the boring are considered suitable for use as site mass grading fill. However, significant moisture conditioning and recompaction should be anticipated to reuse the apparent desiccated near surface soils as structural fill. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 5 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rracon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park a Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Structural fill should meet the following material property requirements: Fill Type' USCS Classification I Acceptable Location for Placement Low Plasticity Cohesive CL ML, CL General site grading fill -------- ____ _ -F.. - GW, GP, GM, GC Granular SW, SP, SM, SC General site grading fill, below foundations Unsuitable CUCH, CH, MH, OL, OH, PT Green (non-structural) locations Onsite SoilsCL ML, CL, ML The on-site soils encountered in the boring generally appear suitable for reuse as structural fill 1. Structural fill should consist of approved materials that are free -of -organic matter and debris. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. A sample of each material type should be submitted to the geotechnical engineer for evaluation prior to use on this site. 2. Low plasticity cohesive soil would have a liquid limit less than 45 and a plasticity index of less than 23. Moisture conditioning (e.g. wetting / drying of clays and silts) of the existing site soils will likely be required if they are used as structural fill. Appropriate laboratory tests, including Atterberg Limits for cohesive soils, organic content tests for dark colored soils, and standard Proctor (ASTM D698) moisture -density relationship tests should be performed on proposed fill materials prior to their use as structural fill. Organic content tests should be performed on dark colored soils and/or those that exhibit a noticeable odor. Further evaluation of any on-site soils or off- site fill materials should be performed by Terracon prior to their use in compacted fill sections. Care should also be taken to avoid inter -layering of granular soils and clay soils during fill placement. This could result in perched water conditions and lead to development of frost lenses and loss of subgrade strength both during and after construction. If granular soils are placed above clay soils, we suggest the subgrades have significant slope to drain/sbbdrain locations or that trench subdrains be installed. h.7 4.2.4 Compaction Requirements -; Recommended degree of compaction and moisture content criteria for structbral fill rnateriXI are as follows: Responsive Resourceful Reliable 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��fr�con Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park n Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 • Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Per the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698) --- Material Type and Range of Moisture Contents for Location Minimum Compaction Compaction' Requirement /o (p )4 Low Plasticity Cohesive Beneath foundations Beneath floor slabs Granular 2.1 M M n mum aximum 98 -2% +3% 95 -2% +3% Beneath foundations 98 3% +3% Beneath floor slabs li 95 -3% +3% 1. We recommend that structural fill be tested for moisture content and compaction during placement. Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate the specified moisture or compaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested as required until the specified moisture and compaction requirements are achieved. 2. If the granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, or of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relative density may be more appropriate. In this case, granular materials should be compacted to at least 70% relative density (ASTM D 4253-00 and D 4254-00). 3. Specifically, moisture levels should be maintained at levels satisfactory for compaction to be achieved without the granular fill material bulking during placement or pumping when proofrol led. We recommend that fill be placed and compacted on stable subgrades in loose lifts of 9 inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self-propelled compaction equipment is used. Lift thickness should be reduced to 4 inches in loose thickness when hand equipment (e.g., jumping jack, vibratory plate compactor, etc.) is used. A vibrating smooth drum compactor should not be used on "cfay soils. All new fill placement and compaction should be observed and tested by Terra con' jsersortine1. 4:2:5 Grading -and Drainage Final surl'ounding-grades should be sloped away from structures and pavements on all sides. In addition, roof drainage should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted by pipe to the storm water drainage system or discharged a minimum of 5 feet away from the structure. As an alternative, splash blocks may be used as long as the ground surface is paved and slopes away from the structure. Trees or other vegetation whose root systems have the ability to remove excessive moisture from the subgrade and foundation soils should not be planted next to the structure. Trees and shrubbery should be kept away from the exterior edges of the foundation element a distance at least equal to 11/2 times their expected mature height. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 7 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracan Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 4.3 Shallow Foundations Based upon the subsurface conditions encountered in the boring, and the proposed construction, the proposed structures can be supported on conventional footing foundations. 4.3.1 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations Description Value Suitable bearing material • Stiff to very stiff native clay ■ New structural fill - - - Net allowable bearing pressure ■ 2,500 psf Minimum dimensions ■ Walls: 16 inches Minimum embedment depth below - --a 42 inches -perimeter footings and other footings in finished grade unheated areas ■ 24 inches - interior footings in heated areas Estimated settlement 2 ■ Total: 1 inch ■ Differential: 2/3 of total settlement_._ = Ultimate passive resistance ■ 290 pcf (equivalent fluid pressures) Ultimate coefficient of sliding friction ° ■ 0.35 -. Unit weight for uplift ■ 120 pcf above water table t r ■ 60 pcf below water table U 9r 1. Interior footings should be constructed to a minimum embedment of 42 inches if they:zlrill be smbjected to frost conditions during construction. C_1 2. The magnitude of settlement that will occur will depend on the variations within the subsurface soil profile, the actual structural loading conditions, the embedment depth of the footings, and the quality of the earthwork operations. 3. Use of passive earth pressures require the sides of the excavation for the spread footing foundation to be nearly vertical and the concrete placed neat against these vertical faces or that the footing forms be removed and compacted structural fill be placed against the vertical footing face. Passive resistance in the upper 42 inches of the soil profile should be neglected due to frost effects. 4. Can be used to compute sliding resistance where foundations are placed on suitable soil/materials. Should be neglected forfoundations subject to net uplift conditions. The net allowable soil bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at footing base elevation. Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within five feet of the foundation for perimeter (or exterior) footings and finished floor level for interior footings. The allowable foundation bearing pressures apply to dead loads plus design live load conditions. The design bearing pressure may be increased by one-third when considering total loads that include wind or seismic conditions. Dynamic loading conditions were not evaluated for the project. The weight of the foundation concrete below grade may be neglected in dead load computations. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 8 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rr�con Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Uplift resistance of spread footings can be developed from the weight of the footing, the effective weight of the overlying soils, and from the weight of the structure itself. The effective weight of the soil prism defined by a diagonal line extending up from the top of the perimeter of the foundation to the ground surface at an angle of 20 degrees from the vertical can also be included in uplift resistance. The maximum allowable uplift capacity should be taken as a sum of the effective weight of soil plus the dead weight of the foundation and structure, all divided by an appropriate factor of safety. A maximum total unit weight of 120 pct could be used for structural fill at this site. This unit weight should be reduced to 60 pcf for portions of the backfill or natural soils more than 5 feet below final grade to account for the potential high water table during the 100 year flood according to the contour illustrated on the Boring Location Plan (Exhibit A-2). Footings, foundation walls, and masonry walls should be reinforced as necessary to reduce the potential for distress caused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings or other discontinuities in masonry walls (if any) is recommended. Foundation excavations should be observed by the geotechnical engineer. If the soil conditions encountered differ significantly from those presented in this report, supplemental recommendations will be required. 4.3.2 Shallow Foundation Construction Considerations If unsuitable bearing soils are encountered in footing excavations, the excavations should be extended deeper to suitable soils and the footings could bear directly on these soils at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavations. The footings could also bear on properly compacted backfill extending down to the suitable soils. Overexcavation for compacted backfill placement below footings should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below footing base elevation. The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the footing base elevation with well -graded granular material placed and compacted as recommended in section 4.2.4 Compaction Requirements. Lateral widening is not required for overexcavations backfilled with lean concrete. The overexcavation and backfill procedures are shown in the following figures. Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 9 Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Design FinMing Level Design Footing revel 1 rerracon COMPACTED r=� .STRUCTURAL Ito LEAN N RecommerMnf FILL Recrommended CONCRETE �,'S Fxrava'on level d _ Excavation Level � �:_ l � 8 Qverexcavation 1 Backfill Lean Concrete Backfill C0 `..., NOTE: Excavations In sketches shown vertical for NOTE'. Excavations in sketches shownweetlFal for con"rilence. Excavations should be sloped as convenience. Excavations should be 516pi as - necessary for safety. necessary for safety. , The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water and loose or soft soil,s�prior to placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. Should the soils at the bearing level become disturbed, the affected soil should be stabilized or removed prior to placement of concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after excavating to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. 4.4 Seismic Considerations DESCRIPTION I VALUE 2009 International Building Code Site Classification (IBC)' Site Latitude Site Longitude N 41' 39'54.05" W 91' 30'48.26" ' Note: In general accordance with the 2009 IntefnationalBuilding Code, Table 1613.5.2. IBC Site Class is based on the average characteristics of the upper 100 feet of the subsurface profile. ' Note: The 2009 International Building Code (IBC) requires a site soil profile determination extending to a depth of 100 feet for seismic site classification. The current scope does not include the required 100 foot soil profile determination. The boring extended to a maximum depth of 20 feet and ending on apparent bedrock. The recommended seismic site class definition considers that moderately weathered bedrock continues below the maximum depth of the subsurface exploration. Additional exploration to deeper depths, or seismic velocity testing would be required to confirm the conditions below the current depth of exploration. 4.5 Floor Slab 4.5.1 Floor Slab Design Recommendations Description Value Interior floor system ■ Slab -on -grade Portland cement concrete Responsive Resourceful Reliable 10 Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8. 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Description Floor slab support Unheated areas subject to frost Modulus of subgrade reaction Irerracon value ■ Minimum 6 inches of free draining (less than 6% passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve) crushed aggregate compacted to at least 95% of ASTM D 698 ■ Subgrade composed of at least 2 feet of moisture conditioned and compacted low Dlasticitv soil • Minimum of 3'/z feet of clean aggregate (less than 6° passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve) material below slabs ■ 100 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in). The modulus was obtained based on our experience with similar subgrade conditions The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs on grade that will be covered with wood, tile, carpet or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slab will support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer should refer to ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding the use and placement of a vapor retarder. Where floor slabs are tied to perimeter walls or turn -down slabs to meet structural or other construction objectives, our experience indicates that any differential movement between the walls andslabs will likely be observed in adjacent slab expansion joints or floor slab cracks that c. , occur beyond the; length of the structural dowels. The structural engineer should account for this potential= differential settlement through use of sufficient control joints, appropriate reinforcirigor`o heir means. 4:5':2 Floor Slab Construction Considerations Thea recrzmmendations presented in report are intended to develop a subgrade suitable for support,=of floor Wslabs. In these sections, the preparation of exposed soils and anticipated subgrade types were discussed. On most project sites, the site grading is generally accomplished early in the construction phase. However as construction proceeds, the subgrade will likely be disturbed due to utility excavations, construction traffic, desiccation, rainfall, etc. Correction to subgrades prior to placement of base course crushed stone and concrete should be anticipated, particularly where subgrades consist of and/or are underlain by desiccated soils. We recommend the area underlying the floor slab be rough graded and then scarified and recompacted to at least 95 percent of the material's maximum dry density (ASTM D698) prior to final grading and placement of the crushed stone base course. Particular attention should be paid to high traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier and to areas where backfilled trenches are located. Areas where unsuitable conditions are located should be repaired by removing and replacing the affected material with properly compacted fill. Dry and/or Responsive Resourceful Reliable 11 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rr�eon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park m Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracor Project No. 06125646.01 desiccated subgrade soils should be removed, or subjected to a procedure of scarification, moisture conditioning, and recompaction prior to placing the floor slab base course. The recommended crushed stone base thickness is not intended to be used as a working surface for construction activities. Some redressing and correction of the crushed stone base disturbed or contaminated with fines should be anticipated if the stone base is placed early during construction. Where practical, we recommend "early -entry' cutting of crack -control joints in floor slabs. Cutting of the concrete in its `green" state typically reduces the potential for micro -cracking of the slabs prior to the crack control joints being formed, compared to cutting the joints after the concrete has fully set. Micro -cracking of slabs may lead to crack formation in locations other than the sawed joints, and/or reduction of fatigue life of the slabs. 4.6 Frost Considerations The soils on this site are frost susceptible, and small amounts of water.*on`effect' JV performance of the slabs on -grade and sidewalks. Exterior slabs should-bo-ant+cipated`tb heave during winter months. If frost action needs to be eliminated in critical =areas, we recommend the use of non -frost susceptible structural or structural slabs (e.g.;'structural stoops in front of building doors). Placement of non -frost susceptible material in large areas may not be feasible; however, the following recommendations are provided to help reduce potential frost heave: s Providing surface drainage away from the building and slabs and toward the site storm drainage system ■ Installing drain tiles around the perimeter of the building, stoops, below exterior slabs, and connect them to the storm drainage system r Grading clayey subgrades such that groundwater potentially perched in overlying more permeable subgrades, such as sand or aggregate base, toward the site drainage system ■ Placing non -frost susceptible fill as backfill beneath slabs that are critical to the project ■ Placing a 3 horizontal to 1 vertical (3H: 1V) transition zone between non -frost susceptible soils and other soils ■ Placing non -frost susceptible materials in critical sidewalk areas As an alternative to extending the non -frost susceptible fill to the full frost depth, consideration can be made to placing extruded polystyrene or cellular concrete under a buffer of at least 2 feet of non -frost susceptible fill. Responsive a Resourceful ■ Reliable 12 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerr�eon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 ■ Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth -related construction phases of the project. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the boring performed at the indicated location and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur away from the boring, across the site, or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. This report has, been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical eng neering pr dices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavalibn support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event thaC ctraYtges in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned...fhe conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid urtl'zss Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Brett E. Bradfield, P.E. My license renewal date is December 31, 2012. Date Responsive ® Resourceful ■ Reliable 13 APPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATION Rd NE Scott SW b a 0, Halveel Rml ccott BWd Of V m y } N SCOU Blvd UbvYn 5` viri[ Si s Q v L prmR* au Chen Rd O IWO . r. e e G z �A z - N Governor Sr v 3 N ' N Dodge SC � H" I a _ c 7 � wLL ul UJ t N thl6axg,e S, nS w C,J m .� ` .. ir prmR* au Chen Rd O IWO . r. e e G z �A n N Governor Sr v 3 N Dodge SC � H" I a _ c 7 � wLL ul UJ N thl6axg,e S, nS r-� Cs 0 � o c�j Gk, CO W a BORING LOG NO. B-1 Pae 1 of 1 PROJECT: Hickory Hill Park Saferoom CLIENT: Neumann Monson Architects PC Iowa City, Iowa SITE: SE of E Davenport Street and OWNER: City of Iowa City E Bloomington Street, Iowa City, Iowa o LOCATION ' - Offset 6 S See Exhibit A-2 w z �Iww F SOIL STRENGTH _ - A LERTSRG 1>or�- ti buw U Latitude: 41.6fi5026° Longitude'. -91.513397 i a W F ;—�F a^ r Q_ c m Ll Of Oct HW O to �N wW via wzc wT Yw� X �O K— LL -PL -PI Approximate Surface Elev.: 102 am 3 m0 LLT t -r o-� �` o C: DW DEPTH ELEVATION 3" Root Zone LEAN CLAY (CL) Desiccated, brown, very stiff 8-7-5 HP 4.50 18 8 36-24-12 j N=12 18 N 7-6 HP 4.50 14 37-20-17 5 6.0 96I LEAN CLAY ICL) 4-4 6 trace sand, gray brown, stiff J I;.1 16 N=10 1 19 15 I� LIC 1.13 5.5 14 116 to - D13-0 13 089, SILT WITH CLAY fill trace sand, gray stiff 15 UC 15 26 100 .1.69 • _._ - I 15 1 r i - 17.0 -- 951 LEAN CLAY (CLl trace sand, brpwn sofl,to [medium stiff . . t - HP 2.50 29 Auger RefusaFon apparent limestone bedrock. i . 82 200 20 i i s Boring Terminated at 20 Feet I I i I 1 1 Stratification lines aye approximate. In-situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Tope: CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer Advancement Method: See Exh bit for dasehpden offlud ETosvures. nA ,- Power auger to boring termination. See AppaodixBfor deschptionoflaboratory procedures and additional data, int any). See Appendix C for e=pianatron of symbols and i Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started: 720/2012 Boring Completed: 7/312012 WS err�con Drill Rig, Driller MW ��ghvda �� U'Lt love cat toe>a Project No 06125646 Exhibit A-3 Geotechnical Engineering Report l�erracon Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 a Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Field Exploration Description Our field exploration consisted of performing one (1) soil boring at the project site. The boring was extended to a depth of about 20 feet below the existing grade. The boring location was selected and laid out in the field by the client. Any offset distance from the staked location, where required for access, are presented on the boring log, and were determined by using a measuring wheel or cloth tape. The approximate boring location is indicated on the attached Boring Location Plan. The ground surface elevation indicated on the boring log and Boring Location Plan is also approximate (rounded to the nearest 112 foot), and was obtained by the drill crew with a level and rod. The elevation was referenced to the top of a sanitary sewer manhole located to the northeast of the boring location. An elevation of 100 feet was assigned to this reference (Terracon Datum). The location and elevation of the boring should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them. The boring was drilled with an ATV -mounted, rotary drilling rig using continuous flight, solid - stemmed augers to advance the boreholes. Samples were obtained using either thin-walled tube or split -barrel sampling procedures. In the thin-walled tube sampling procedure, a thin- walled tube or seamless steel tube with a sharp cutting edge is pushed hydraulically into the ground to obtain relatively undisturbed samples of cohesive or moderately cohesive soils. In the split -barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2 -inch O.D. split -barrel sampling spoon is driven into the ground with a 140 -pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. A CME automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split -barrel sampler in the boring performed for this project. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 1 S - inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These values are indicated on the boring logs at the corresponding depths of occurrence. The samples were sealed and returned to the laboratory for testing and classification. Responsive Resourceful Reliable Exhibit A-4 APPENDIX B LABORATORY TESTING cJ [V Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rr�con Proposed Safe Room at Hickory Hill Park ■ Iowa City, Iowa August 8, 2012 n Terracon Project No. 06125646.01 Laboratory Testing Soil samples were tested in the laboratory to measure their natural water contents. Dry unit weight measurements were performed on portions of intact thin-walled tube samples. The unconfined compressive strength of some thin-walled tube samples was also measured. A hand penetrometer was used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength of some cohesive samples. The hand penetrometer provides a better estimate of soil consistency than visual examination alone. The following index tests were performed to aid in classifying the soils and evaluating their engineering properties: ■ Two (2) Atterberg limits (liquid and plastic) test. The results of the laboratory tests are shown on the boring logs, adjacent to the soil profiles, at their corresponding sample depths. As a part of the laboratory testing program, the soil samples were classified in the laboratory based on visual observation, texture, plasticity, and the limited laboratory testing described above. Additional testing could be performed to more accurately classify the samples. Portions of the recovered samples were placed in jars, and the samples will be retained for at least 1 month in case additional testing is requested. The soil descriptions presented on the boring logs for native soils are in accordance with our enclosed General Notes and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The estimated group symbol for the USCS is also shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the Unified System is attached to this report. Responsive ■ Resourceful a Reliable Exhibit B-1 rJ Responsive ■ Resourceful a Reliable Exhibit B-1 APPENDIX C SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS GENERAL NOTES DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 56�. of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device. The accuracy of such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with +/- indicates that no actual topographical survey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographic maps of the area. \�! CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS Water Initially (More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve.) (HP) Hand Penetrometer Maior Component Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing, field Encountered Includes gravels, sands and silts. visual -manual procedures or standard penetration resistance y Auger Split Spoon Standard Penetration or Water Level After a Specified Period of Time Descriptive Term (T) 7orvane Standard Penetration or ' J W Water Level After a Specified Period of Time f (blf) Standard Penetration 0 Strength, Qu, tsf N -Value BlowslFt. U) Test (blows per foot) Z Shelby Tube Macro Core W D Water levels indicated on the soil boring W F (PID) Photo-lonizati 'Detector Q_j Term rY W logs are the levels measured in the Q-- --- CD r F borehole at the times indicated. 0-3 '1 N less than 0.25 Q Groundwater level variations will occur(OVA) 5-12 OrganipVapo"r�nalyzer 11 - 30 Ring Sampler Rock Core > 12 over time. In low permeability soils, > 30 �_r 1_') —. Loose i 7-18 accurate determination of groundwater levels is not with short term 3-4 a W 0.25 to 0-50 2-4 Z_- possible water level observations. -r Grab Sample No Recovery W -- - - DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 56�. of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device. The accuracy of such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with +/- indicates that no actual topographical survey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographic maps of the area. RELATIVE PROPORTIONS RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS SIZE TERMINOLOGY (More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve.) (50% or more passing the No. 200 sieve.) Maior Component Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing, field Dry Weight Includes gravels, sands and silts. visual -manual procedures or standard penetration resistance y Descriptive Term Standard Penetration or Ring Sampler Descriptive Term Unconfined Compressive Standard Penetration or Ring Sampler 2 (Density) N -Value BlowslFt. (Consistency) Strength, Qu, tsf N -Value BlowslFt. K BlowslFt. Passing #200 sieve (0.075mm) RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES Blows/Ft. Descriptive Terni Percent of Term _ - of other constituents Dry Weight F Very Loose 0-3 0-6 Very Soft less than 0.25 0-1 13 5-12 Medium 11 - 30 Modifier > 12 High > 30 Loose 4-9 7-18 Soft 3-4 ~ 0 0.25 to 0-50 2-4 Z_- W Medium Dense 10-29 19-58 Medium -Stiff 0.50 to 1.Do 4-8 5-9 K F Dense 30-50 59-98 Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 8-15 10-18 2.00 to 4.00 15-30 Very Dense >50 >99 Very Stiff 19-42 Hard > 4.00 > 30 > 42 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY Descriptive Termisl Percent of Maior Component Particle Size of other constituents Dry Weight of Sample Trace < 15 Boulders Over 12 in. (300 mm) With 15-29 Cobbles 12 in. to 3 in. (300mm to 75mm) Modifier > 30 Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve (75mm to 4.75 mm) Sand #4 to #200 sieve (4.75mm to 0.075mm Silt or Clay Passing #200 sieve (0.075mm) RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Descriptive Terni Percent of Term Plasticity Index of other constituents Dry Weight Non -plastic 0 Trace '5 Low 1 - 10 With 5-12 Medium 11 - 30 Modifier > 12 High > 30 Exhibit C4 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM _ Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A Silts and Clays: IPI < 4 or plots below" line' ML silt KLIA Soil Classification Group Group Name' -- --------- —' Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid nmd oven dried j .( Symbols Organic clay"'` Gravels: Clean Gravels Cu > 4 and 1 < Cc < 3 e GW i Well graded gravel r More than 50% of . Less than 5% fines ° 16u < 4 andlor 1 > Cc> 3 e GP Poorly graded gravel r i coarse fraction retained Gravels with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH GM Tsrlty gravel r ° N Coarse Coarse Grained Soils on No. 4 sieve More than 50% More than 12,o fines ° "" -"" Fines classify as CL or CH GC a --------- Clayey gravel r c" retained on No, 200 sieve Sands: ---- Clean Sands: - Cu > 6 and 1 Cc .: 3 e SW Well -graded sand' 50% or more of coarse Less than 5% fines ° Cu < 6 andlor 1 > Cc > 3 e SP {Poorly graded sand i fraction passes No. 4 Sands with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sande"' sieve More than 12 % fines ° ....... . Fines classify as CL or CH ._._-..._ SC ......_..._...._. rClayey sand c"' PI > 7 and plots on or above A line' CL Lean clay KLNr I Inorganic.- _--_ _.. ..-.-_ ..........._.-. _..............._ Based on the material passing the 3 -inch (75 -mm) sieve " If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW -GM well -graded gravel with silt, GW -GC well -graded gravel with clay. GP -GM poorly graded gravel with silt, GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ° Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols. SW -SM well -graded sand with silt, SW -SC well -graded sand with clay, SP -SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP -SC poorly graded sand with clay D. ) L Cu = DeotD io Cc= so D,,, x Deo r If soil contains > 15`/o sand. add with sand" to group name. If fines classify as CL -ML, use dual symbol GC -GM, or SC -SM. 60 �..__. --.1 _.-.r-_.. _r _. - For classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained fraction 50 of coarse-grained soils Equation of "A'- line Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5 tX 40 - then PI 0.73 (LL 20) - - pEquation of V line Z Vertical at 116 to PI 7, �- 30 - then U O� Q 20 _j 0 - _ r - 4 ' ML or OL " If fines are organic, add "with organic fines" to group name. If soil contains > 15% gravel, add "with gravel" to group name. ' If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL -ML, silty clay. " If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add with sand" or "with gravel," whichever is predominant. If soil contains > 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. u If soil contains > 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" to group name. " PI > 4 and plots on or above "A" line. ° PI <4 or plots below `A" line. PI plots on or above "A" line. ° PI plots below "A" line. MH or OH I 30 40 50 60 70 80 LIQUID LIMIT I 90 100 110 1 rerracon Exhibit C-2 Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid nmd oven dried j .( Organic clay"'` Fine -Grained Soils: Organic: -- 0.75 Liquid limit not dried OL --- Organic silt rcr,e 5095 or more passes the No. 200 sieve ---- _-_. t___. ....-...... .-...... ....... _ _ PI plots on or above "A line _ CH 1-_ f " Fat clay `"' inorganic: Silts and Clays: I PI plots below A line I MH . .il Kinr Elastin Silt Liquid limit 50 or more Organic Liquid limit oven dried -- -- OH Organm clay Liquid limd not deed <0.75 ( --KrK Organic silt' Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat Based on the material passing the 3 -inch (75 -mm) sieve " If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW -GM well -graded gravel with silt, GW -GC well -graded gravel with clay. GP -GM poorly graded gravel with silt, GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ° Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols. SW -SM well -graded sand with silt, SW -SC well -graded sand with clay, SP -SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP -SC poorly graded sand with clay D. ) L Cu = DeotD io Cc= so D,,, x Deo r If soil contains > 15`/o sand. add with sand" to group name. If fines classify as CL -ML, use dual symbol GC -GM, or SC -SM. 60 �..__. --.1 _.-.r-_.. _r _. - For classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained fraction 50 of coarse-grained soils Equation of "A'- line Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5 tX 40 - then PI 0.73 (LL 20) - - pEquation of V line Z Vertical at 116 to PI 7, �- 30 - then U O� Q 20 _j 0 - _ r - 4 ' ML or OL " If fines are organic, add "with organic fines" to group name. If soil contains > 15% gravel, add "with gravel" to group name. ' If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL -ML, silty clay. " If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add with sand" or "with gravel," whichever is predominant. If soil contains > 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. u If soil contains > 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" to group name. " PI > 4 and plots on or above "A" line. ° PI <4 or plots below `A" line. PI plots on or above "A" line. ° PI plots below "A" line. MH or OH I 30 40 50 60 70 80 LIQUID LIMIT I 90 100 110 1 rerracon Exhibit C-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: South Hickory Hill park Safe Room. B- Owner's Name: City of Iowa City C. Architect/Engineer's Name: Neumann Monson P.C., Iowa City, Iowa. D The Project consists of the construction of single story restroom building designed to serve as a storm shelter. This building is designed to FEMA 361 Standards. Building walls and roof deck are cas-in-place concrete. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form. 1.03 OWNEROCCUPANCY A. City of Iowa City intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with City of Iowa City to minimize conflict and to facilitate City of Iowa City's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate City of Iowa City occupancy. ren 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. City of Iowa City occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by the public. C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by City of Iowa City: 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit: D. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. E. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 7:00 am and 10:00 pm. F. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All wall assemblies, roof assemblies, window assemblies, door assemblies, and protective devices used to cover openings and penetrations in walls and roofs that are used or recommended to protect occupants shall be tested as identified in accordance with ICC 500. END OF SECTION SUMMARY 01 1000-1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Form to be used: AIA G703 modified as required to indicate complete breakdown between FEMA eligible work and FEMA Non -eligible work. 12046 B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified, submit sample to Architect/Engineer for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. F. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance, and Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Make applications for progress payments in amounts equal to ninety-five (95) percent of the value of Work completed, including cost of materials and equipment properly stored at the jobsite, less the amount of previous payments. 1. The five percent contract retainage may become payable upon issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Refer to Section 01 7700 for additional requirements. B. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. C. Form to be used: AIA G702/G703 modified as required to indicate complete breakdown between FEMA eligible work and FEMA Non -eligible work. D. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified, submit sample to Architect/Engineer for approval. E. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-1 SECTION 012000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. �z B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time - C. Change procedures. 'n D Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. '— 5 F Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Contract Sum, payment period. B. Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. C. Section 01 3343, LEED Certification Procedures. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Form to be used: AIA G703 modified as required to indicate complete breakdown between FEMA eligible work and FEMA Non -eligible work. 12046 B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified, submit sample to Architect/Engineer for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. F. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance, and Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Make applications for progress payments in amounts equal to ninety-five (95) percent of the value of Work completed, including cost of materials and equipment properly stored at the jobsite, less the amount of previous payments. 1. The five percent contract retainage may become payable upon issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Refer to Section 01 7700 for additional requirements. B. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. C. Form to be used: AIA G702/G703 modified as required to indicate complete breakdown between FEMA eligible work and FEMA Non -eligible work. D. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified, submit sample to Architect/Engineer for approval. E. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. H. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. I. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. J. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors upon request. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. K. When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to the Contract Documents, B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, ArchitecUEngineer will issue instructions directly to Contractor. C. Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Architect's form. D. For other required changes, Architect/Engineer will issue a document signed by City of Iowa City instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. E. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, ArchitecUEngineer will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 15 days. F. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect/Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the C:rgason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. G. computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. For dhange requested by Architect/Engineer for work falling under a fixed price contract, the,amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2_ Forchange requested by Contractor, the amountwill be based on the Contractor's request fora -Change Order as approved by Architect/Engineer. For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect/Engineer without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Arch itecUEngineer based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM H. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts documented. 12046 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. I. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. K. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. L. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Final Payment shall be the remaining unpaid balance of the final contract sum. B. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. C. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 2. Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. D. Final Payment shall be made 31 days following Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-3 similarly 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. I. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. K. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. L. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Final Payment shall be the remaining unpaid balance of the final contract sum. B. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. C. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 2. Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. D. Final Payment shall be made 31 days following Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 012300 -ALTERNATES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of alternates. B. Procedures for pricing alternates. _� c C. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for alternatives. B. Document 00 4113 - Bid Form: List of alternates with respective pricing. 12046 C. Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Incorporating monetary value of accepted alternatives. 1.03 ACCEPTANCEOF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at City of Iowa City's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner -Contractor Agreement B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A_ Alternate No. 1 (Add) - Lighting: 1. Description: Provide LED light fixtures specified in Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting where scheduled on the Drawings and in lieu of fluorescent light fixtures specified in Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting under the base bid. Comply with requirements of appropriate specification sections. 2. Base Bid Item: Fluorescent light fixtures, Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting and Drawing number E-101. 3. Alternate Item: LED light fixtures, Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting and Drawing number E-101. B. Alternate No. 2 (Deduct - Hand Dryers: 1. Description: Delete electric hand dryers specified in Section 26 0050 - Electrical Requirements where shown on the Drawings. Comply with requirements of appropriate specification sections. 2. Base Bid Item: electric hand dryers specified in Section 26 0050 - Electrical Requirements where shown on the Drawings. 3. Alternate Item: no hand dryers. C. Alternate No. 3: (Deduct) - Provide precast concrete roof deck in lieu of cast -in-place concrete 1. Description: Provide precast concrete roof deck in lieu of cast -in-place concrete. a. Contractor shall coordinate with precast supplier extent of precast substitution. Precast supplier to design and provide all connections between cast in place concrete and precast concrete. Precast supplier to provide design calculations for compliance with ICC -500 and noted design criteria. b. Provide alternate means and methods of sealing all precast concrete joinery to achieve a warrantable waterproof interior. 2. Base Bid Item: Section 03 0010 - Concrete and Drawing numbers S-1-1, S-2-1, S-301, & S-5-1. 3. Alternate Item: Section 03 4000 - Precast Concrete. D. Alternate No. 4 (Add / Deduct) - Factory finished steel sheet metal roofing. ALTERNATES 01 2300-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1. Description: Replace weathering steel metal panel roofing with factory finished steel panel roofing including flashing and accessories. Add or Deduct from the base bid of finished steel sheet metal roofing as specified in Section 07 6100 and the extent as indicated on Drawirgs with weathering steel panel roofing, 2. Base Bid Item: Weathering metal roofing in Section 07 6100 and Drawing number A201 including details on A501. 3. Alternative Item: Factory finished steel roofing in Section 07 6100 and Drawing number A201 including details on A501. PART2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 01 2300-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for construction access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra -project communications, submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format- This procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 1. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in electronic format; paper document transmittals will not be reviewed. 2. Electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts_ 3. Drawings and graphic presentations may be submitted in DWF format upon approval from ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-1 SECTION 013000 -ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electronic document submittal service. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Preinstallation meetings. E. Construction progress schedule. ,7 F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. a�+ H. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS - A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Stages of the Work, occupancy, - B. Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals: C. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. D. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Project record documents. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Owner's designated contact person. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for construction access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra -project communications, submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format- This procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 1. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in electronic format; paper document transmittals will not be reviewed. 2. Electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts_ 3. Drawings and graphic presentations may be submitted in DWF format upon approval from ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM the Architect. B. Construction Submittals: Refer to Section 01 3300 for additional requirements. 1. Construction submittals transmitted for purposes of review and information are to be in electronic format and transmitted via an Internet -based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. 3.02 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL SERVICE A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via Submittal Exchange, an Internet -based collaboration system for communicating documents between project team members. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2. Contractor and Subcontractors are required to use this service. 3. Contractors are required to purchase a Submittal Exchange Enterprise Subscription and include applicable fee in their bid 4. Subcontractors and suppliers originating submittal documents are required to purchase Submittal Exchange subcontractor memberships for use of the service. Contact service provider to verify cost. 5. It is Contractors responsibility to submit documents in PDF format. 6. Users of the service need an email address and Internet access. 7. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be reviewed. 8. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. B. Submittal Service: Submittal Exchange: www, submittalexchange.com, 1-800-714-0024. C. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner. 3.03 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a meeting after execution of the Owner - Contractor Agreement. B. Attendance Required: 1. City of Iowa City. 2. Arch itecUEngineer. 3. Contractor. 4. Major Subcontractors. C. L, Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Review requirements of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress c 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, the Owner's jobsite representative, the Contractor's key administrative and field personnel, and ArehitecUEngineer. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 7. Scheduling activities of a Geotechnical Engineer. 8. Use of premises by City of Iowa City and Contractor. 9. City of Iowa City's requirements and occupancy prior to completion. 10. Temporary utilities provided by City of Iowa City. 11. Survey and building layout. 12. Security and housekeeping procedures. 13. Application for payment procedures. 14. Procedures for testing. 15. Procedures for maintaining record documents. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with two copies to City of Iowa City, Contractor participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, City of Iowa City, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of scheduled pre -installation meetings. ,G 6. Review of submittals schedule and status of construction submittals. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. �t> 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect/Engineer, City of Iowa City, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.05 PRE INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Make arrangements for meetings required by separate specification sections; prepare agenda appropriate for each meeting. B. Review project conditions required for satisfactory installation of the Work. C. Require attendance of affected installers, manufacturer's representatives and others as may be necessary for the proper coordination of the Work. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect/Engineer, City of Iowa City, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.06 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 15 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 -3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Incorporate the following schedule for contract closeout: 1. Closeout Meeting: Schedule at least 45 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. Submit initial copy of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review. 2. Demonstration and Instruction: Schedule at least 15 days prior to Substantial Completion. 3. Contractor's Punchlist and Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: Submit at least 10 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. a. Architect will conduct inspection of Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Request. 4. Architect will issue "Certificate of Substantial Completion" in accordance with provisions in the Conditions of the Contract. 5. Closeout Submittals: See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 6. Final Change Order: Architect will prepare and issue within 5 days after Substantial Completion. 7. Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion: Architect will conduct Final Inspection of the Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Certificate. 8. Architect will issue Final Certificate for Payment within 5 days of completing satisfactory Final Inspection. g. Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work and Final Payment: See Section 01 2000- Price and Payment Procedures. G. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.07 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Bar Charts: Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. C. ,Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-112 x 11 inches. D. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. 3.08 CONSTRU.GTIONSUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND INFORMATION i A. .Refer toSection 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for additional requirements. - B. .When the following construction submittals are required by individual sections, submit them to `A'rchitecf for review. „I "'N Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. C. Architect's review is for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. D. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. E After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article below, ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Refer to Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for submittal requirements. B. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. �a 5. Other types as indicated. -r C. Submit for City of Iowa City's benefit during and after project completion. 3.10 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically -marked -up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right -side up, illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which=will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -GENERAL A. Refer to Section 01 3300 for additional requirements pertaining to construction submittals. B Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. D. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. E. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. H. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 013300- CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction Submittals for Review and Information. B. Preparation and transmittal of construction submittals. C. Contractor's review and Architect's approval of construction submittals. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A- Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Processing submittals. B. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals. C. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Submittals for Review: Submittals required by individual specification sections relating to a portion of the work which must be acted upon by the Architect before work on that portion begins. Note that construction submittals are NOT Contract Documents. Submittals containing information different from requirements in the Contract Documents do not affect or modify the Contract unless and until a change order is properly issued. 1. Shop Drawings: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, and schedules specifically prepared by the Contractor to illustrate and depict some portion of the work more clearly and in greater detail. 2. Coordination Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to show how multiple -system and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated to avoid conflicts resulting from available space requirements. 3. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures that illustrate physical appearance, size, and other characteristics of materials and equipment for some portion of work 4. Samples: Physical examples of materials and workmanship which illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material and establish the standards by which the work will be judged. B. Construction Phase Submittals for Information: Transmit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for OWNER. No action will be taken. 1. Design data: Performance requirements and material characteristics providing the basis for portions of the Work designed by the Contractor. 2. Documentation required by individual specification sections: a. Certificates. b. Test reports. c. Inspection reports. d. Manufacturers instructions. e. Manufacturer's field reports. J 3. Other types indicated. 1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE PARTICIPANTS , A. Contractor: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Establish a realistic submittal schedule that allows for resubmittal. 3. Coordinate submittals. 4. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents, site conditions, dimensions CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM and construction means and methods; indicate any part of the submittal that does not conform to the contract requirements. Review submittals prior to transmitting them to Architect. Use the transmittal form included with this section. Distribute approved submittals to subcontractors and others. Maintain copies of approved submittals at the jobsite for reference, and retain copy of approved submittals for the Owner's record. Maintain transmittal log and track progress. B. Subcontractors and Suppliers: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Properly prepare complete and accurate submittals with extraneous information deleted. 3. Submit in a timely manner based on construction schedule and allowing adequate time for Contractor and Architect reviews. 4. Maintain records and current status. C. Architect: 1. Specify reasonable requirements. 2. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that the Contractor has reviewed and stamped submittals. 4. Review submittals for conformance with design intent. c5, Review submittals in a timely manner, or take other appropriate action. �6) Forward submittals to consultants. 7 . Maintain a copy of approved submittals, and forward a copy to the Owner upon request. 8.- Maintain a submittal log and track progress. D. Owndr' _ 4 Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2,: Coordinate Owner -furnished items installed by the Contractor. 3: Coordinate Contractor -furnished items installed by the Owner or under a separate contract. 4.' Coordinate work to be completed under a separate contract. b.= Follow project requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS (NOTUSED) PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that Product List is complete and accurate. B. Identify practical groups of submittals and prepare initial submittal schedule. 3.02 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL SERVICE PROCEDURES A. Refer to Section 01 3000 for additional requirements. 3.03 PROCESSING SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 3000 for additional requirements. B. Attach a copy of the Project Transmittal Form to all submittals. C. Group submittals related to building elements or systems together for transmittal in accordance with submittal schedule. D. Only specified submittals will be processed by the Architect. 3.04 SUBMITTAL PREPARATION A. To aid in tracking and filing, each submittal shall contain the following information: CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1. Project name and project number, 2. Date submitted, 3. Description of the item submitted, 4. The specification section reference number, and 5. A consecutive submittal number. B. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. The purpose of the submittal shall be one of the following: 1. For approval, 2. For information only, 3. Resubmittal. C. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. D. Provide space for Architect's submittal stamp. 3.05 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A. Only submittals which have been reviewed and stamped by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the Architect. When the Contractor determines that submittals do not meet contract requirements, return them to the originator for correction or modification as appropriate. B. The purpose of the Architect's review / approval is to check submittals for conformance with the information and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Upon review by the Architect, the submittal shall be stamped with the status of the review as: 1. Approved, 2. Approved as noted, 3. Approved as noted / resubmit, or 4. Rejected / resubmit. D. Submittals which require no action or are not subject to review, will not be returned. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-3 ra ; CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ; A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. --- C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Inspection services. 1.02 CONTRACTORS'RESPONSIBILITY A. Contractor responsible for the construction of a MWFRS or any component listed In the quality assurance plan should submit a written statement of responsibility to the authority having Jurisdiction, the responsible design professional, and owner prior to the commencement of work on the system or component. The contractor's statement of responsibility should contain: 1. Acknowledgement of awareness of the special criteria contained in the quality assurance plan 2. Acknowledgement that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the construction documents 3. Procedures for exercising control within the contractor's organization, and the method and frequency of reporting and the distribution of reports 4. Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) In the organization a. Exception: Prefabricated or panelized safe room components that have been tested, inspected, and labeled or listed by an approved agency meeting the requirements of the applicable building code. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00 3100 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01 4313- Quality Assurance Inspections and Testing. D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2011. B. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction: 2010. C. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing, 2011 b D_ ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing, 2009. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications' 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialist and responsible officer. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. Test Reports: After each testlinspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Arch itecUEngineer and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. C. Name of Inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection- j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test report submittals are for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for City of Iowa City's information. C. Certificates-,, When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the mad.ufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Arch itecUEngineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. r 1'-- Inaidate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit suppoFting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. IT 2-- Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be i .. acceptable to Architect/Engineer. D_ Manufacturers Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed iristiructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the City of Iowa City's information_ Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for City of Iowa City. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. F. Erection Drawings'. Submit drawings for Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for City of Iowa City. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.06 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM F. Where referenced standards in individual specification sections are listed, the references included in those reference standards shall be incorporated into these specifications as if specifically listed. G. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. The Architect will engage and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform certain specified testing and inspection. 12046 B. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing and inspection. C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1. Contractor Employed Agency: a. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, and ASTM C1093. b. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION P; 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall: 1. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services; site Gor d tions; and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 2. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. = 3. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 4. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 5. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. 6. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. 7. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Arch itecUEngineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by ArchitecUEngineer. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Arch itecUEnginee r and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with City of Iowa City's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect/Engineer. F. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. G. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect/Engineer. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B,,,,, If, in the, opinion of Architect/Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, '`'Architeet/Engineer will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION t . ZL r c:• c - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 D. Required Inspections: 1. Footing and foundation inspection. 2. Concrete slab and under -floor inspection. 3. Lowest floor elevation certification (in flood hazard areas). 4. Other inspections as may be required by the building official to ascertain compliance with the provisions of codes and other laws enforced by the department of building safety. QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 01 4313- 1 SECTION 014313 - QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following: B. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design - US Dept of Justice Revised Regulations for Titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661-302.1 C. 28 CFR 35 - Department of Justice accessibility regulations relating to State and local governments; current edition. D. 28 CFR 36 - Department of Justice accessibility regulations relating to public accommodations; current edition. E. State of Iowa amendments to some or all of the following. F. City of Iowa City amendments to some or all of the following. G. ICC (IFC) - ICC International Fire Code, 2009. H. ICC (IBC) - ICC International Building Code, 2009. I. ICC (IPC) - ICC International Plumbing Code, 2009. J. ICC (IMC) - ICC International Mechanical Code, 2009. K. P ICC (IFGC) - ICC International Fuel Gas Code, 2009. L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2008. M. ICC (IECC) - ICC International Energy Conservation Code, 2009. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. 1.03 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Notify Inspection Agency when work is ready for inspection. B. Ensure work to be inspected remains exposed for inspection purposes until approved. C. Provide access to and means for inspection of the work. 1.04 REQUIRED INSPECTIONS A, Reference: IBC -2009; Chapter 1, Section 110. B. Application: Construction or work for which a permit is required. C. Inspection Agencies: 1. Building Official. 2. Other Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Approved Inspection Agency having satisfactory qualifications and reliability. D. Required Inspections: 1. Footing and foundation inspection. 2. Concrete slab and under -floor inspection. 3. Lowest floor elevation certification (in flood hazard areas). 4. Other inspections as may be required by the building official to ascertain compliance with the provisions of codes and other laws enforced by the department of building safety. QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 01 4313- 1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL TESTS A. Reference: IBC -2009; Chapter 17, Section 1704. B. Application: Construction or work, the design of which involves the practice of professional engineering or architecture as defined by applicable state statutes. C. Statement of Special Inspections 1. Include with contract documents as condition for issuing permit. 2. Prepared by the registered design professional in responsible charge in accordance with IBC -2009; Chapter 17, Section 1705. 3. Content: a. Materials, systems, components and work required to have special inspection or testing. I Type and extent of each special inspection. c. Type and extent of each test. d. Additional requirements for special inspection or testing for wind resistance as specified in Section 1705.4, e. For each type of special inspection, identify whether it will be continuous or periodic inspection. D. Special Inspectors / Approved Agencies: 1. Owner shall employ one or more approved agencies to perform inspections during construction of the types of work requiring special inspection. 2. Special Inspector shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence for the inspection of the particular type of construction or operation requiring special inspection. 3. The registered design professional in responsible charge and the engineers of record involved in the design of the project are permitted to act as the approved agency. E. Reports: 1. Special Inspectors shall keep records of inspections-, and furnish inspection reports to the building official and to the registered design professional in responsible charge. 2. Reports shall indicate that work inspected was (or was not) completed in conformance to requirements of approved construction documents. 3. Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. 4. Final Report: At the agreed time, the registered design professional in responsible charge shall prepare a final report documenting required special inspections and correction of discrepancies noted in the inspections, and shall submit such report to the building official. F. Special Inspections: 1. Verification and Inspection of Concrete Construction. Section 1704.4 and Table 1704.4 a. Inspection of reinforcing steel, prestressing tendons, and placement b. Inspection of bolts embedded in concrete. C. Inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete. d. Verifying use of required design mix. cli e. ,..When fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform _. "slump and air content tests, and determine concrete temperature. f.= -Inspection of concrete placement for proper installation techniques. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. cr• h-'': _Inspection of prestressed concrete. Erection of precast concrete members. Verification of in-situ concrete strength prior to removal of shores and forms from .beams and structural slabs. k Inspect for shape, location and dimensions of formwork for cast -in-place concrete work. 2. Verification and Inspection of Soils, Table 1704.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014313-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 a. Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity. b. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached satisfactory material. c. Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials. d. Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill. e. Prior to placement of compacted fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly. 3. Verification and Inspection of Cast -in -Place Deep Foundation Elements, Table 1704.9 1.06 FEMA TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Prior to substantial completion and acceptance of the facility, submit a completed FEMA Checklist for Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms using FEMA 361, Edition 2, Form B.2. 1. Substantial Completion will not be granted without the aforementioned completed FEMA mandated information to certify the facility meets or exceeds FEMA Standards and Guidelines for Community Safe Rooms. 2. Use the guidelines recommendations when the form uses the term "should" which shall be interpreted as "shall" except as otherwise permitted or directed by the Architect. 3. Collaborative effort with the Owner and Architect may be required to complete the checklist concerning planning and design information. The Contractor shall make a good faith effort to obtain all information required by FEMA 361, Ed. 2, Form B.2 or certify in writing why that information cannot be obtained. 4. When testing and / or inspections are required by the form, by completing it in an affirmative way, the Contractor certifies the required inspections and / or tests have been performed and the results were satisfactory according the approved testing and acceptance criteria required by codes and FEMA 361. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION ' y a QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 014313-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary telecommunications services. B. Temporary sanitary facilities- j C. Security requirements. D. Vehicular access and parking_ E. Waste removal facilities and services. F. Project identification sign. 1.02 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary software and laser printer. 2. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster. 3. Email: Account/address reserved for project use. C. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.03 TEM PORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.04 FENCING A. Construction: Contractors option. B. Provide minimum 3 FT high foot high fence around construction site. 1.05 SECURITY A. The contractor is responsible for the safety and security of the project site 1.06 VEHICULARACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and City of Iowa City. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Existing parking areas located at the project site may be used for construction parking. 1. Contractor's and subcontractors' vehicles may not occupy more than 50% of the parking spaces. 2. Parking shall be restricted to the paved parking lot. No parking is permitted on unpaved parkland TEMPORARY arkland TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000- 1 WIMIi 1.07 WASTE REMOVAL SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly. D. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated in Drawings. B. Erect on site at location indicated. C. No other signs are allowed without City of Iowa City permission except those required by law. 1.09 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. PART2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL' ra 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. B Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. C- Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for VOC-restricted product categories D. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal requirements potentially affecting packaging and substitutions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. All wall, roof, window, and door assemblies that are installed shall be tested as identified in accordance with ICC 500. C. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. D. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site: obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section, B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that It meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3 Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to City of Iowa City. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse City of Iowa City and ArchitecUEngineer for review or redesign services associated with acceptance of substitutions and re -approval by authorities. ct E. .`Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision.to the Contract Documents. F. .-SubstiYu#ion Submittal Procedure: -T :*ulimit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one propgsed substitution. t2 Sub hit shop drawings, product data. and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products complywith requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 016116 -VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS." B. All products of each category that are installed in the project must comply; City of Iowa City's project goals do not allow for partial compliance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing and certifications. C. Section 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality Controls: Procedures and testing; LEED requirements. D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, substitutions and product options, delivery, storage, and handling. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or applied on-site in the building interior: B. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CAL (CHPS LEM) - Low -Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS); current edition at www.chps.neU. B. CAL (VOC) - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers (including Addendum 2004-01); Kstate of California Department of Health Services; 2004. C. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program -Approved Products; Carpet and Rug . y Institute; Current Edition. D. GEI (SCH)- GREENGUARD"Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARb Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org. E. GreenSeal GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2000. F. GreenSeal GS -11 - Paints, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993. G. GreenSeal GC -03 - Anti -Corrosive Paints, 2nd edition, January 7, 1997. H. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.agmd.gov. I. SCAQMD 1113- South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; January 1, 2004 rules. J. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products, Scientific Certification Systems, current listings at www-scscertifiied. com. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 016116-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM C. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit product data showing compliance, except when another type of evidence of compliance is required. D. Installer Certifications for Accessory Materials: Require each installer of any type of product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All VOC-Restricted Products: Provide products having VOC content of types and volume not greater than those specified in State of California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current GREENGUARD Children & Schools certification; www.greenguard.org. b. Current SCS Indoor Advantage Gold certification; www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low -Emitting Materials Product List at www.chps.neUmanual/lem_table.htm. d. Current certification by any other agencies acceptable to CHPS. e. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with CHPS requirements for getting a product listed in the Low -Emitting Materials Product List, report must include laboratory's statement that the product meets the specified criteria. 2. Product data submittals showing VOC content are NOT acceptable forms of evidence. 3. Exception: The product categories listed below are not required to comply with this requirement, B. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not greater than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements. C_ Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not greater than required by GreenSeal GS -36. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a- Current GreenSeal Certification. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. IX Paints and Coatings: 1. -'.Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following- a-- VOC content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS -11, Paints, 1 st Edition, May 20, 1993 for architectural paints and coatings. � b�; VOC content limit established in Green Seal Standard GC -03, Anti -Corrosive Paints, 2nd Edition January 7, 1997 for Anti- corrosive and anti- rust paints. : VOC content limit established in SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings in effect -ti January 1, 2004 for clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs. Determination of VOC Content: CAL (VOC) - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers (including Addendum 2004-01), State of California Department of Health Services; 2004. exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site, or other method VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 016116-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. City of Iowa City reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to City of Iowa City. B. All additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 6116 - 3 73 7 r is VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 6116 - 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 017300 -EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre -installation meetings. C. Cutting and patching. D. Laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Starting of systems and equipment. ., 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 12046 A. Section 01 1000 -Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated equipment and materials. B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. D. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities. E. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. F. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout procedures related to achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work. G. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparing operation and maintenance manuals and obtaining warranties and bonds. H. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for general submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone numberof Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Iowa and acceptable to Architect/Engineer. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 - 1 12046 the form of an Insurance Certificate. SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Iowa. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 4. Periodically Inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation, promptly apply corrective measures. F. Noise Control: Comply with city regulations. G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 1000- Summary, for occupancy -related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. -5 E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which areindicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficien8y'to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. -4F. +n-finished'areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the bonsttrfictbn. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordin& completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. H. Mer City of Iowa City occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of City of Iowa City's activities. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS 12046 A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. r.� PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsettuerat-worK_,-"; Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being ' applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. .' D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect/Engineer, City of Iowa City, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Protect and preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Architect/Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect/Engineer. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. T Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading and fill placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation and ground floor elevations. K. Periodically verify layouts by same means. L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level. unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or rron-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to 5.�6vide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute palchiAg'td complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. B. Ezecutei work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate su,rfaaes°to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original -condition. C. E;mployoriginal installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant �f ments,'and sight exposed surfaces. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 E- Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. H. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. I. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched. refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. o D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dijpose, off-site; do not burn or bury. d 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLEDWORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed, reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.09 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Arch itecUEngineer and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-5 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products, equipment and systems to City of Iowa City's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of designated items of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Provide a qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with City of Iowa City's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems See Section 23 0593. 3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by City of Iowa City prior to final completion before City of Iowa City occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. ,Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view: remove temporary labels, stains and ' Feign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the sulrface'and material being cleaned. :E. Cjeanfilterp of operating equipment. F. dean'ddb,r*is from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. G. Cfean sitel sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site, dispose of in legal manner, do not burn or bury. 3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Refer to Section 01 7700. B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. City of Iowa City will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 1000 - Summary. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7300-7 �Y•i�Yr:imc.�:c•�:�:tL��_vL�y�y�:zz•�a, SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. City of Iowa City requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills, reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. 12046 D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring. 5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps. 6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, pipipg, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel F' stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. C:) P" ;-� 7. Glass. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implefpent thgse requirements. F Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: -' 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. C. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Handling and disposal of land clearing debris. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted, not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediatelyor after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Submit Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner; submit projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling. C. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information - 1 . nformation:1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost r,3 of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). .3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials thatwill be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. a.-. - List each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled. List the local market for each material. -A. .MJ�terials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted frown- landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by �.: designated facilities, include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 5 Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site -separated and self -hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 PART2 PRODUCTS PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. B. See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. C. See Section 01 7300 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENTPLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, City of Iowa City, and Architect/Engineer. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycligR, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages 6f'the project. !n 71 D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meeCngs., 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre -construction meeting. 3. Regular job -site meetings. - E_ Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for,recycling; salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. r..� 1. As a minimum, provide: a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood cut-offs for blocking. b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable. c. Recycling bins at worker lunch area. 2. Provide containers as required. 3. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be recycled or salvaged. 4. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic. 5. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 6. If an enclosed area is not provided, clearly lay out and label a specific area on-site. 7. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On -Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract closeout procedures related to: ry 1. Substantial Completion of the Work and - 2. Final inspection and Owner's acceptance of the Work. B. Closeout submittals including: 1. Substantial Completion documents. 2. Final Completion documents a. Final Application for Payment with supporting documents. b. Project Record Documents. c. Warranties and Bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Performance and Payment Bonds, warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Individual product sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual product sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Substantial Completion: The stage in the progress of the Work when the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: Submit three copies written certification and related documentation certifying that status of Work is consistent with "Substantial Completion". B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide three sets of revised documents in final form for use by Owner's personnel. Refer to Section 01 7823 for additional requirements. C. Material and Product Warranties: Submit fully executed manufacturers' warranties within ten days following Date of Substantial Completion except as follows: 1. For equipment and component parts of equipment put into service during construction with OWNER"S permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance, list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period . 2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. D. Claim for Final Payment: Submit three copies of required final Application for Payment forms together with supporting documents. E. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Submit two copies of required forms with claim for Final Payment. F. Project Record Documents: Submit required Record Documents with claim for Final Payment. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City of CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-1 12046 Iowa City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 COORDINATION SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and inspection of the work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly closeout procedure, with provision for accommodating items installed later. B. Final Utility Connections: Notify affected utility companies and complywith their requirements for final connections. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate completion and ensure clean-up of work of separate sections of the Project Manual. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Comply with additional requirements in Section 01 7823. 2. Include operating instructions and maintenance data prepared by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described equipment and systems. 3. Use Operating and Maintenance Manuals as reference for instruction of Owner's personnel. B. Demonstration and Training: 1. Comply with additional requirements in Section 01 7900. 2. Prior to Substantial Completion, perform demonstration and train Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems designated in individual sections of the Project Manual. C. Preliminary Inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Schedule and conduct preliminary inspection of the Work accompanied by Owner's Project Representative. a. Determine and identify items to be listed for correction and completion (punchlist) on Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion. 2. Verify that surface finish materials are properly installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and exposed surfaces are clean and free from damage. 4� 3,. Verify final adjustment of operating items, equipment and system components to ensure k_ smooth and unhindered operation. :4c Verify specific operating and performance requirements described in individual specification secfi®ns. 5- Verify that utility services are properly connected and of the correct characteristics. 16.1 Verify inspection and acceptance of the respective portions of the Work by Authorities i_L Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: 1. Provide the necessary assurance that the progress of the Work is consistent with Substantial Completion as defined by the Contract Documents. 2. Upon receipt of the required forms the Architect will schedule and conduct a Substantial Completion Inspection. B. Certificate of Substantial Completion: Upon verification of Contractor's Punchlist, and subsequent determination by Architect that status of Work is suitable for occupancy by the Owner, the Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Doc G704-2000). CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Upon issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor may request payment of the contract retainage of in accordance with the contract documents and applicable state law. This request shall be accompanied by a sworn statement from the Contractor that ten calendar days prior to date of the request, known subcontractors, sub -subcontractors and suppliers received notice of the Contractor's intent. The Contractor shall release retained funds to subcontractors in the same manner as retained funds are released to the Contractor by the Owner. 1. Payment will be withheld on the value of work not yet performed as of date of Substantial Completion. The retained amount shall be equal to two hundred percent of the actual value of labor and materials yet to be provided as determined by the Architect. 2. Additional funds will be withheld equal to two hundred percent of the value of Chapter 573 claims currently on file. D. Complete and correct respective items of work listed and attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion within 30 days following Date of Substantial Completion. 3.03 FINAL CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion: Certify that the Work is complete and has Ogen inspected and found to be in compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Claim for Final Payment: P 1. Prepare application for payment on approved forms. 2. Amount of final payment shall be the unpaid balance of the contract sum; 3. Final payment shall be made 31 calendar days following date of Owner's -w,' n acceptance of the completed Work. " '+ C. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Prepare the following: 1. "Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" (AIA Doc G706). 2. "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Doc G706A). a. Include separate waivers of lien from subcontractors, suppliers, and others with lien rights against property of the Owner. 3. Obtain "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" (AIA Doc G707). D. Project Record Documents - 1 - ocuments:1. Submit one set of the following Record Documents, record actual revisions to the Work: a. Drawings b. Specifications c. Addenda d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by the Owner. 3. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: a. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. b. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. c. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 4. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: a. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. b. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. c. Field changes of dimension and detail. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. Material and Product Warranties: 1. Obtain required warranties executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with OWNER'S permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co -execute warranty documents when required. 4. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal. 5. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals; indicate on Table of Contents. 3.04 FINAL INSPECTION OF THE WORK A. Following submittal of required closeout documents, the Architect will conduct a Final Inspection of the Work. B. Accompany Owner's Project Representative and Architect on final inspection of the Work. C. Complete items of work determined and identified during final inspection. 3.05 OWNER'S FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK A. Upon satisfactory completion of the Work, the Architect will recommend acceptance of the completed Work by the Owner and final payment to the Contractor. B. The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of the effective date of their acceptance of the completed Work. END OF SECTION c, s CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Operation and Maintenance Data. r_> B. Warranties and bonds. �r 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS > A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop.drawinp,product data, and samples. C. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Contract closeout procedures. 7 D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Preliminary Draft: Prepare one copies within 30 days after start of Work to be submitted in electronic format. Indicate proposed formats and outlines of contents. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by City of Iowa City, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit 1 electronic copy of completed documents upon 50 percent completion of construction operations. Submitted documents be returned within 15 days, with Architect/Engineer review comments. Revise content of all document sets required for final submission. 4. Submit three sets of revised final documents in final form at least 15 days prior to estimated date of "Substantial Completion" for use by Owner's personnel during demonstration and training activities specified in Section 01 7900. B. Product and Material Warranties: Obtain required manufacturer's warranties; assemble original documents in separate three-ring binder to be submitted within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 1. Ensure that manufacturer's warranties have been completed in OWNER's name and registered with respective manufacturer. 2. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. PART2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers, 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM D_ Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS, identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text, fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume. with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project, names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties, schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. ,For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and,suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. —Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systermg, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as '-mainiemance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CARE AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 2. Information for re -ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS c. ' tT i A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. c 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions'. :! t 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, an(E. communications; typed. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions_ E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions, and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. L. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. M. Include test and balancing reports. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 WARRANTIES A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with City of Iowa City's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM Table of Contents. E. Manual of Warranties and Bonds: Bind original documents in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. 1. Cover: Identify binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. 2. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. 3. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION I t � C -Y OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION #03 00 10 — CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast -in-place concrete including formwork, reinforcing steel and miscellaneous materials. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings on reinforcing steel. Submit to Architect unless noted otherwise. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Establish proposed concrete design mix proportions on basis of either field experience and/or trial mixtures in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5, except specific requirements shall conform to requirement of these specifications. Determine and submit supporting data, standard deviation, trial batch tests, required average strength, proportions, air content, and slump range for each mix. 2. Provide reports to Architect giving information on materials, concrete design mixes and testing performed. B. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 117 and 301. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ; R. 7 A. Cement: Keep clean, dry, and free from weather damage. B. Aggregates: Stockpile each gradation separately on clean, noncontaminafing surface. PART PRODUCTS — 2.01 CEMENT w A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. High -early -strength portland cement: ASTM C150, Type III. Maybe used instead of Type I cement at Contractor's option, unless specified otherwise, to achieve 28 -day strength at 7 days. C. White cement: Nonstaining, ASTM C150, Type I. D. Use only 1 brand of each type of cement. 2.02 AGGREGATE A. Regular aggregate: Strong, durable, well -graded minerals conforming to ASTM C33 requirements for grading, deleterious substances and soundness. B. Aggregates not conforming exactly to above specifications may be used provided: 1. Special tests or actual service establish that such aggregates will produce concrete of quality specified. CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE # 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 2. An Addendum to Specifications is issued prior to receipt of Bids: no deviations will be permitted after receipt of Bids. C. Coarse aggregate nominal size: 1. 1-1/2" to No. 4: Use for all concrete unless specified otherwise. 2. 3/4" to No. 4: Use for slabs and thin sections and areas where clear spacing between reinforcing bars is less than 3". 2.03 FLY ASH A. Comply with ASTM C618; Class C. Report chemical analysis of fly ash in accordance with ASTM C311. Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D5759. B. Fly ash for total Project shall be obtained from single source. C. Design concrete mixes to include fly ash in amount of approximately 15% to 20% of cement by weight. D. May be used at Contractor's option for all concrete, 2.04 SILICA FUME A. Comply with ASTM C1240. 2.05 WATER A. Clean, fresh, free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, acid, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Mix water shall comply with ASTM C1 602. 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Water -reducing and set -controlling admixture, ASTM C494, type as required. Use for all concrete. B. Air entraining agent, ASTM C260. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use for concrete exposed to weather, C. Xypex or equal waterproofing agent. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use for all concrete, except footings. 2.07 REINFORCING A. Bars: -.1. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 deformed bars. 2. Benz] bars cold to conform to required details. B.: Welded 'wire fabric: ASTM A185 plain wire in flat sheets. 2.08 FORMWbRK A. Forms `- 1;. Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood, 5/8" thick minimum, conforming to DOC r PS 1, Grade B -B, Class I or 11., with form liner, CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE # 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 2. Removable metal forms with surfaces equal to Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood. Required at surfaces not lined with form liner. B. Form ties: Type leaving no metal within 1" of finished surface after removal of forms. C. Form coating: 1. Wood forms: Nonstaining mineral oil or commercially produced form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and curing, and will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces, "Nox-Crete Form Coating," by Nox-Crete Chemicals, or equal. 2. Metal forms: Treat surfaces as recommended by manufacturer before placing reinforcing. 2.09 JOINT MATERIALS A. Expansion joint filler: 1. Preformed bituminous type, ASTM D994 Expansion joint sealant: 1. Horizontal joints: "Sonolastic SL2," multi-component polyurethane base by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 2. Vertical joints: "Sonolastic NP -2," multi-component polyurethane base by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 3. Provide primer as recommended by manufacturer. C. Sawed control joint sealant: 1. "Masterfill 300," 2 -part flexible 100% solids epoxy joint filler, by BASF`C'onstrue#ion Chemicals, or equal. 2. Use for sawed control joints. c� 2.10 BENTONITE WATERSEALS A. Size and Use: 1" x 3/4", at all cold joints. B. Manufacturer: American Colloid Company "Waterstop-RX Cold Joint Water Stop`Vblclay Waterproofing Systems," or equal. 2.11 CURING MATERIALS A. Liquid membrane -forming compound: 1. ASTM C309, Type 1 with fugitive dye, except Type 2 with white pigment for surfaces exposed to direct rays of sun. 2. Do not use compounds containing wax, oil, resin, varnish, or other bases that will prevent bonding of finishes. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for particular application. B. Plastic film: 1. Polyethylene plastic film, white, nonstaining, conforming to ASTM D2103. 2. Minimum 4 -mil thickness. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for particular application. C. Absorptive mat: CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE 4 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1. Cotton fabric, burlap fabric, or burlap -polyethylene material woven or bonded to prevent separation. 2. Material shall be clean and nondetrimental to concrete or finish. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for particular application. 2.12 SURFACE FINISH MATERIALS A. Curing and sealing compound: 1. Initial curing and sealing application: "Vocomp-20" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. 2. Final sealing application: "Vocomp-25" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. 3. Final application immediately before turning slab area over to Owner: "Vocomp-25" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. 4. Use: All floor slabs 2.13 GROUT A. Regular grout: 1. One part portland cement to 3 parts fine aggregate with sufficient water to maintain adequate workability. Substitute white cement for normal portland cement to match color of adjacent concrete. 2. Minimum strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days. 3. Use for patching. 2.14 CONCRETE DESIGN AND USE A. Each concrete design mix shall be established in strict accordance with ACI 318 by proportioning on basis of either experience and/or trial mixtures. B. Strength classifications: Class Specified Compressive Strength, f c Required Average Compressive Strength, f'cr A 4,000 psi 5,200 psi B 2,500 psi 3,500 psi :C 3, 000 psi 4, 200 psi C� Required average compressive strengths: Produce concrete of average strengths noted - above -unless test results substantiate a lower permissible average strength based on r_::.stantlaYd deviation criteria set forth in ACI 318. Strengths listed above are 7 -day strengths :ifor co' 'rete using high -early -strength cement and 28 -day strengths for concrete using other ✓type cements. D. Maximum water -cement ratio: 0.48 by. Where pOZZOIan fly ash is used, water -cement plus pozzolan ratio shall not exceed specified ratio. E. Air entrainment Concrete shall contain entrained air within following limits. CONCRETE SECTION 403 00 10 - PAGE # 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM Nominal Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate, In. Total Air Content,% By Volume 3/4" 4 to 8 1-1/2" 3 to 6 12046 F. Workability: 1. Proportions of concrete shall produce a mixture, suited to placement methods, which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and embedded items. Segregation of materials or presence of free water will not be permitted. 2. Slump of concrete: Use minimum practical; vary within limits given to suit placement conditions; in no case is slump to be increased by addition of water in excess of design mix ouantity� Type of Construction Slump, in. Minimum Maximum All concrete unless noted otherwise 2 5 Building columns 3 5 �a G. Concrete use: 1. Class A: Use for all concrete unless specified otherwise. 2.15 READY -MIX CONCRETE - A. Provide concrete from an established, approved ready -mix plant. Ready-rtiix;plant equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with NRMCA QG-3. B. Equipment and methods: Conform to ASTM C94/C94M. 2.16 FINISHED CONCRETE A. Mix design: Comply with ASTM C595. Provide following: 1. Fly ash: Provide replacement rate of up to 15%. 2.17 ACCESSORIES A. Curing compounds, sealers, and coatings: 1. Water-based. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Construct forms strong, straight, adequately braced and securely fastened. B. Remove laitance from previously placed or existing concrete; thoroughly clean surface before placing additional concrete. C. Apply form coating on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE 9 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 D. Do not apply form coating where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive applied coverings which may be affected by agent. 3.02 PLACING CONCRETE A. Clean transporting equipment, reinforcing, and embedded items before placing concrete. Remove water and debris from places to be occupied by concrete. B. Place no concrete until forms, reinforcing, and embedded items have been verified as adequately supported and accurately placed. Place no concrete over water -covered, muddy, or frozen soil. C. Immediately remove concrete where water, soils, or other deleterious substances are permitted to mix with concrete, form or embedded item movement occurs, or inadequate consolidation is obtained. D. Hot weather concreting: 1. Applies to concrete placed when ambient temperature exceeds 90°F. 2. Conform to ACI 305R recommendations and requirements. E. Cold weather concreting: 1. Applies to concrete placed when ambient temperature is below 40°F. 2. Conform to ACI 306R recommendations and requirements. 3. If temporary heating facilities used are of type which produce an atmospheric condition of high carbon dioxide content, seal off concrete in such manner that no damage will result to concrete surface. F. Employ best industry practices to prevent segregation during placing. Do not drop concrete more than 5'. Use tremied or pumped concrete to provide proper placement. Place in layers approximately 18" deep. G- Place concrete continuously in each section until completed. Permit not more than 30 minutes between depositing adjacent layers of concrete within each section, unless an acceptable set retarder is used in concrete mix. H.. Thoroughly compact, puddle. and vibrate concrete into corners and around reinforcing and embedded items- Use internal vibration where size of section permits. L Maintain -concrete placing temperature between WE and 90"F except as specified for hot `'and cold weather concreting. J. -Place sections of concrete in sequence that eliminates shrinkage effects to greatest extent `practicable. K. ;Protect "concrete from injury due to sun, cold weather, running water, construction operations, `'Md other causes until properly cured. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Remove scale, loose flaky rust, dirt, grease, curing compound, and other coatings that would impair bond. B. Install slab -reinforcing bars in correct position by use of preformed bolsters and spacers, except concrete blocks may be used to position bars in concrete placed on grade. Concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of surrounding concrete. CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE # 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Space bars properly and tie securely in position before placing concrete. Tack welding to keep reinforcing in place is not permitted. D. Lap wire fabric not less than 8". 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Install only where shown or where specifically permitted. 12 �. B. Provide keyway 1-1/2" deep covering approximately 1/3 area of construction jgint,lunless shown otherwise. C. Install waterstop where shown or specified. D. Location where not shown: 1. Contractor shall locate joints using the following guide for Architect's review. 2. At other places least likely to impair strength and appearance. , E. A delay, until concrete is no longer plastic, shall occur after placing concrete for columns or walls before placing concrete for slabs, beams, or girders supported thereon. F. Slabs -on -grade: Place concrete in continuous side-by-side strips. Saw -cut control joints as soon as possible after concrete hardens and within 24 hours. Allow initial shrinkage of concrete to take place (ideally 90-120 days) before applying sealant. 3.05 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Formed joints: Make exposed edge of concrete slightly rounded with edger at joints to contain joint sealant. B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Set preformed material securely in place before placing concrete. C. Install joint filler to within joint width (1/2" minimum) of exposed surface. Fill remainder of joint with joint sealant. 3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Install items required under this contract to be embedded in concrete. Install items required by others for embedding in concrete, if so instructed before placing concrete. B. Fasten embedded items securely in proper position before placing concrete. C. Conduit or pipe embedded in slabs or walls: 1. Locate in center of slab or wall and space not closer than 3 diameters on center, locate to avoid impairing strength of concrete - 2. Coordinate placing of reinforcing with conduit or pipe location. Do not cut reinforcing to clear conduit or pipe. D- Aluminum pipe shall not be embedded in concrete. Where aluminum projects into or rests against surface of concrete, coat surfaces of aluminum to prevent direct contact with concrete. 3.07 WATERSTOPS CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE # 7 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Hold securely in proper position by tying with wire, clamping between members, or other method to prevent waterstop from being moved out of position or bent over due to placement of concrete. B. Join ends by heat -sealing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.08 GROUTING A. Roughen concrete surfaces by light chipping to remove laitance to approximately 112". Do not expose reinforcing steel. B. Remove materials which might interfere with bond; prepare surfaces in strict conformance to manufacturer's instructions. C. Mix, place, and cure grout in strict accordance to manufacturer's instructions. D. Remove shims after grout is placed. Fill shim voids with grout. 3.09 FINISHING A. Flatwork: 1. Tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate down from surface. 2. Screed with straightedge, eliminate high and low places, bring surface to required finish elevations; slope uniformly to drains. 3. Dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing operations is not permitted. 4. Apply curing compounds and similar materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during or after finishing. 5. Finish surfaces within following tolerances as measured with a 10' straightedge: a. Other slabs: 3/16". b. Top surfaces of structures other than slabs: In accordance with ACI 117. 6. Trowel finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane, b. Steel trowel to smooth, uniform finish, free of defects; steel trowel second time to final burnish finish; use edger on exposed edges. 7. Float finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane. b. Float second time to uniform finish with wood or cork float; use edger on exposed edges. 8. Broomed or belted finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane. b. -___Steel trowel to smooth, uniform surface. c. Broom with fiber brush or drag burlap belt across surface in direction transverse to kraffic flow. V 'Use on sidewalks, paving, and exterior slabs at door entrances. c. r B. Formed surfaces: 1 Remove fins, projections, and loose material. 0:2. Glean surfaces of form oil. 3. Patch honeycomb, aggregate pockets, voids, and holes as follows. a Chip out until sound concrete is exposed to minimum depth of 1 ". b- Prepare patching mortar with approximately 2 parts normal portland cement, one part white cement, 9 parts fine aggregate; vary proportions of cement as necessary to match color of adjacent concrete. c. Saturate surfaces with water and fill cavities with patching mortar. 4. Fill holes left by form ties with patching mortar. CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE # 8 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 5. Cure patches as specified for concrete. 3.10 FORM REMOVAL A. Minimum time before removal after placing concrete, unless permitted otherwise: 1. Footings: 24 hours. 2. Walls, piers, and columns: 48 hours (24 hours for metal -lined forms). 3. Self -supported slabs: 14 days. 4. Time specified above represents cumulative time during which temperature of concrete is maintained above 50°F and for concrete without set -controlling admixtures. B. Reduce removal time by half for high -early -strength cement concrete. C. In any event, do not remove supporting forms and shoring until concrete has acquired sufficient strength to safely support own weight plus construction loads. D. Take care when removing forms that concrete is not marred or gouged and that corners are true, sharp and unbroken. 3.11 CURING A. Cure all concrete, begin curing as soon as possible after placement of concrete. B. Use of liquid membrane -forming curing compound permitted for all concrete except where product would impair bond of other applied materials to surface, or where other method of curing is specified for particular use. C. Plastic film curing: 1. Dampen surface of concrete and lay plastic film with minimum 6" side laps and free of wrinkles, tape side laps. 2. Hold film in place with lumber or use similar provisions to prevent exposure of concrete for 7 days after placing. 3. Immediately repair tears in film. D. Water curing: 1. Keep concrete continuously wet for 7 days after placing. 2. Use on concrete surfaces not receiving compound or plastic film curing_: _ 3. Clean, nonstaining absorptive mat may be used with water curing. 4. Do not use for curing cold weather concrete. 3.12 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUND A. Initial curing and sealing application shall be applied immediately after concrete has sufficiently set to allow application without damaging surface. B. Second application shall be applied 28 days after slab is cast. C. Final application shall be applied immediately before turning the slab area over to Owner. END OF SECTION CONCRETE SECTION #03 00 10 - PAGE 4 9 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 033310 - CONCRETE WALL SYSTEM PART 1GENERAL c. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ca A. Construction of textured and colored formed concrete surfaces using simulated stone masonry molds and color stain system designed to duplicate closely the appearance of naturaf stone. 1.02 RELATEDSECTIONS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in-place Concrete: Cast -in-place concrete, concrete reinforcements, accessories, curing, and form work. Quality standards specified in Section 03300 Shall apply to concrete used for this Section. - c 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and pattern of the concrete surface shall follow the manufacturer's standard drawing. If an actual stone surface or stone wall to be matched is available, the completed colored and formed concrete surface shall match the natural material as closely as possible. Patterning of simulated stone masonry shall appear natural and non -repeating. Seam lines or match lines caused from two of more molds coming together will not be apparent when viewing final wall. Final coloration of cast stone concrete surface shall accurately simulate the appearance of real stone including the multiple colors, shades, flecking, and veining that is apparent in real stone. It shall also demonstrate the colors that may be apparent from aging, such as staining from oxidation, rusting and/or organic staining from soil and /or vegetation. Note that in, a sample and mockup are required. Upon approval by Architect/Engineer and Owner, mockup shall serve as quality standard for the project. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Sample Panel: Within 30 days of receiving the general contract, General Contractor is required to submit a 24? x 24? sample of the simulated stone masonry finish. Sample is to demonstrate the finish described in section 1.04, DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Approval of sample panel is required by Architect/ Engineer and Owner. B. Shop Drawings: Plan, elevation, and details to show overall pattern, joint locations, form tie locations, and end, edge and other special conditions. C. Samples: Form ties, sample and description, showing method of separation when forms are removed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer of simulated stone masonry molds and custom coloring system: Five years experience making stone masonry molds and color stains to create formed concrete surfaces to match natural stone shapes, surface textures, and colors. B. Pre -Installation Meeting: Schedule a conference with manufacturer representative to assure understanding of simulated stone masonry, molds use, color application, requirements for construction of mockup, and to coordinate the work. 1. Attendance of electrical contractor at the pre -installation meeting is mandatory to coordinate rough -ins for electrical devices. C. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318, current editions. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. E. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. 1. Take precautions to minimize plastic shrinkage cracking. Coordinate with additional CONCRETE WALL SYSTEM 033310-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM requirements in Section 03 3931. Do not place concrete when the following conditions are anticipated unless proper precautions are taken: a. High ambient or concrete temperatures. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. G. Concrete Finisher Qualifications: At least two individuals performing the work of this section with minimum three years of documented experience and ACI certified. H. MOCK-UP 1. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special treatment or finish as result of formwork. a. Panel Size: 4x6 feet. 2. Cast concrete against mock-up panel. Obtain acceptance of resulting surface finish prior to erecting formwork 3. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up exposed to view for duration of concrete work. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: Apply color stain when ambient temperatures is between 50 and 100 degrees F. Consult manufacturer if conditions differ from this requirement. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Schedule color stain application with earthwork and back -filling of any wall areas making sure that all simulated stone texture is colored to the minimum distance below grade. Delay adjacent plantings until color application is completed_ Coordinate work to permit coloring applications without interference from other trades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The specified system is based on the Custom Rock® Concrete Wall System, Custom Rock, St. Paul, Minnesota 55116, phone (651)699-1345, or equal as approved by the Department. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Simulated masonry molds: Reusable and made of high-strength urethane, easily attachable to forms. Molds shall not compress more than 1/4 in. when concrete is poured at rate of 10 vertical feet per hour. Molds shall be removable without causing deterioration of surface or underlying concrete. The wall mold pattern shall be # by Custom Rock, St. Paul, MN (651) 699-1345 B. Release Agent: Compatible with simulated stone masonry molds and with color stain system to be applied to surface. Consult manufacturer. C. Form ties. Shall be made of either metal or fiberglass. Using metal ties, which result in a portion r - of the tie permanently embedded in the concrete, shall be designed to separate at least one inch rback from finished surface, leaving only a neat hole that can be plugged with patching material. .'.:Contractor shall submit the type of form ties to the engineer, project designer, or Owner for rapproyal'prior to use in this work, D. Mortar Joints: Joints shall be colored to simulate real mortar _ .,.„.x D. _Color stain: Special stain mix as provided by manufacturer, shall achieve color variations ,_present in the natural stone being simulated for this project, as required by Architect/Engineer to nd:O+ . er as referenced in section 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Stain shall create a '-Surface finish that is breathable (allowing water vapor transmission), and that resists - deterioration from water, acid, alkali, fungi, sunlight or weathering. Stain mix shall be a CONCRETE WALL SYSTEM 033310-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 waterborne, low V.O.C. material, less than 180 grams/liter. G PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. Formed concrete construction: five years experience pouring vertically formed_architectural concrete. Installer shall be trained in manufacturer's special techniques in order to achieve realistic surfaces. ( 3 B. Color stain system application: Manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Mockup: Build on site sixty days before work starts, using same materials, methods and work force that will be used for the project. Architect/Engineer and Owner will determine specific requirements and location, and whether mockup shall be incorporated into the project. 1. Size: 50 sq. ft., or larger, if needed to adequately illustrate the pattern and texture selected. 2. Include an area to demonstrate wall mold butt joint and if appropriate, continuation of pattern through expansion joint. 3. If design includes stone texture across top of wall, include in mockup. 4. After concrete work on mockup is completed and cured for a minimum of 28 days, and after surface is determined to be acceptable for coloring, apply color stain system. 5. After coloring is determined to be acceptable by the Architect/Engineer and Owner, construction of project may proceed, using mockup as quality standard. 3.03 SPECIAL TECHNIQUES -FORMING TEXTURED CONCRETE A. Simulated Wood Molds preparation: Clean and make free of buildup prior to each pour. Inspect for blemishes or tears. Repair if needed following manufacturer's recommendations. B. Simulated Wood Molds attachments Place wood molds with less than 1/4 inch separation between them. Attach molds to form securely following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Form release agent: Apply following manufacturers' recommendations. D. Form stripping and related construction shall avoid creating defects in finished surface. E. Where wood texture is to continue across top of wall, a finish to achieve a continuity of the formed pattern must be done by hand when concrete is being poured- Hand -carve and emboss the wet, pliable concrete, aligning rustication joints with those in the formed pattern. Great care must be taken to achieve intended relief and texture as per Architect/Engineer/Owners direction. If the pattern selected has molds connecting through the middle of the boards, carefully remove the seam line created by abutting molds. Match the texture and shape of the surrounding wood, avoiding visible seams or mold marks. G. Place form ties at thinnest points of molds (high points of finished wall). Neatly patch the remaining hole after disengaging the protruding portion of the tie so that it will not be visible after coloring the concrete surface. H. Where an expansion joint must occur at a point other than at rustication joints, consult manufacturer for proper treatment of expansion material. 3.04 SPECIAL TECHNIQUES -APPLYING COLOR STAIN SYSTEM. A. All Simulated Wood surfaces that are to be stained shall be at least 30 days old. B. Clean surface prior to application of stain materials to assure that surface is free of latency, dirt, dust, grease, efflorescence, paint, or other foreign material, following manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation. Do not sandblast. Preferred method to remove latency is pressure CONCRETE WALL SYSTEM 033310-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM washing with water, minimum 3000 psi (a rate of three to four gallons per minute), using fan nozzle perpendicular to and at a distance of one or two feet from surface. Completed surface shall be free of blemishes, discoloration, surface voids, and unnatural form marks. C PROTECTION 1. Where exposed soil or pavement is adjacent which may spatter dirt or soil from rainfall, or where surface may be subject to over spray from other processes, provide temporary cover of completed work. END OF SECTION r.- 3 CONCRETE WALL SYSTEM 033310-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 033931 - CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Final curing of concrete floor surfaces. _ - _ T B. Surface treatment with liquid densifiers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS d A. Section 03 0010 - Concrete: Concrete floor finishing and initial curing operationsri 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007) , C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the curing of concrete surfaces with requirements for sealing and densifying floor surfaces and installing adhered floor coverings. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least one week prior to the start of concrete work for floor slabs, require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, moisture -retaining sheet, and densifiers, including compatibility of different products and limitations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by manufacturer of products specified. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 LIQUID DENSIFIER A. Liquid Densifier / Sealec Penetrating, vapor permeable, liquid compound with liquid -repellent characteristics. 1. Penetrating Floor Surface Sealer: silane or alkyltrialkoxysilane formulation. a. Chemmasters; Product: Aquanil Plus 100 Penetrating Silane Sealer; www.chernmaster.com, b. Euclid Chemical Co.; Product: Baracade Silane 100, www.euclidchemical.com; c. Evonik Industries, Protectosil BHN; www.protectosil.com; CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS 033931 -1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete has been properly finished and finish surfaces are ready to be cured and densified. 3.02 MOISTURE CURING A. Refer to Section 03 3000 for requirements for initial curing of floor slabs. B. Final Curing: Unless specifically Indicated otherwise, continue to moisture cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308, 1. Absorptive Moisture -Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap -polyethylene and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in damp condition for 7 days following initial curing period, and retain in place thereafter to help protect surface from staining and soiling. 3.03 APPLICATION OF CURING COMPOUNDS A. Membrane forming curing and sealing: Suitable for exterior exposure. 1. Ensure concrete has been wet cured for period prescribed by the sealant manufacturer. 2. Spray apply membrane curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 3. Avoid over application and puddling of material. 3.04 DENSIFICATION OF CURED CONCRETE SURFACES A. Allow concrete floor slabs to fully cure for at least 28 days before starting densification. B. Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces In accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply liquid densifier to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Spray -apply 2 uniform coats of penetrating surface sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Allow first coat to dry (6 hours), then apply second coat at 90 degree angle to the first. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. B. Take appropriate precautions to prevent staining of concrete floor surfaces. Since no satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum and rust stains from concrete, comply with the following: 1. Cover and protect floor surfaces from damage and staining during the construction period. 2. Ensure that construction equipment, particularly components that may drip oil, hydraulic fluid, and other liquids, are provided with suitable diaper. 3. Do not permit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs. 4. Let sealer dry and age as required by manufacturers 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Interior floor surfaces. .`. Provide moisture curing except where other method shnaterials are specifically permitted. 27:- Where concrete floors are scheduled to remain exposed: Apply specified type densifier an l spaler. -- - END OF SECTION CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS 033931 -2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE_ ROOM 12046 SECTION #03 40 00 — PRECAST CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Structural precast concrete for: 1. Roof solid planks. 2. Wall solid panels. B. Connection and supporting devices. =` C. Grout packing. D. Design of precast concrete, casting, prestressing, finishing, transportation, and erection_ 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of framing components not precast but associated with Work of this Section. B. Coordinate location of devices for mechanical and electrical work. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: List of manufactured materials proposed, identifying manufacturer and type and manufacturer's technical information on lifting devices. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Tests or certificates of compliance for reinforcing steel. 2. Welder's qualifications. 3. Submit design data reports indicating calculations for loadings and stresses of fabricated, designed framing and connections, signed and sealed by professional engineer. C. Submit to Architect unless noted otherwise. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings of precast members, showing layout, fabrication details, unit locations, sizes, reinforcement, embedment locations, anchorage devices, openings, lifting locations, cast -in items, design loads, deflections, and cambers. B. Submit to Architect unless noted otherwise 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of PCI MNL -1165, PCI MNL -123, PCI MNL -120. B Qualifications: 1. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 2. Erector: Company specializing in erecting Work of this section with 3 years documented experience. PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE 9 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 3. Design precast concrete members under direct supervision of professional engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Iowa. 4. Welder: Qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. C. Regulatory requirements: Design precast members in accordance with: 1. PCI MNL -120 - Design Handbook. 2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 4. Design connections in accordance with PCI MNL -123 - Manual on Design of Connections for Precast Prestressed Concrete. D. Produce precast members in accordance with requirements of PCI MNL -1165. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast members. Make records available upon request. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 2.01 A. Precast members shall be lifted and supported during transportation as required by design. Lifting points shall be shown on Shop Drawings, and lifting devices shall be embedded in members by manufacturer. B. Handle precast members in position consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points. C. Lifting or handling devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection. D. Protect members to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete. E. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure. F. Deliver in proper sequence in order that installation may commence upon delivery. Owner will not be responsible for storing precast concrete in event delivery is prior to time it can be installed. PRODUCTS DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design components to withstand loads as indicated on Design Drawings B. Design precast concrete and attachments for fabrication, transportation, and erection as well as temperature, axial, and wind and seismic stresses as applicable. C Design members exposed to weather to allow movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. D., ,Design components to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building ,,,structural members and clearances of intended openings. E. _Design, system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building Strue'turaf members and clearances of intended openings. PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE # 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 F. Design of precast concrete shall be performed by a professional engineer registered in state of Iowa with experience in precast concrete design. Calculations and drawings shall be sealed by registered engineer in state of Iowa. G. Design precast concrete to be supported as shown on Drawings. If size of precast member used is different than shown, revise support elevations and details as required at no cost to Owner. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete compressive strength shall be as required by design, but strength at 28 days shall be not less than 5,000 psi for prestressed, precast concrete. Use minimum water/cement ratio and slump consistent with placement requirements. B. Aggregate, sand, water, admixtures: Determined by precast fabricator, as appropriate to design requirements. C. Cement: Gray Portland, ASTM C150 Type L ; D. Aggregate: ASTM C33. 1. Fine aggregate: Clean, sharp natural sand. 2. Coarse aggregate: " a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Maximum size: Not more than 1/5 of narrowest dimension, 1/3 depth bf slabs, nor 3/4 minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars or strands. E. Water: Clean, free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, acid, or organic matter. F. Admixtures: 1. Water -reducing, retarding, accelerating, high -range water reducing admixtures: ASTM C494. 2. Air entraining agent, ASTM C260. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Use of calcium chloride or other salts is not permitted. G. Tensioning steel tendons: ASTM A416 Grade 270, of diameter appropriate to member design. H. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60, deformed steel bars. I. Welded steel wire fabric: ASTM At 85 Plain Type in flat sheets; unfinished. J. Chairs: Hot -dip galvanized and plastic coat chairs or positioning devices in contact with faces of precast concrete. K. Embedded items: 1. Miscellaneous plates and shapes: ASTM A36. 2. Hot -dip galvanizing: ASTM A153. L. Forms: Metal or other substantial material to produce concrete of required shapes, profiles, and finish. See plans for finish type. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Neoprene bearing pads: PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE # 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1. Material: Elastomeric compound of not less than 60% by volume of neoprene. 2. Tensile strength: 2,250 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM D412. 3. Tear strength: 180 Win minimum in accordance with ASTM D624. 4. Compression set, 22 hours at 158°F. 25% maximum in accordance with ASTM D395. 5. Use: At support points of precast members where shown on Drawings. B. Connecting and supporting devices: 1. ASTM A36 carbon steel. 2. Plates, angles, shall conform to PCI MNL -123. 3. Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or surfaces requiring field welding. C. Nonshrink grout: Nonmetallic, minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. D. Cement grout: Minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days. E. Grout: Use as required for grouting edges of roof members- "Five Star Grout" by U- S- Grout Corporation; "Masterflow 713 Grout" by Master Builders; or V-1 Grout" by W R Meadows, Inc. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabrication procedure shall conform to PCI MNL -116S. B- Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast members. Make records available upon request. C. Ensure reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast -in items are embedded and located as indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Tension reinforcement tendons as required to achieve design load criteria. E. Fabricate required openings with dimension larger than 8" and embed accessories provided by other Sections, at indicated locations. Openings smaller than 8" may be located and cut in field providing no prestressing strands are cut. Embed inserts required for monorail support, parapet reinforcing, roof hatches, and other construction into precast sections as required or shown on Drawings. G.., Exposed ends at stressing tendons: Fill recess with grout, trowel flush. rpt H.::Weld",steel fabrications in accordance with AWS D1.1. Do not tack weld reinforcing, I EmbeEkanchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other Items at locations indicated. s J. .Gon'necting and supporting steel devices: Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or Isbrfacesiequiring field welding. K. «Welding members and embedded items, where indicated on Drawings, shall be incorporated into precast members at time of fabrication. 2.05 FINISHES A. Plant finish: Finish members to PCI MNL -1165 Standard. PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE # 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Plant finish (Finish A): Normal plant finish; surface may contain small surface holes caused by air bubbles, minor chips or spalling at edges or ends, without major discoloration. C. Exposed -to -view finish (Finish B): Normal plant finish with fins and protrusions removed, ground edges and ends, flat face surfaces. See Drawings for surface finish. D. Finish exposed -to -view finish surfaces of precast concrete members uniform in color and appearance. E. Cure members under identical conditions to develop required concrete quality, and minimize appearance blemishes including non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES c A. Conform to PCI MNL -1165. PART 3 EXECUTION _ j 3.01 EXAMINATION = A. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements areas indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Verify supporting structure is ready to receive work. C. Each piece or unit of precast concrete when delivered shall have setting number marked clearly on unexposed edge. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare support equipment for erection procedure, temporary bracing, and induced loads during erection. 3.03 ERECTION A. Embedded lifting devices in finished construction shall be removed to below concrete surface and grouted flush. B. Place, align, and level members in final position in structure on accepted bearing surfaces. C. Attach precast members to each other and to walls as shown on Drawings or Shop Drawings; welding shall be in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1 including use of low -hydrogen electrodes for welding reinforcing. D. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members. E. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints, as erection progresses. F. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. Protect members from staining. G. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing, twisting, or warping of members. H. Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment. PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE # 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 I. Set vertical units dry, without grout, attaining joint dimension with lead or plastic spacers. J. Secure units in place. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. K. Install bearing pads at bearing ends. L. Coordinate cutting required openings 8" and smaller. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. B. Design and erect to following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plane or location indicated on drawings: 1/4" in 10and 3/8" in 100'. noncumulative. 2. Maximum offset from indicated alignment between members: 1/4' C. Exposed joint dimension: 3/8'' f1/4". D. When members cannot be adjusted to conform to design or tolerance criteria, cease work and advise Architect. Execute modifications as directed by Architect. 3.05 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect members from damage caused by field welding or erection operations. Use noncombustible shields during welding operations to protect adjacent Work. B. Protect finish surfaces of precast concrete. Finish surfaces damaged during installation shall be repaired at no additional cost to Owner. For any repairs necessary, employ persons trained and skilled for that trade. C. Remove rubbish and debris resulting from delivery and installation from site. Do not allow to accumulate. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean weld marks, dirt, or blemishes from surface of exposed members. END OF SECTION PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE # 6 a y rte, gra PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION #03 40 00 - PAGE # 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION # 05 50 00 - METALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion anchors. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data List of manufactured materials proposed, identifying manufacturer and type. B. Quality assurance data: ICC -ES evaluation reports for anchor rods and expansion anchors provided to verify conformance to specifications. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for miscellaneous steel. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS c. A. Stainless steel: ASTM A240/A240M Type 316. 2.02 EXPANSION ANCHORS _ A. Torque controlled wedge -type with expanding cone or undercut anchor B. Size and locations: As shown or required for equipment installation. C. Manufacturer: "Kwik -Bolt TZ, "HSL -3," or "HDA Undercut Anchors" by Hilti, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Install expansion anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION METALS SECTION # 05 50 00 - PAGE # 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roofing nailers. B. Preservative treated wood materials. C. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. D. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. E. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 12046 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2010 C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2010. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard, National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on presevative treated wood. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade inark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dryor MC19. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -1 12046 C. Miscellaneous Blocking, Nailers, and Grounds. 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade, 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A -C plywood (A -side exposed); 314 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 1531A 153M for high humidity and preservative -treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Anchors and Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185 galvanizing per ASTM A653/A653M. 2.05 FACTORYWOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative -Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. a. Treat lumber exposed to weather. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing or flashing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with concrete. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION- GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. 3.02 BLACKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide frzming and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, roofing and trim. 3.03; ROOF -RELATED CARPENTRY A. (Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with metal roofing construction, roof system furring, and roofing assembly installation. C SA C1, B. <Where wood furring is installed perpendicular to the slope of the roof, kerf the backside of furring to allow for cross drainage under the wood. Keds shall not exceed 114 inch in depth; kerf spacing shall not be less than one per each 12 inches of board length. C. Anchor PPT 2x4 furring to structural concrete roof deck with quantity, quality, and frequency of concrete anchors designed to resist positive and negative wind pressures anticipated for metal ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 roofing. D. Do not install furring until water repellent has been thoroughly applied to roof slab(s). 3.04 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site -sawn cuts and kerfs, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to installing members. 3.05 TOLERANCES A_ Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 071400 - FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing applied to perimeter foundation walls. B. Accessories. C. Drainage panels and Protection boards. z„ 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete substrate. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS ; A. ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Ap-plied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course; 2011. " B. ASTM C1306 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of a Liquid -Applied Waterproofing Membrane; 2008- C. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension, 2006a. D. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2007). E. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005 (Reapproved 2010) F. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2009. G. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. H. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover, 2008a. I. ICC -ES AC29 - Acceptance Criteria for Cold, Liquid -Applied, Below -Grade, Exterior Dampproofing and Waterproofing Materials; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2004 (1 J. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for waterproofing, surface conditioner and joint and crack sealants. C. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for fluid -applied waterproofing system system. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid -applied waterproofing membranes with five years experience. FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1400 - 1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing In installation of fluid -applied waterproofing with minimum three years experience. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up 100 sq ft of vertical waterproofed panel; to represent finished work including internal and external corners. B. Apply a 10 square foot test mock-up area within the overall area required to be waterproofed. C. Locate where directed. D. Inspect mock-up area for coverage, consistency, and water penetration. E. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work provided it is accepted by the architect. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until cured. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hot -Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. American Hydrotech, Inc, Product MM6125: www.hydrotechusa.com. 2. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc; Product CCW -500: www.carlisle-ccw.com. B. Cold -Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. AVM Industries, Inc; System 500 or 502: www.avmindustries.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Cold -Applied Rubberized Asphalt/HDPE Composite Waterproofing Manufacturers: D. Cold -Applied, Modified -Polymer Elastomeric Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc, Product - CCW -525: www.carlisle-ccw.corn. 2. CETCO Building Materials Group; Product - "Strataseal www.cetco.com. 3. BASF / Sonneborn(r); Product - Soncshield(r) HLM 501 (roller): www.chemrex.com. 4. W.R.Meadows; Product - "Sealtight Meadow-Pruf Seamless". www.wrmeadows.com. 2.02 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS A. Hot -Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Use at exterior perimeter, below -grade walls located above floor elevation. Cover with drainage panel. B. Cold -Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Optional Use at exterior below -grade walls located above floor elevation. _1.. Cover with drainage panel. C. Cold'Applied Rubberized Asphalt/i Composite Waterproofing: Optional Use at exterior below -grade walls located above floor elevation. 1. C_gyer with drainage panel. 2:03 MEW81RA14tE�AND FLASHING MATERIALS L r. A. `:bot-Applit;d Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Elasticized rubberized asphaltic compound, c 8ot-applied and quick setting. 1. Cured Thickness: 0.03 inches, minimum. 2. Suitable for installation over concrete substrates. 3. Tensile Strength: 15 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071400-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 4. Ultimate Elongation: 500 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 5. Hardness: 60, measured in accordance with ASTM D2240, using Type A durometer. 6. Tear Strength: 150 Ibffinch, measured in accordance with ASTM D624. 7. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.014 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 8. Adhesion: Greater than 150 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D4541. B. Cold -Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Rubberized asphaltic compound, suitable for installation on concrete and concrete masonry. 1. Cured Thickness: 0.06 inch, minimum. 2. Similar performance requirements to hot -applied rubberized asphalt waterproofing above. Cold -Applied Rubberized Asphalt/HDPE Composite Waterproofing: Water-based, capable of being applied to green concrete; spray -applied polymer modified asphalt membrane with HDPE core and drainage composite. 1. Film Thickness: 157 mills (6 inch), minimum. 2. Tensile Strength: 662 psi, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 3. Ultimate Elongation: 4,140 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 4. Resistance to decay: 4 percent permanent loss, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E154, Section 13. 5. Adhesion to Concrete and Masonry: 11 pounds -force per inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM C836. D. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Surface Conditioner Type compatible with membrane compound; as recommended by N membrane manufacturer. t 3 B. Sealant for Substrate Surfaces: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Drainage Panel: Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side. 1. Composition: Dimpled polyethylene or polypropylene core; polypropylene filter fabric. a. Products: _ 1) Mar -flex Waterproofing & Building Products; Geo -Mat Plus www;mar-fle*,.com. D. Optional Drainage Composite Panels: 1. "CCW MiraDRAIN 2000" manufactured by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing: www.ca rlisle-ccw. com. 2. 'U-DRain - 1000 Series" manufactured by JDR Enterprises, Inc.: www j-drain-com 3. "SealTight Mel -Drain" manufactured by W.R.Meadows, Inc.: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system_ C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials. D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071400-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION- FOUNDATION WALLS A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness. B. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. C. At joints and cracks less than 1/4 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces, apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles. E. Install flexible flashings and seal into waterproofing material. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. F. Apply waterproofing up to within 2 inches of finished grade and down to 24 inches below floor elevation on exterior perimeter walls. 3.04 INSTALLATION- DRAINAGE PANEL A. After membrane has cured, but before it becomes dusty, apply separation sheet. Lap joints to ensure complete coverage. B. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. C. Adhere drainage panel to substrate with compatible adhesive. D. Cover top of drainage panel prior to backfill. END OF SECTION FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071400 -4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 071900 -WATER REPELLENTS ;711 A aWC] 4ZI=1 :T -I" 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water repellents applied to exterior masonry, and concrete surfaces. B. Pressure washing. C. Anti- graffiti coating applied to interior and exterior masonry and concrete surface.- 3 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings; 2005. B. ASTM D5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content in Silanes, Siloxanes, and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatments; 1991 (Reapproved 2007). C. ASTM D6532 — Standard Test Method for Evaluation of the Effect of Clear Water Repellent Treatments on Water Absorption of Hydraulic Cement Mortar Specimens; 2000 (Reapproved 2006) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least one week prior to starting work, require attendance of affected installers; invite Architect/Engineer and City of Iowa City. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description and chemical composition. C. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention, cautionary procedures required during application. D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Report whether manufacturer's "best practices" are being followed; if not, state corrective recommendations. Email report to Architect/Engineer the same day as inspection occurs, mail report on manufacturer's letterhead to ArchitecUEngineer within 2 days after inspection. E_ Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Iowa City's use in maintenance of project - 1 . roject.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Water Repellent Material: Two gallons of the type installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience and approved in writing by the waterproofing manufacturer. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Prepare a representative surface 36 by 36 inch in size using specified materials and preparation WATER REPELLENTS 071900-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM and application methods on surfaces identical to those to be coated; approved mock-up constitutes standard for workmanship. B. For proposed substitutions, prepare side-by-side mock-ups of specified and each substitute product. C. Locate where directed, on a wall not readily visible to the public. D. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protect liquid materials from freezing. B. Do not apply water repellentwhen ambient temperature is lowerthan 40 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F. C. Do not apply water repellents when wind velocity is higher than 15 mph. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exact product to be used will be determined by mock-up testing of products meeting specified requirements; prepare mock ups as specified above; submit cost breakdown for each product used in mock-up, including both unit and total costs. B. Silane Water Repellent: Non -glossy, colorless, penetrating, chemically reactive, water -vapor -permeable, non -yellowing sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged. 1. Applications: Vertical exterior concrete surfaces. 2. Number of Coats: Two. 3. VOC Content: Less than 600 g/L, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3690 or D 5095. 4. Moisture Absorption When Applied to Masonry: 2 percent, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C140 using masonry sample completely coated with water repellent. 5. Maintains dry appearance when wetted. 6. Water Repellent Products: Solvent -based, vapor permeable, penetrating, clear silane that reacts chemically with silicates; minimum 40 percent nonvolatile content by weight formulated specifically for use on concrete and concrete masonry, non -darkening, z._ non -staining. a.- BASF Construction Chemicals; Hydrozo Clear 40 VOC. b'.. Pecora Corporation; KlereSeal 940-S VOC. [VOC <= 400 g/L] c! `-Sherwin-Williams Company; Loxon 40% Low VOC Silane Water Repellant. [VOC = 343 g/L] d., PROSOCO, Inc; Sure Klean Weather Seal SL40 <600. �e,.;- Tnemec Co., Inc; Dur -A -Pell 40: Series 664 �-f.' Evonik Industries, Protectosil 40 S; www.protectosil.com g`. - Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements but not less than the specified percentage of silane by nonvolatile content. 7. Permanent Anti -Graffiti Coating Products: clear, one -component, penetrating, reactive, non -sacrificial, ready -to -use, low VOC Silane or silane/siloxane blended coating intended for use over bare concrete. Silicone coatings are not acceptable. a. Sherwin Williams, Anti -graffiti Coating; protective.sherwin-williams.com b. Evonik Industries; Protectosil Antigraffiti; www.protectosil.com c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Products from approved water repellant manufacturer. PART3 EXECUTION WATER REPELLENTS 071900-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 3.01 EXAMINATION 12046 A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. C B. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of water repellent. D. Review mock-up(s) with manufacturer's representative and determine procedures for remainder' of work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection of Adjacent Work: 1. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent. B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best results. C. Do not start work until concrete substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days unless otherwise permitted by repellent manufacturer. D. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. E. Remove oil and foreign substances with a chemical solvent that will not affect water repellent. F. Pressure wash, scrub, and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. G. Allow surfaces to dry completely to degree recommended by water repellent manufacturer before starting coating work. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and application methods recommended as producing the best results. 1. Apply anti -graffiti coating to exterior walls from grade to 10 feet above floor elevation and on interior walls from floor to 10 above floor elevation. 2. Apply water repellent to all remaining exterior concrete roof and walls, whether covered over with metal roofing or not. 3. Apply water repellent or alternate silane type reactive, penetrating floor densifier to all concrete floors. B. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer, continuously over entire exterior concrete wall and roof surfaces. Apply water repellents prior to installation of any finished roofing materials or windows, doors, and louvers if practicable. C. Apply two coats, minimum. D. Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water repellent manufacturer. F In lieu of water repellent, apply anti -graffiti coating to exterior walls from grade to 10 feet above floor elevation and on interior walls from floor to 10 above floor elevation. F. Provide manufacturer's field service representative to inspect preparation and application work continuously during entire application period to ensure that manufacturer's "best practices" for preparation and application are being followed. END OF SECTION WATER REPELLENTS 071900-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 072613 - UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet Vapor Barriers: Materials to make concrete slabs -on -grade water vapor resistant. B. Accessories necessary to maintain moisture / vapor resistant installation of concrete slab's. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS , .ate i 7 A. Section 03 3000- Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placing concrete for slabs -on -grade,_,% B. Section 07 6513 - Flexible Flashings: Self adhering flashings used to seal sheet vapor barrier to, vertical wall surfaces. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Installation of porous aggregate fill under concrete slabs. " 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Vapor Barrier: Plastic vapor barrier material complying with ASTM E 1745, and with maximum permeance rating of 0.010 Perms when tested in accordance with requirements in ASTM E96. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995. B. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1997. C. ASTM E 1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1998. D. ACI 302.1 R - Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane - not less than 10 mil thickness). 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of sheet vapor barrier with size, location and installation of subgrade utility lines. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility penetrations through vapor barrier are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's material literature and sample. C. Test Reports: Indicate compliance with specified requirements. D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate placement procedures, seaming and pipe boot installation. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. PART2 PRODUCTS UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS 072613-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 2.01 SHEET VAPOR BARRIER A. Acceptable Products: 1. Stego Industries LLC; Product- "Stego Wrap 15 mil Vapor Barrier": www. stegoindu stries. com. 2. Epro Services; Product- "Ecoshield E15": www.eproserv.com. 3. Flatiron Films; Product - "Iron Barr 15": www.flatiron-films.com. 4. W.R.Meadows; Permanator 15mi1; www,wrmeadows.com. 5. Fortifiber; Moistop Ultra 15, wwwl.fortifiber.coni. 6. Raven Industries, VaporBlock VB15; www. raven ind.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: Manufacturer's pressure -sensitive type with maximum WVTR - 0.3 Perms. B. Vapor Proofing Mastic: Manufacturer's recommended material with maximum WVTR - 0.3 Perms. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that under slab aggregate fill is properly compacted and free of sharp projections which may puncture or damage vapor barrier. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of pour. C. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. D. Overlap joints 6 Inches and seal with manufacturer's tape, E. Seal penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions. 1. Construct pipe boots using sheet vapor barrier, pressure sensitive tape and mastic in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. F. Do not permit penetration of the vapor barrier except for specified reinforcing steel and permanent utility lines. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Seal sheet vapor barrier to foundation walls with self adhering flexible flashing lapped minimum 4 inches onto vapor barrier and adhered to wall surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform visual inspection of vapor barrier prior to placing concrete, ensure continuity of taped joints and sealing of penetrations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed vapor barrier from damage resulting from subsequent construction operations. B. Z pair damaged areas with additional layer of sheet vapor barrier, overlap damaged area 6 inches and tape entire perimeter of patch. j_- END OF SECTION UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS 072613-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weathering steel panel roofing, flashing and accessories. B. Aternate Roofing: Factory finished sheet metal panel roofing and associated flashings qRd accessories.; C. Counter0ashingsand trim. D. Gutters and downspouts. E. Splash blocks. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. 01 2300 - Alternates: replacing weathering metal roofing with factory finished metal rd, Vg. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: PPT wood nailers- 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002. B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2011. C. ASTM A588/A588M — 10 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPaj Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance D. ASTM A606/A606M — 09a Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process, 2010 F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association: 2003. G. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions, 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, strengths, finishes, characteristics, and maintenance. D. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise noted. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 6100 - 1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing sheet metal roof installations with minimum 3 years of experience. D. Weathering steel, if alternate is accepted, shall be either ASTM A588 or ASTM A606. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 24 gage core steel. B. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating, 24 gage core steel, shop pre -coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) coating; color as selected. C. Weathering Steel Sheet: ASTM A588 or A606 High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled or Cold -Rolled, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance; 22 gage. 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. Basis of Design: 1. Corten Standing Seam Roofing Co.; www.cortenroofng.com B. Other acceptable manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Alternates: 1`.'` "SNAP -CLAD" steel panels, manufactured by Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.ccm. 2.- 06er'acceptable manufacturers: - a._..r Fabral, www.fabral.com b. `UBCl; www,mbci.com a Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation; www.metaisales.us.com. d' ; .Fjrestone Metal Products / Una -Clad: www.unaclad.com. e. , McElroy Metal, Inc.: www.mceiroymetal.com. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS A. Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system. B. Metal Panels: Factory -formed panels with factory -applied finish. 1. Steel Panels: a. Uncoated metal b. Alternate panel: Zinc -coated steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, minimum G60 galvanizing. c. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.031 inch (22 gage). SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 -2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1-3/4 inch seam height; concealed fastener system lapped seam in standing seam profile. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints. 5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches. 2.04 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's recommended high-performance concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. ^; 2.05 PANEL FINISH n.> A. Cor -Ten: No applied finish. B. Alternate roofing: Siliconized Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone- riddif6d polyester enamel topcoat with minimum dry film thickness of 0.8 mil; color and gloss tori t6h sample.' - 2.06 ACCESSORIES ° _> A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as roofing metal, with soft neoprene washers or;galvanized steel painted to match intended color of roofing. B_ Splash Blocks or Pads: Precast concrete type, of sizes and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Fabricate form 22 gage galvannealed sheet metal. D. Downspout Shoes: Steel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Panels: Fabricate and finish panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer's standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, one gage thicker than roofing sheet, minimum 4 inches wide, interlockable with sheet. C. Fabricate starter strips, interlockable with sheet. D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch, miter and seam corners. F. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At movingjoints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 2.08 FACTORY FINISHING A. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked enamel finish system. B. Primer Coat: On factory coated sheets, finish concealed side of sheet with primer compatible with finish system as recommended by finish system manufacturer. PART EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to eaves. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. Verify deck has been waterproofed, is dry, and free of snow or ice. C. Verify correct placement of PPT wood nailers. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION- ROOFING A. Install metal standing seam metal roofing directly, by cleat, to pressure treated wood furring. B. Cleat and seam all joints. C. Provide gutters and downspouts. D. Solder lap joints. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution, rinse with water. 3.04 INSTALLATION- STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Space standing seams at 16 inch on center, plus or minus 2 inches. B. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves. C. Secure cleats to furring, lock cleats into seams. D. Stagger transverse joints of roofing sheets. E. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. F. Bend up one side edge 1-1/2 inches and other edge 1-314 inches. G. Make first fold 1/4 inch wide single fold and second fold 1/2 inch wide, providing locked portion of standing seam, 5 plies in thickness. H. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. I. Terminate standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down with tapered fold. 3.05 INSTALLATION -GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. 5dcure gutter to wall with cleats spaced maximum 36 inches on center along edges of gutters. B. Longitudinal joints not acceptable. C. 'At roof edges, extend gutter lining up under metal roofing drip 2 inches minimum and terminate in°3/4 iriclr folded edge secured by cleats. Hook lower end of roofing into lock strip to form 3/4 finch wia4loose-lock seam. -D. �At roof edges, extend gutter lining up under metal roofing drip. Secure to wall as indicated. E. gppe gutters minimum of 1/8 inch per foot to downspouts. F. Seal gutters watertight. Seal joint of gutter to drain. G. Secure downspouts to walls with straps spaced 36 inches on center. Size straps to withstand wind loads specified. Seal gutter to downspout joints. H. Set splash pads under downspouts. I. Do not set splash blocks / pads to drain across porches or walkways. 3.06 INSTALLATION- FLASHINGS SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Cleat and seam all joints. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. END OF SECTION h.� SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and trim. B. Reglets and accessories. C. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. C. ASTM D4479 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos -Free; 2007. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Provide calculations for fastening methods and materials to show compliance with the requirements of ICC 500. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 inches long in size illustrating metal profile and finish/color. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements to the greatest extent possible, ICC 500, and standard details, except as otherwise indicated B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with five years of documented experience. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Metal -Era, Inc: www_metalera.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, C. Components: 1. Sizes: As indicated in Drawings. ~� 2. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range. D. Assembly: ` A' 1. Sizes: As indicated in Drawings. E. Finish: 1. Finish: as specified- G; 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A_ Pre -Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper; 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre -coated with modified silicone coating. 1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked enamel finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessory materials that will not create electrolytic reactions with sheet metals. B. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. C. Protective Backing Paint: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D4479 Type I. D. Sealant: Type - polyurethane specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. F. Reg lets: Recessed type, galvanized steel, face and ends covered with plastic tape. G. Expansion Anchors: similar to Hilti Kwik Balt 3 - 304 stainless steel. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 6 inches wide, interlocking with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material for splice plates under butt joints, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. 2.05 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: Profile as Indicated. B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated. C.� 'Gutters'and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in;accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. iAc�essories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by fabricator based on the anticipated wind 2_ '_utter Supports. Brackets and straps. c3. 'DQv�Inspout Supports: Brackets. E. �Aplash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated, minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entraininent. F. Seal metal joints. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dryfilm thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. B. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. C. Seal metal joints watertight. D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. E. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum. F. Set splash pads under downspouts. Set in place with hot dipped galvanized anchor pegs. END OF SECTION I hJ r1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 079005 - JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES _^ A. Sealants (sometimes indicated on the drawings as caulk or caulking). E—;—C _ B. Compressible foam tape sealant. . C. Joint backing 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants, 2011. B. ASTM C1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2010. 12046 C. ASTM D1667 -Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed -Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product List: Provide schedule of proposed sealants recommended by the manufacturer as being acceptable for use in the intended application and with the substrates with which it will come into contact. Include VOC content and compliance s. C. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 1!4x2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate materials and products which were tested by sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion with sealants. Include interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance, and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation necessary for adhesion. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and surface preparation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturer, samples of materials and products that will contact and affect sealant installation and performance, test for compatibility and adhesion. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. JOINT SEALERS 079005-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 3. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content as specified in Section 01 6116. B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses NT, M, G, A and O; single component, neutral curing. 1. Use general purpose exterior sealant for all interior sealing also. 2. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry or concrete. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal, including frames, and other materials. d. Sealing under thresholds at exterior doors. e. All other interior and exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. i. Applications: Use for: a. _Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. D. :Interior Floor Joint Filler: Semi-rigid epoxy; ASTM D 638; multi-component. T. :Color Medium Gray. 2, Shote A hardness: 70-85. 3T :Sothis Content: 100 percent. 14. ;Products: a. e 'Joint -Loc 80" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. r+ b. "MM-80",two-component epoxy joint filler manufactured by Metzger/McGuire: www.metzgermcguire.com. 5. Applications: a. Install to full depth of exposed saw -cut contraction joints in concrete floors. Use two pass method complying with manufacturer's instructions. Overfill joint leaving material ',crowned" above floor surface. After curing, shave material flush with floor surface. E. Optional Alternate Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling, ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Performance requirements similar to semi-rigid epoxy specified above. JOINT SEALERS 079005 -2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: "SL1" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. 4. Other Acceptable Products: a. Pecora Corporation; NR -201 Self -Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant: www.pecora.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. G. Compressible Foam Tape Sealant: PVC foam tape with pressure -sensitive adhesive on one face; weather resistant. 1. Medium density: Approximately 9 Ib per cu ft. 2. Gage: 1/8 to 1/4 inch thick. `_' 3. Width: As required for installation conditions. 4. Color: Gray. 5. Applications: Use where components are assembled to form a compress{orseaLto: a. Seal the building envelope against air and water infiltration, 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application... B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width_ D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application_ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify thatjoint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. C. Where sealers are applied to concrete walls and roofs, verify surface sealer has been applied before applying joint sealers. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: JOINT SEALERS 079005-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. H. Compressible Foam Tape Sealant: Install continuously in single lengths; exposed edges recessed 1/8 inch minimum from face of adjoining surfaces. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces that may become soiled during application of sealants. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 079005-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 12046 FJ A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B- Non -fire -rated, tornado -resistant, steel doors and frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS a co A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS -- A. ICC 500 - Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. B. FEMA 361 - Community Shelter Door Assembly. C. ANSI/ICC At 17.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. D. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003- E. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames, 1998 (R2004). F. ANSI A250.13 - Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swinging Door Assemblies; 2008 G. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2007. H. BHMA Al 56.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006, I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. E. Certification for tornado -resistant doors including compliant hardware required for certification. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All exterior doors and frames shall be tested and approved for installation per ICC 500 and FEMA 361. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging, avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tornado Resistant Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco: StormPro Series; www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors, Product FEMA/Tornado DE Series: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft; Product PW14 Paladin Series: www,steelcraft.com. B. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Steelcraft; Product: B16 / F Series: www.steelcraft.com. 2. Assa Abloy Ceco: Regent RI / SO series; www.cecodoor.com ; www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Republic Doors, Product: DE16 /ME; www.republicdoor.com. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ADAAG. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled at strike jamb; bevel optional at hinge jamb. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings and permitted by governing code. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA Al 56.115 as approved by ANSUICC 500, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance,where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent or that which provide the greatest degree of life safety. C. Tornado Resistant Openings: FEMA Compliance Label. ;1. Certify compliance with FEMA 361 guidelines and ANSI ICC500 standards. 2.. Flush door and frame tested and supplied as a system. a -.----Doors: 14 gage galvannealed steel face sheets with steel 12 GA. stiffened core Construction and continuous perimeter reinforcement. b -'Frames: Fully welded, 14 gage. I ': '4ilardware configurations as tested and scheduled; reinforcements and preparation in "accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 for multi -point latching to comply with ICC 500. 3r` FEMAComplianceLabel: a. Provide factory applied label certifying door and frame have been designed and tested " to withstand airborne debris impact of a 15 Ib missile traveling at 100 mph and a 250 mph design wind speed, and provide for both positive and negative pressures.. b. FEMA compliant doors must meet hazard criteria for tornado, testing method must comply with ICC 500. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3 minimum, Model 1 equivalent; FEMNICC500 compliant, seamless, flush, square edge unless otherwise indicated. 2. FEMA compliant and labeled.. 3. Core: polyurethane foam core with horizontal and vertical steel stiffeners. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. 6. Undercut shall not exceed 1/4 inch. 7. 12 gauge minimum steel hardware and door reinforcing. 8. Certified minimum three point latching and three hinges. B. Interior Doors, Non -Fire -Rated' 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, sear gess. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb or polystyrene foam. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. a - i t a 4. Undercut shall not exceed 3/4 inch. ' - 2.04 STEEL FRAMES -- u: A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames for ICC 500 compliant doors. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 4. Conduit for electrified hardware in frames to be installed in masonry: a. Provide 1/2 inch metal conduit, welded in place, to facilitate wiring for electrified hardware specified in Section 08 7100- b. Extend the feed conduit out the top of the frame approximately 18 inches; include a pull line in the conduit for pulling wire. c. Where two or more electrical items are required in the same frame, provide conduit between the electrified components. 5. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in concrete, masonry, or to be grouted; allow room for installation of electrified hardware items specified in Section 08 7100. B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded; 14 gage unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1 Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2 Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. 3 Provide frames with five anchors in each jamb and three head anchors per single leaf door. C. Interior Door Frames, non -rated: Fully welded type; 16 gage unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Grout for Frames installed in masonry or concrete walls unless frames are cast -in concrete walls: Portland cement grout of maximum 3 -inch slump for hand troweling, thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop -assembled frames. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM D. Hardware: install only hardware that has been tested and approved for use for FEMA 361 compliant doors and frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B- Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Review wiring diagrams and coordinate conduit requirements for wiring of electrified hardware. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with rubberized asphaltic coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install FEMA doors and frames in accordance with manufactures instructions B. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard. C. Install frames in concrete wall formwork such that placement of concrete will fill throat and interior of frame. D. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. Provide FEMA required five frame anchors, regardless of frames being cast into wall construction. Brace frames so that pressure of concrete before setting will not deform frames. E. Coordinate installation of hardware. F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. G. Touch up damaged factory finishes or primers. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8 and ICC 500.. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straightedge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION :4 _7 4-3 ca r - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 085613 - FEMA COMPLIANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS n� PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. FEMA compliant aluminum view windows. B. FEMA compliant glazing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01 2300 - Alternates for description of alternates affecting the work under this section. 1. All work under this section to be included in Alternate No. 4 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes, 2008. B. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, 2002 (Reapproved 2010). C. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). D. ANCI / ICC 500 - ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters; 2008. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Tornado Resistant Openings: FEMA Compliance Label. 1. Certify compliance with FEMA 361 guidelines and ANSI ICC500 standards. 2. Design frames to withstand airborne debris impact of a 15 Ib missile traveling at 100 mph and a 250 mph design wind speed. B. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of FEMA 361 and ANSI / ICC500 code. 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to code required limits in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. C. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 8.00 Ibf/sq ft. F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. G- Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. FEMA COMPLIANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 5613 - 1 12046 1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Coordination: Furnish anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, to be embedded into concrete or masonry, with setting diagrams and installation, to applicable installer in time for installation. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data showing materials, construction details, dimensions of components, and finishes. C. Test Data: Test reports for specific window model and glazing to be furnished, showing compliance with all specified requirements. 1. Include testing agency qualifications. 2. For structural tests, provide details on method of anchorage to test frame. 3. Reports of testing demonstrating compliance with FEMA standards. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. Provide window labels that certify same, including glazing. E. Shop Drawings: Drawings prepared specifically for this project, showing plans, elevations, sections, details of construction, anchorage to other work, hardware, and glazing. F. Coordination Drawings: For each window opening, show locations and details of items necessary to anchor windows that must be installed by others, in sufficient detail that installer of those items can do so correctly without reference to the actual window itself. G. Samples for Selection of Applied Finishes: Color charts for factory finishes. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years experience in the manufacture of windows of the type specified and able to provide test reports showing that their standard manufactured products meet the specified requirements; custom designed products not acceptable. B. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing impact resistant aluminum glazing systems with minimum five years of documented experience; installer approved by manufacturer. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency able to show experience in "Inducting tests of the type specified. D. IdstallerObalifications: Experienced in installation of products of the type specified and: 1. Authorized by manufacturer 1.09 COORDINATtON _A. Furnish anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors; Jobe embedded into concrete or masonry, with setting diagrams and installation; to applicable installer in time for installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's warranty agreeing to repair or replace windows and window components that fail within 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion due to, but not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failure, failure of welds, and deterioration of metals and finishes beyond that FEMA COMPLIANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085613-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM expected under detention use and normal weathering. 2. Failure of glazing due to excessive deflection of supporting members under wind I�ad. 3. Air leakage exceeding performance specified.; = PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS u A. Tornado and Impact Resistant Fixed Windows V 1 1. Survivalite Impact Windows as part of The Citadel Storefront Solutions Systems; www,survivalite.com; info@survivalite.com 2. Insulguard Security Products; TH600 Architectural Aluminum Framing System; www.sabic-ip.com/insuiguard 12046 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements and provided that all products meet or exceed specified performance, testing, and labeling requirements. 2.02 WINDOWS A. General: 1. Dimensions, profiles, features, and performance specified and indicated on drawings are required; do not deviate unless specifically approved by ArchitecUEngineer under substitution procedures specified in Section 01 6000. 2. Design to fit openings indicated on drawings; design to accommodate deviation of actual construction from dimensions shown on drawings. 3. Design anchorages to provide performance equivalent to that required for window unit; provide anchorages at least equivalent to those by which the tested units were anchored to the test frame. 4. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent corrosion by galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or with sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for the purpose. 5. Label units to indicate which side is which, such as inside/outside or secure/non-secure; use labels that are removable after installation but durable enough not to be lost during delivery, storage, handling, and installation. B. FEMAComplianceLabel: 1. Factory applied label certifying frame has been designed and tested to withstand specified FEMA criteria. C. Exterior Windows: Meeting following performance criteria as well as other criteria specified: 1. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding F5 tornado wind loads required by ICC500 without permanent deformation or breakage of components. 2. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: Not more than 1/175 of glass edge length. 3. Provide weep holes and internal water passages to conduct infiltrated water to exterior. 4. Factory -assembled fixed glazing panel, with non -removable trim and glazing stops where indicated on the drawings... a. Factory glazed; single glazed, laminated glass -clad polycarbonate, thickness as required to comply with performance specifications. b. Framing and Glazing Stops: Extruded aluminuin; clear anodized finish. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) extrusions of alloy and temper selected by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and finish required; not less that D.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick at any location of frame and sash members. B. Frame Anchors: Mild steel plates, shapes, or bars, concealed in completed construction: provide all anchorage devices necessary to securely fasten windows to adjacent construction: use security fasteners for exposed anchors. FEMA COMPLIANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085613-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1. For Setting in Masonry or Concrete: Minimum 3/16 inch thick angles or plates, minimum 4 inches long with hooked ends, welded to back of windowframe. 2. Provide minimum of 2 anchors per side of window plus 1 additional anchor for each 12 inches or fraction thereof more than 36 inches in height or width. C. Glazing Seals: Factory installed, molded EPDM or neoprene compressible gaskets and compression strips. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating orAAMA 612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that window openings are ready for installation of windows. B. Verify that correct embedded anchors are in place and in proper location; repair or replace anchors as required to achieve satisfactory installation. C. Notify Architect/Engineer if conditions are not suitable for installation of windows; do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawing details. B. Install windows in correct orientation (inside/outside or secure/non-secure). C. Anchor windows securely in manner so as to achieve performance specified. D. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant: seal between frame and adjacent construction on both faces; use sealant and methods specified in Section 07 9005. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces promptly after installation without damaging finishes. B. Remove and replace defective work. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Submit maintenance requirements to designated City of Iowa City personnel. END OF SECTION FEMA COMPLIANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085613-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow metal doors. B. Hardware for tornado resistant doors and frames. C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. c-) D. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and gasketing. " 1.02 RELATEDSECTIONS A. Section 08 1110 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. cn 1.03 REFERENCES 12046 A. ANSI/ICC 500 - ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters; 2008 B. FEMA 361 - Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms, C. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design - US Dept of Justice Revised Regulations for Titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661-302.1 D. DHI (LOGS) -Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute, 1990 E BHMA-Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300- Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Submittals: 1. List all doors per set with opening number, opening location (both sides of door), hand, size, material and any special features. 2. List all hardware required for openings with quantity, description, product number, handing, finish and manufacturer. 3. Include any special installation and operation instructions. 4. For electrical systems, include operational instructions, riser diagrams and point to point wiring diagrams. 5. Include manufacturer's catalogue information for all products listed 6. Include any templates for door machining. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier shall be a company specializing in supplying of commercial door hardware. B. Hardware supplier shall have a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), as certified by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), as a full time employee shall oversee submittal completion and be available for consultation during the course of the project. C. Hardware supplier shall have permanent office and shop facilities with in 100 mile radius of project sight_ 1.06 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Installer and supplier shall convene prior to commencing of installation of doors and hardware for any special installation instructions. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 12046 1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE AND PROTECTION SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Package hardware items individually, label and identify each package with opening and set number to match hardware submittal. B. Contractor shall secure all delivered hardware in secure, dry location. C. Supplier shall deliver hardware to project sight or other locations as directed by contractor, 1.08 COORDINATION A. Verify cylinder type, finish, quantity etc. with any door supplier that hardware supplier is furnishing cylinders for. B. Verify voltage and amperage requirements for electrically operated hardware. C. Furnish any templates to door and frame manufactures and installers for door and frame preparation. D. Sequence delivery, installation etc. to ensure utility connections and security are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. E. Coordinate keying requirements with owner. F. Confirm and comply with specific ICC500 requirments specific to this project. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Contractor shall retain and present to owner any special installation and adjustment tools furnished with the hardware. B. Contractor shall retain and present to owner any installation adjustment and operational directions that are furnished with the hardware. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. McKinney(MC) 2. Hager 3. Bommer B. Mortise Locks: 1. Sargent (SA), 8200 Series, LNJ Design. 2. Corbin/Russwin, ML2000 Series, LWA Design. Yafet 8800 Series, CRR Design. '47 ,Schlage, L Series, 03A Design. C 'Cylinders:' 1a Sch47age(SC) 2'.- Nosjbstitute. Keyed to existing Schlage key system. D. FEMA Malb Point Latches: 1 Sargent (SA), FM 7100 Series. 2. Corbin Russwin, FE6800 Series. E. Push and Pulls: 1. McKinney (MC) 2. Rockwood(RO) 3. Trimco DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM F. Closers: 1. Sargent (SA), 351 Series. 2. Norton, 7500 Series. 3. Corbin/Russwin, DC8000 Series. 4. Yale, 4480 Series. 5. Supplier shall furnish all drop plates and mounting brackets as required for proper installation. 12046 6. Furnish arm type as noted in hardware sets. 7. Install closers on side of door for least visibility, unless mounting is required for maximum door swing or protect closure from moisture or corrosive materials. 8. Installer shall properly adjust all hydraulic and spring adjustments for proper operation of closer and door. 9. Contractor shall check and adjust all closers when mechanical systems are in operation. 10. All closers shall have full plastic covers.h c;:+ CD. G. Automatic Operators: � -_-;-; r.:D 1. Sargent (SA), MP4000 Series. 2. Norton, 6900 Series. - 3. Rixson, 2900 Series. - : r •; ; 4. Supplier shall furnish all drop plates and mounting brackets as required for�prope[ e installation. 5. Installer shall properly adjust all hydraulic, electrical and spring adjustment§ for proper operation of automatic operator and door. 6. Contractor shall check and adjust all automatic operators when mechanical systems are in operation. H. Protection Plates: 1. McKinney (MC) 2. Trimco 3. Rockwood 4. Protection plates shall be fastened with countersunk, oval head screws. 5. Protection plates shall be beveled on all four sides. 6. Protection plate size as noted in hardware sets unless restricted by bottom rail of door. I. Overhead Stops and Holders: 1. Sargent (SA), 590 Series. 2. Rixson, 9 Series. 3. Rockwood. 19000 Series. 4. Supplier shall furnish any shims or brackets required for proper installation of overhead stops and holders. J. Wall and Floor Stops: 1, Trimcc (TR) 2. No substitute. 3. Wall bumpers shall have vandal resistant metal in base of rubber insert. K. Stop Strips 1. Pemko 700E: accessible, neoprene bumper seal. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. L. Gasketing and Thresholds: 1. Pal (PE) 2. McKinney 3. Any weatherstrip aluminum housing attached to metal surfaces shall be attached with self -drilling TEK screws. 4. Any weatherstrip that is screw applied in an aluminum housing shall have the end fastening DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM screw be 1" or less from the end of the aluminum housing. The hole for this end fastening screw shall be drilled in field as required. M. Power Supplies: 1. Securitron (SN) 2. All approved exit device manufacturers. Key Switches: 1. Securitron (SN) 2. HES O. Silencers: 1. All silencers for hollow metal frames shall be furnished and installed by frame supplier. 2. Silencers are not required at frames that has gasketing or weatherstripping installed. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE A. Finishes: 1. Dull Chrome (US26D) or Brushed Stainless Steel (US32D) as noted in hardware sets. 2. Closers shall be painted aluminum in color. a. Provide products that comply with the following: 1) Applicable provisions of Federal, State and Local Codes. 2) All hardware on FEMA rated doors shall be listed and classified by ICC 500 as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3) Electrical hardware shall be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 KEYING A. Locks and cylinders shall be keyed per owner's instructions. B. Supplier shall meet with owner's representative shall determine keying details and submit key "schedule, for approval. C. Furnish -16 copies of each master and Grand Master key and 4 copies per door of each change key. : D. Stamo'all-keys as directed by owner's representative. 'E. D61 iver-all -keys, with identifying tags, to owner or contractor per owner's instructions. Person receiving keys to sign for them with a copy of receipt to be kept by the receiver and supplier. PART E'?(€CUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware as specified. B. Verify that frames are level, plum and set at correct dimensional opening. C. Verify that correct wire gauges are provided to supply correct electrical power to electrically operated devices. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided with hardware. C. Mounting heights of hardware shall be per DHI and ICC 500 recommended locations and accessibility codes. However, if conflicted, ICC 500 shall take precedent. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and as specified, as requested by the Architect. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth and proper operation. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01700. _ B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or other products. _ C.- 3.06 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 3.07 Hardware Sets _ SET #1 Door: 106A — c. r 3Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Strm Lock 8206 LNJ LC 26D SA 1 Mortise Cylinder 20-0011 1/8" 626 SC 1 Closer 3510 EN SA 1 Kickplate KP50 10" x 34" CSK HB4E U532D MC 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 630 TR 1 Gasketing PK 55 W 17' PE SET #2 FEMA Hollow Metal Door 108A Keyed cylinders as required. SC 1 Door Operator CL4051 4001 D EN SA 2 Wall Mt. Actuator 4396HP SA 1 Key Switch MKA SN To turn off automatic operator when door is locked. 4 Hinges SP T4A3386 5 X 4 1/2 NRP 32D MCKI 1 Three Pt. Lock FM 7113 ECJ 32D SA 1 Overhead Holder 599H 26D SA 1 Kickplate K1050 10" x 46" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Rain Drip 346C TEK PE 1 Weatherstrip 303 CS TEK SCREWS PE 1 Gasketing PK 88 W PE 1 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 40" TEK SCREWS PE SET #3 FEMA Hollow Metal Doors 105A, 107A 4 Hinges SP T4A3386 5 X 4 1/2 NRP 32D MCKI 1 Three Pt. Lock FM 7113 ECJ 32D SA DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1 Overhead Holder 599H 26D SA 1 Kickplate K1050 10" x 46" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Rain Drip 346C TEK PE 1 Weatherstrip 303 CS TEK SCREWS PE 1 Gasketing PK 88 W PE 1 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 40" TEK SCREWS PE SET #4 Hollow Metal Doors 1056, 1078 3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MCKI 1 Pull BFP16L 626 MC 1 Push Plate 70G 26D RO 1 Overhead Holder 599H 26D SA 1 Closer 351 P10 EN SA 1 Kickplate KP50 10" x 36" CSK HB4E US32D MC 1 Gasketing PK 55 W 17' PE Opening List Opening Hdw Set 105A 3 105B 4 106A 1 107A 3 107B 4 108A 2 END OF SECTION :>a DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, and unless otherwise indicated, including the following:. 1. Exposed surfaces of miscellaneous steel anchors. 2. Mechanical and Electrical: a- Items indicated in Mechanical and Electrical specifications to be painted. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items specified to be factory -finished; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts -df equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items. 1; ; 6. Concrete Floors and Walls, unless specifically so indicated. . ;-• 7. Glass. "' 8. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in, include description of each system. 3. Color samples for selections. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed. C. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Iowa City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. B_ Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with I7\I�ii1�CeL1�l iiZ�7iL•� �P[el 099000-1 `POZIN minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results. including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. 1. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. 2. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. C. Paints: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 2. Diamond Vogel Paint: www.diamondvogel.com. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. 4. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's highest quality product for type of coating specified. B. Paints and: Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field -catalyzed coating. 1:- ProyiZ e paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and unifannly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and - dapale of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2:' Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3:' For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. C. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer PAINTING AND COATING 099000-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di -n -butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2 -dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1 -trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. F. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule 1. Selection to be made by ArchitecUEngineer after award of contract. 2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect/Engineer. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS -EXTERIOR A. Ferrous metals, with rust -inhibitive primer: 1. Preparation as specified by top coat manufacturer. - 2. One coat of primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 3. Semi -gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic enamel. B. Galvanized metal: 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. One coat of primer recommended by manufacturer. 3. Semi -Gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic 2.04 OPAQUE PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR A. Paint 1-01 - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including metals: 1. Medium duty applications include doors and door frames 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Semi -Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations. 4. Rust Inhibitive Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. B. Ferrous metals including hollow steel doors and frames, other primed and unprimed metal surfaces: 1. Use products & systems specified for painting ferrous metals in exterior applications. 2. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 3. First coat: 100 percent acrylic, DTM primer/finish, anti -corrosive type recommended by top coat manufacturer. 4. Semi -gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION PAINTING AND COATING 099000-3 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. E. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; c spot prime after repairs. J. Shop -Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Fealher edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime b6re steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. K. Metal=Do&s to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03, APPL4CA�TIQN A. Apply products to items specified herein in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. < J B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. F. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 CLEANING PAINTING AND COATING 099000-4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. 3.06 SCHEDULE -SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:_ 1. Items factory -finished except as specifically noted below. c 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3.07 SCHEDULE -PAINT SYSTEMS ej A. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; MI -OP -3A, gloss, B. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME -OP -3A, semi -gloss finish all surfaces exposed to view. 2. Interior: ME -OP -3A, semi -gloss; finish all surfaces exposed to view. C. Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME -OP -3A, semi -gloss; finish all surfaces exposed to view. 2. Interior: ME -OP -3A, semi -gloss; finish all surfaces exposed to view D. Primed and Prefinished Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Finish the following items: a. Exposed surfaces of lintels. b. Wall louvers. END OF SECTION PAINTING AND COATING 099000-5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior room signage 2. FEMA safe room signage 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 12046 A. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design - US Dept of Justice Revised Regulations for Titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661-302.1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of sign required. B Samples: 1. Submit samples of sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures, and qualities of manufacture and design of each sign component including graphics. 2. Submit color samples for products requiring color for review by the Architect. C. Submit complete alphabet, numerals, and punctuation for approval prior to beginning work. If more than one foundry's cut will be used, each cut shall be submitted for approval. D. Shap Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large scale details of sign wording and lettering layout. Indicate anchorage and accessory items. 2. Shop drawings shall be original information or drawings, prepared specifically for this project, solely by or for the fabricator or supplier. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A: Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by, -- manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. 71 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN TYPE B - RESTROOM SIGNS A. Materials 1. Sheet aluminum; 0.080 thick B. Size 1. 6" x 8" x1/4" C. Text: 1. "MEN" or "WOMEN", 5/8" height 2. Graphics Internation symbols: Gender and Accessiblity 3. Grade II Braille - SIGNAGE 10 1400-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM D. Finishes 1. Matte, non -glare, ADA compliant; colors and contrast 2.02 SIGN TYPE C - FEMA SAFE ROOM SIGNS A. Materials 1. Sign Material: Sheet aluminum; a. Thickness: 0.080 2. Photoluminescent Film: Photoluminescent Film Series 6900 as manufactured by 3M; color: white a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Sizes: As indicated on the Drawings C. Text: As indicated on the Drawings Fabrication 1. Fabricate panel signs to comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. 2. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of ± 1116" measured diagonally from corner to corner 3. Comply with all applicable FEMA standards and requirements. E. Finishes 1. Type 1 sign: a. Aluminum sign background and text to be non -reflective clear anodized aluminum b. Text and Tornado logo to be reflective. c. Verify that sign will glow for a minimum of 3 hours in the event of power loss 2. Type 2, 2L, and 2R signs: a. Aluminum sign background, text and arrow to be non -reflective b. Tornado logo and background around text and arrow to be reflective. c. Verify that sign will glow for a minimum of 3 hours in the event of power loss F, Accessbries' ` 1,':_ Mechanical anchors: concrete anchors with vandal proof heads. 2. Tap6£Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. 4 3.. Alternate Adhesive: Liquid construction adhesive. PART EXECUTION 3.01 INSJ?,kl_ T10 -'N -GENERAL A. Contractor shall coordinate installation with Owner. B. Signs shall be mounted in compliance with ADA guidelines. The center of wall mounted signs shall be at 60" above finished floor. When identifying the entrance to a room, signs shall be located 2" horizontally from the door frame on the strike side. Signs shall be mounted such that a person can stand within 3" of the sign and not be in the arc of a door swing. C, Locate sign units and accessories where schematically indicated on location plans , using mounting methods of type described and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, ADA and NFPA and any other applicable codes. D. Install sign units level, plumb, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance. 3.02 SIGN TYPE B: A Attached wall -mounted units to surfaces using methods indicated below. 1. Mechanical mounting to substrate with vandal proof anchors. SIGNAGE 101400-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 a. Supplement mechanical anchors with silicone adhesive. 2. Mount at ADA required heights and locations on latch side of doors. 3.03 SIGN TYPE C: A. Verify locations with Architect prior to installation. B. Mechanical mounting to substrate with vandal proof anchors. 1. Supplement mechanical anchors with silicone adhesive. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Owner. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Sign Type B: one at each of the following locations: 1. Restroom Doors 105A, 105B, 107A, & 107B B. Sign Type C: 1. Sign Type STI: 1 on front of safe room building. 2. Sign Type ST2: 1 with post at parking lot - location shown on the Drawings 3. Sign Type ST2R,ST2L: 1 each back to back on post where shown on the Drawings END OF SECTION SIGNAGE 101400-3 _i SIGNAGE 101400-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 102119 - SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid phenolic toilet and shower compartments. 1.02 RELATEDSECTIONS = _7 A. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES _ A. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless; Steel' Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS - A. See Section 001 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples for selection: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Phenolic Core Compartments: 1. Santana Products Co.,lnc: www.hinyhider.com/www.scrantonproducts.com 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid phenolic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor -mounted headrail-braced. 1. Door and Panel Dimensions: a. Panel Thickness: 1 inch. b. Door Width: 24 inch. c. Door Width for Accessible Use: 36 inch, out -swinging_ d. Height: 55 inch. e. Thickness of Doors and Pilasters: 1 inch. B. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with continuous 6463-T5 alloy with a bright dip anodized finish panel bracket, and floor -to -wall vertical / horizontal consisting of tubular headrail stock and sockets anchored to floor and wall. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed 20 ga., ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 in high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster, SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 102119-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Pilaster Brackets: Satin stainless steel. D. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, 6463-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finishextruded aluminum, 6463-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish]; E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. F. Hardware: Satin stainless steel (except where indicated): 1. Hinges, full length, cam action, adjustable for door close positioning. 2. Door Latch: Heavy-duty, 6436-T5 aluminum alloy; Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike/keeper shall be 6" long and made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6436-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish, with wrap around flanges and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts. Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per toilet compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. Accessible doors shall have a second, accessible -specific door pull. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C..`.:Attach;=panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D.;_ 'Attach • panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E c jFielchtoach-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or `scratched materials with new materials. c._r. ` 103 EBECTIGNTOLERANCES Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out -swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 102119 -2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 102813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES VrAft&Well 4N4ZU- 4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for public toilet rooms and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. - C. Electric hand dryers. - 'v - 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 10 2113.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design- US DoJ Rev. Regulations for Titles II and III, Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661-302.1 B. ASTM A 1231A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. C. ASTM A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2007a. D. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. E. ASTM F 2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use; 2004. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of toilet fixtures and partitions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention, such as vandal resistance. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 1. Provide all toilet accessories from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories -General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-1 12046 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 or 316. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized or stainless steel, tamper -proof, security type. E. Expansion Shields: Steel, zinc, or lead as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. Plastic or mineral fiber is not acceptable. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 123/A 1231 galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Owner furnished; Contractor installed. B. Foam Soap Dispenser: Owner furnished; Contractor installed. C. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick bright -polished stainless steel mirror. 1. Size: 17 1/2 inches wide x 29 1/2 inches tall. 2. Frameless; machined for direct application to wall surface by vandal resistant anchors. 3. Backing 1/4" tempered hardboard. D. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-114 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: as indicated. 2. Comply with applicable codes. E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit Stainless steel, surface -mounted, self-closing door, locking `bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano -type hinge, removable receptacle. F. -Diaper Changing Station: Wall -mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial :-Toiletfacilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F 2255. "1-. Style: Horizontal. c2. Material: Polyethylene. -3. Mounting: Surface. LA. Mff mum Rated Load: 250 lbs. M49ufacturers: 7 a'-` Koala Kare Products: www.koalabear.corn. ry 2.05 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. 1. Drying rod: Stainless steel, 114 inch diameter. 2. Hooks: 2, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front. 3. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 4. Length: 36 inches. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. ri C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION ur C A. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: as indicated on drawings and as required by accessibility codes. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 1 per toilet stall in toilet partition thru-bolted with vandal resistant anchors. B. Soap Dispenser: 1 per restroom adjacent to lavatory. C. Mirrors: 1 per restroom over lavatory. secure with vandal resistant anchors. D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units: 1 per toilet stall in Women's restroom. E. Grab Bars: 1 set in each accessible stall. F. Diaper Changing Stations: 1 per restroom. G. Utility Shelf/Mop & Broom Holder: 1 in Storeroom. END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 22 0050 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Plumbing Requirements specifically applicable to Mechanical Division Specification Sections. B. Division 22 Specification requirements also include, by reference, all "common" specification sections; Notices, Advertisements, Instructions to Bidders, Proposals and General Conditions. This contractor is responsible to review these specification sections. Requirements of these specification sections are included as a part of this contract. C. Division 22 Specification requirements also include, by reference, all Division 1 - General Requirements specification requirements. Requirements of these specification sections are included as a part of this contract. 1.02 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The owner will not occupy the premises during the construction period. B. Limit use of site and premises to allow owner occupancy. C. Cooperate with the owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate owner's operations. D. Schedule the work to accommodate this requirement. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. This contractor shall give proper authorities all requisite notices relating to work in his charge, obtain official permits, licenses for temporary construction and pay proper fees for it. B. This contractor is to be solely answerable for and shall promptly make good all damage, injury or delay to other contractors, to neighboring premises or to persons or property of the public by himself, by his employees or through any operation under his charge, whether in the contract or extra work. C. No attempt has been made to reproduce in these specifications any of the rules or regulations contained in city, state or federal ordinances and codes pertaining to the work covered by these specifications that the contractor be thoroughly familiar with all such ordinances and codes. D. The fact that said various rules, regulations and ordinances are not repeated in this specification does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of making the entire installation in accordance with the requirement of those authorities having jurisdiction. E_ All work shall comply with the applicable recommendations of: 1. The National Board of Fire Underwriters 2. The American Gas Association 3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. The Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 5. Current IBC Building Code 6. Current applicable city building codes. Mechanical: Conform to current mechanical code. G. Plumbing: Conform to current plumbing code. H. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0050 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on the drawings unless prevented by project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of owner and arch itecUengineer before proceeding. C. This contractor, before submitting his bid, shall visit the site of the project to familiarize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work. D. It is the intent of this specification that the contractor furnishes all labor and material required completing the installation as outlined in the drawings and specifications. No additions to the contract price shall be allowed due to the failure of this contractor to properly evaluate the effect of existing conditions on the work to be done under this contract. E. Whenever renovation or remodeling or relocation of existing equipment is included in the contract, it is imperative that all locations of existing piping, ductwork, equipment, services and grades be noted on the job site before bid is submitted and that all elevations and grades be verified before roughing in new work. F. This contractor shall provide holes as necessary for the installation of his work and in accordance with other specification sections in materials other than the structure. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. This contractor shall arrange his work in order that it progresses along with the general construction of the building. B. This contractor shall be kept informed as to the work of other trades engaged in the project and shall execute his work in such a manner so as not to delay or interfere with progress of other contractors. C. Where space for mechanical and electrical lines and piping is limited, it is imperative that all such trades coordinate their work so as to insure concealment in space provided. Where conflict exists, the engineer shall decide priority of space. If work is not properly coordinated, the engineer may require removal and relocation of work without additional compensation. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all of the apparatus, materials, equipment furnished and labor installed under this contract for a period of one year after date of final acceptance, unless a longer period is specified. B. Neither final certificate of payment nor any provisions in the contract documents nor partial or complete occupancy of premises by owner shall constitute an acceptance for work not done in accordance with contract documents or relieve the contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. C. Should any defects arise as the result of defective workmanship or material within the guarantee period set forth, this contractor shall make the necessary correction at his own expense. 1.07-ENGINEER;APPROVED EQUAL PRODUCTS A. WfSen the engineer, at the request of the interested parties, including the contractor, supplier and manufacturer approved "engineer approved equal' products for this project, such products areapproved on the assumption that they will equal or exceed the performance of the products �. s(�ecifie'tl v BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0050 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. If such products do not do so after being installed on this project, this contractor shall replace or modify the particular product as necessary to equal the performance of the products specified at no expense to the owner, architect or engineer. C. Request for "engineer approved equal' products shall be received by the architect/engineer prior to the last addendum being issued. Requests for substitutions received after this date will not be considered. Substitution requests shall clearly state which products are being considered for substitution. Substitution requests shall include all pertinent product information needed to evaluate the substitution as an "equal". D. Similar products shall be all of the same manufacturers and style. There is no exception to this unless prior approval has been granted from engineer. 1.08 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE r� > A. Where necessary to connect to any existing utility service, this contractor shall contac{ the owner and shall coordinate any building service connection with the owner so_that normal operation to the building is disrupted as little as possible. 1.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING _ e A. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation.9�f`his iWork in all _ existing and new buildings unless otherwise noted. B. This contractor shall arrange for openings in the building as required for the installation of equipment furnished under this contract. C. Where sewers must be extended or changed, patching with concrete will be done in the building. Patching shall be at both the top and bottom of sleeves where above grade - D. In areas where the integrity of new fire separation assembly/wall is compromised by the work, contractor shall be responsible to patch and/or seal openings as necessary to maintain/return fire separation to rating as required by applicable codes. 1.10 CLEANING AND RUBBISH A. This contractor shall upon completion of his work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from his operation and shall remove it from site at his own expense. B. In so far as his work is concerned, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition. C. This contractor shall maintain the work area each day to prevent hazardous accumulation of waste from his work. 1.11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. This contractor shall tum over all magnetic starters, thermal protective switches and speed changing switches furnished under this contract for all motor driven equipment to the electrical contractor who will install such starters and switches and wire them to their respective motors as a part of the electrical contract. 1.12 UTILITYCOMPANY A. Any fees by the utility company are to be billed directly to the owner. B. The contractor is required to assist the owner in the preparation of all utility company rebate forms that deal with equipment furnished and/or installed as a part of this contractor. BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0050 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 12046 A. If the contractor stores any hazardous solvents or other materials on the site, he shall obtain copies of the safety data sheets for the materials and post them on the site. He shall inform the owner and all employed of any potential exposure to this material. B. At no time shall any product containing asbestos be incorporated into the work. 1. If asbestos materials are encountered, report to the owner. The owner will be responsible for asbestos removal. 1.14 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. This contractor shall provide, at the conclusion of the project, one clean, non -torn, neat, and legible "as -built' set of drawings to the owner. These drawings shall show the routing of pipes, ductwork and equipment drawn in at scaled locations. All dimensions indicated shall be referenced to a column line. A set of construction blue prints will be furnished for this work. B. All mechanical systems installed shall be shown on the "as -built" drawings. C. Refer to respective architectural specification section for additional information. D. This contractor shall update these drawings during the project at least every week. 1.15 REVIEW OF MATERIALS A. This contractor shall submit to the engineer for review one (1) electronic copy of a brochure giving a complete list of materials and equipment he proposes to furnish. The brochure shall contain complete information as to the make of equipment, type, size, capacities, dimensions and illustration. One of the returned copies shall be kept on the job at all times. B. Checking of submittal drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings and for their conformity to drawings and specifications unless he notifies engineer in writing of such deviation at time such drawings are furnished. C. All submittals shall have the date marked on them when the contractor receives them from the supplier. Submittals shall be submitted through the contractor and shall not come direct from the supplier to the architect or engineer. D. This contractor shall mark the date and sign each set that he has checked each of them in their entirety before submitting to the engineer. Submittals that are not dated and signed by the contractor will not be accepted, or checked and will be marked "resubmit" and sent back to the contractor. 1,16 TEST OF SYSTEMS A. , his contractor shall, before concealed, test all systems installed under this contract as called .for in these specifications and as required by local codes. Tests shall be made in the presence of the engineer, local authorities or their duly authorized representative. Any defects discovered io testing shall be corrected and the tests repeated until all defects are eliminated. B. This fro tractor shall be held responsible for all damage resulting from defects in the system. C. 'At the:"coriclusion of construction (before any covering up, painting or finishing) each element of 4he system shall be thoroughly tested against leakage with appropriate pressure tests as g�tlined'hbrein and in appropriate sections of the specifications. All testing shall be hydrostatic unless permission is granted otherwise. 1. Water: 100 psi maintained 8 hours 2. Under Floor Pipes: 200 psi maintained 8 hours 3. SanitarySewer: 10 foot hydrostatic BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0050 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM D. Fluid lines other than the above 1.5 times operating with a minimum pressure of 60 psig. 12046 E. No covering or backfilling of sewer lines shall be done until inspected by the architect or local inspector. Test T's shall be provided on all waste and vent stacks 4'-6" above each floor as required for testing the plumbing system. F. After completion of installation, the systems shall be given tests under full operating conditions and pressures and all adjustments shall be made to make the system operative as regySred. All safety devices shall be tested for correct operation. 1.17 SCOPE OF WORK ra A. All work shall be performed by well-qualified and licensed mechanics with a therough knowledge. of the various systems involved in this building. It shall be this contractor's respansibility to see that his mechanics are familiarwith all the various codes and tests applicable to this work. B. All equipment shall be new and of the type as specified by the engineer unless otherwi"se noted in these specifications or on the drawings to remain and or be reused. C. The intent of the drawings and specifications is for complete installation of the systems outlined in the drawings and specifications so that at the conclusion of construction the system will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe and efficient operation. D. This contractor shall be required to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which, while not mentioned directly herein or on the drawings are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installation of this type. The drawings and specifications cannot deal individually with the many minute items that may be required by the nature of the systems. E. If there is a discrepancy between the drawings and the specifications or within either document, the more stringent requirement shall be estimated unless brought to the engineer's attention and an addendum is issued for clarification. 1.18 VERIFICATION OF ELEVATION OF EXISTING LINES A. This contractor, before starting any new work, shall verify the elevations of all existing piping to which he must connect under this contract. He shall report any discrepancies between drawing elevations and actual elevations to the engineer before proceeding with the work. Failure of the contractor to do so shall make him liable for the cost of extra work involved. 1.19 DAILY HOUSEKEEPING A. At the end of each working day, this contractor shall remove all of his debris, rubbish, tools and surplus materials from the project work area. The work area shall be broom clean and left in a neat and orderly condition. The contractor for the removal of debris from the project shall not use the owner's waste disposal facility. B. At end of construction, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition as far as this contractor's work is concerned. 1.20 CLEANING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. This contractor shall clean all piping systems by flushing with water until free from all sand, grit, gravel, oil, etc. B. Where connections are made to existing piping systems, this contractor shall provide isolation valves, threaded tees, etc., as required to facilitate the cleaning and testing of all new piping. BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0050 - PAGE 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. This contractor shall thoroughly clean all rust, grease, plaster, cement, etc., from all equipment and piping furnished and installed by him as required to leave surfaces suitable for finish painting. D. This contractor shall keep all pipes, traps, waste lines, ducts, etc., plugged, drained or otherwise protected during construction. All items of mechanical equipment shall be suitably protected and upon completion of project shall be equal to new condition. 1.21 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Each contractor is responsible for their own individual trenching and backfilling unless otherwise noted in the drawings or addendum. B. All underground utilities, piping, etc shall be located exactly before digging. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damages caused by failure to do so. C. Any backfill shall be tamped and compacted to prevent future settling. The backfill shall be installed to a smooth and level grade and installed in accordance with local codes. D. All excess dirt shall be cleared from the area and disposed of as directed by the owner. E. Refer to architectural specification sections for additional requirements. 1.22 ALTERNATES A. Refer to General Specification Sections for alternate bid description. 1.23 DIGITALMEDIAAGREEMENT A. Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) documents maybe available to the contractor for some uses. Contact the engineer prior to bidding to determine what information is available to be transmitted to the contractor in digital form. B. When documents are determined to be available, and as requested by the contractor, they will be transmitted upon the completion and execution of the MODUS digital media agreement. A service fee for each document transmitted will be assessed to the contractor. Documents will be transmitted upon payment receipt. Current service fee is $100.00 per CAD sheet - PART2PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION c.� C'J BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0050 - PAGE 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 22 0519 12046 METERSAND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING r.; PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Positive displacement meters (liquid). 1.02 REFERENCES _. A. AWWA C706 - Direct -Reading Remote -Registration Systems for Cold -Water Meters. B. AWWA C710 - Cold -Water Meters -Displacement Type, Plastic Main Case. C. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data and list, which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough in, taps, support, and test plugs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS (LIQUID) A. Manufacturers: 1. Badger 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register. C. Nominal Flow: 2 gpm. D. Pressure Drop at Nominal Flow: 4 psi. E. Maximum Flow: 4 gpm. F. Maximum Operating Pressure: 80 psi. G. Accuracy: 1-1/2% PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to schematics and details on drawings for additional locations ENDOF SECTION METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART IGENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe hangers and supports.; B. Accessories. c:r, :t C. Flashing. D. Sleeves. , 1.02 RELATEDSECTIONS = A. Specification Section 22 1116- Domestic Water Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. C. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. D. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. F. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 12046 A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. B. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell 2. Tolco 3. Engineer approved equal. B_ Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9; ASTM F708 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel adjustable swivel, split ring. Grinnell Figure 104. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. Grinnell Figure 260. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron bracket. Grinnell Figure 213. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Grinnell Figure 195. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. Grinnell Figure 264. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, and copper plated. Grinnell Figure 97. Provide zinc coated hangers and supports for all non air conditioned areas. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Carbon steel adjustable swivel, split ring. Grinnell Figure 104. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. Grinnell Figure 260. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron bracket. Grinnell Figure 213. 6. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. Grinnell Figure 264. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. Grinnell Figure 97. 8. Provide zinc coated hangers and supports for all non air conditioned areas. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. 2.03 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel. B. Metal Counter Flashing: 22 gauge galvanized steel. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge minimum, 16 gauge at fire resistant elements. 2.04 SLEEVES A. Sleeves foi pipes through wall below grade shall be Schedule 40, two pipe diameters larger than pipe. Sealwith Linkseal. B. Sleeves fgr pipes through non -fire rated floors shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel. C. ,Sleeve-s`f6r pipes through non -fire rated beams, walls, footings, and potentially wet floors shall be Spttedule 40 steel pipe or 18 gauge galvanized steel. f- _ D. `g'leeves for pipes through fire rated and fire resistive floors and walls, and fire proofing to be a `fire rated sleeve assembly including seals, UL listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inch of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub with 5 foot maximum spacing between hangers. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. ' H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. - I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J. Primecoat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located'jr%.drawl , spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed 3.03 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting three inch (3") minimum above finished roof surface with 24" x 24" sheet size. Turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash, and seal for pipes through outside walls. Referto architectural drawings and specifications for additional information. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with waterproof membrane ten inch (10") clear on sides with minimum 36" x 36" sheet size, Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor, shower, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. 3.04 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floor one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. D. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces and within cabinets. 3.05 SCHEDULES HANGERROD MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Pipe Size Feet Inches 1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 10.0 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 10.0 1/2 4 to 6 10.0 5/8 END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Pipe markers. C. Labels. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color -coding for mechanical identification. B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. 12046 C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves, include valve tag numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.02 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6" W x 4" mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. 2.03 LABELS A. Description: Laminated Mylar, size 1.9" x 0.75" adhesive backed with printed identification. PART EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. De -grease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. Apply paint primer before applying labels for unfinished canvas covering_ IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 D. Install underground plastic pipe markers six inch (6") to eight inch (8") below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. E. Identify piping, concealed or exposed with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 314 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 foot on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction. Identify on both sides of any wall. F. Conform to owner's existing identification scheme. Verify with owner prior to bid. 4 •,f N END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 22 1116 DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewer piping (below grade). B. Sanitary sewer piping (above grade). r.> C. Water piping (below grade) D. Water piping (above grade). E. Ball valves. F. Pipe accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. B. ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping. C. ASME Section 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. D. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. E. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. F. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. G. ASME B16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. H. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings. I. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings — DWV J. ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 1110101 K. ASME 816.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. L. ASME B16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage Systems. M. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. N. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. O. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. P. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (galvanized), Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Use. Q. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Copper Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. R. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. S. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe. DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 22 1116 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM T. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. U. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. V. ASTM 8251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube. W. ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP). X. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). Y. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Z. ASTM D1785 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 12046 AA. ASTM D2683 - Socket type Polyethylene fillings for outside diameter controlled polyethylene pipe. AB. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal_ AC. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. AD. AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron Gray Iron Fittings three inch (3") through 48 inch for Water and Other Liquids. AE. AWWA C111 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. AF. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. AG. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. AH. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of valves. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts list and exploded assembly views. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the State of Iowa. B. Valves:- Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. WpIdirig-aeterials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor „ ... r6gulati0r±S-: D. VV/�Ider's Certification In accordance with ASME Section IX. f_-) E. Identify pipe with marking including size, material classification, specification, potable water certification and water pressure rating. Maintain one copy of each document on site. G. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or be prior approved by engineer, DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 22 1116 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 H. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be installed according to the latest edition of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work in accordance with local jurisdiction plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of back flow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of back flow prevention devices. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work and isolating parts of completed system. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARYSEWER PIPING (BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING) A. PVC Pipe: 1. ASTM D2665. 2. Fittings: PVC. 3. Joints: ASTM F477, elastomeric gaskets. 2.02 SANITARYSEWER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Cast Iron Pipe: 1. CISPI 301 hubless service weight three inch (3") and larger. 2. Fittings: Cast iron. 3. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies conforming to CISPI 310. 4. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or be prior approved by engineer. 2.03 WATER PIPING (BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING) A. Copper Tubing: 1. ASTM B88, type #K hard drawn, piping less than three inches. 2. Fittings: ASME 1316.18, cast bronze. 3. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2.04 WATER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Copper Tubing: 1. ASTM B88, type #L hard drawn. 2. Fittings: ASME 1316.22, wrought copper and bronze. 3. Joints- ASTM 332, solder, Grade 95TA. DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 22 1116 - PAGE 3 r..� 3. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies conforming to CISPI 310. 4. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or be prior approved by engineer. 2.03 WATER PIPING (BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING) A. Copper Tubing: 1. ASTM B88, type #K hard drawn, piping less than three inches. 2. Fittings: ASME 1316.18, cast bronze. 3. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2.04 WATER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Copper Tubing: 1. ASTM B88, type #L hard drawn. 2. Fittings: ASME 1316.22, wrought copper and bronze. 3. Joints- ASTM 332, solder, Grade 95TA. DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 22 1116 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Cross -Linked Polyethylene (PEX) 1. ASTM F876, ASTM F877 2. Fittings: ASTM F1960 3. Joints: PEX-a cold expansion fitting. 2.05 BALLVALVES A. Up To and Including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze two piece full port body, stainless steel ball and stem. Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 1. Manufacturer: a. Apollo #77-240 b. Watts #B -6080 -SS c. Engineer approved equal. 2.06 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: 1. All fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe. Material joining the fitting to the pipe shall be free from cracks and shall adhere tightly to each joining surface. 2. All fittings shall be capped with a plug of the same material as the pipe, and Basketed with the same gasket material as the pipe joint or be of material approved by the engineer. The plug shall be able to withstand all test pressures involved without leakage. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C." :Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls D: Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. 4 E. Gfcup piping whenever practical at common elevations. F- Install -piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected dqupment. 'G. Prgvdde clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of c,insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors. I. Establish elevations of buried sanitary and storm sewer piping outside the building to ensure not less than four feet (4') of cover unless otherwise noted. J. Establish elevations of buried water service outside the building to ensure not less than six feet (6') of cover unless otherwise noted. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, scrape, brush clean and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 22 1116 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not pre -finished, ready for finish painting. N- Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. O Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. " P. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. O. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. R. Clean out all sanitary sewers to remove any debris prior to substantial completion: S. All cast iron soil pipe shall be installed in accordance with cast iron soil pipe institute handbook (latest edition) T. All cast iron soil pipe shall be marked with the trademark of the soil pipe institute. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot 1% minimum. Maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping minimum 0.25% and arrange to drain at low points. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flush and clean. B. The plumbing contractor is to make sure sanitary sewer lines are running smooth by running a snake through the sanitary sewer lines prior turning the facility over to the owner. C. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder or tablet form throughout system to obtain 50 -to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15% of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing from 10% of outlets and from water entry and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. Submit written report to owner. J. Work in this section shall be by a pre -approved water treatment contractor. DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 22 1116 - PAGE 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer. 1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Caulk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall. 2. Install service piping and valves as indicated on the site drawing. Provide thrust blocks at all changes in direction. Verify the local city requirements prior to bid. 3. Install remote meter readout and associated wiring. Coordinate location with utility company. C. The plumbing contractor is responsible to contact and inform the utility companies, prior to the utility companies coming to the site, of any underground utilities and piping they may be aware of. D. Charges by the utility company to provide services shall not be included in the bid and shall be paid directly by the owner, END OF SECTION CEJ DOMESTIC PLUMBING PIPING 221116 - PAGE 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 22 1119 DOMESTIC PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 12046 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor drain. B. Clean out. C. Hose bib. D. Backflow preventer. E. Water hammer arrestor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ` A. Specification Section 22 1116 - Domestic Plumbing Piping B. Specification Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment C. Specification Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME Al 12.21 A - Floor Drains. B. ASME At 12.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors. C. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. D. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. E. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. F. ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti -Backflow Types. G. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. H. PDI G-101 - Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Sizing and Installation Data. I. PDI WH -201 - Water Hammer Arrestors. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights and placement of openings and holes. C. Certificates: Certify that grease interceptors meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, clean out, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors. F. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. G. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. DOMESTIC PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 12046 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAIN (FD -1) A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts #FD -100 2. Smith 3. Zurn 4. Josam 5. Wade 6. Engineer approved equal. B. ANSI Al 12.21.11 lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar and round, and adjustable nickel -bronze strainer. C. Pipe size to be three inch (3") unless noted on the drawings. D. Strainer to be seven inch (6") unless noted on the drawings. E. Provide floor drains installed above slab on -grade with membrane clamp. 2.02 CLEAN OUT A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts 2. Smith 3. Josam 4 Wade 5. Engineer approved equal. B. Interior Finished Sub or On Grade Floors: 1. Watts #CO -200-R 2. Lacquered cast iron bodies with integral anchor flange, neoprene "0" ring secondary test seal and adjustable combined access cover and plug with gasket seal. Nickel -bronze scpriated cover in service area and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C_ IntenorwFinished Membrane Floor Areas: 1_ , ,`Watts #CO -200 -C-R 2.. Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible r.- )---Clamping collar and adjustable nickel -bronze strainer round with sconated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. D -i; InteriorFinished Wall Areas: Pl 1. Watts #CO -380 -RD 2. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasket cover and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack clean out on vertical rainwater leaders and on horizontal accessible pipes. DOMESTIC PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM F. Exterior Cleanouts: 1. Provide with brass plug with all cast iron cleanout cover equal to Josam #Y-620. 2. Refer to detail on drawings. G. Cleanout size shall be equal to pipe size up to 4 inches. 2.03 HOSE BIB (HB -1) 12046 A. Interior Mixing Manufacturers: 1. Woodford #HC -65 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Interior Mixing: Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, integral spots, chrome plated where exposed with hand wheels and vacuum breaker in,, conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011, C. Architect to select finish. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: _- 1 . Watts #0091909 -' 2. Conbraco 3. Febco 4. Hersey-Beeco 5. Ames 6. Engineer approved equal. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. ANSVASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts. Stainless steel springs, two independently operating spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves, and a third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure. Non -threaded vent outlet assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.Conform to USC standards. 3. Assembly shall include two isolation valves USC approved. 2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Zum "Shoktro" #Z-1700 2. Sioux Chief 3. Engineer approved equal. B. ANSI Al 12.26.1, sized in accordance with PDI WH -201 pre -charged suitable for operation in temperature range of -100 deg to 250 deg F and maximum 350 psig working pressure. I:7_13ffi7 (tflffll . 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to require invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend clean out to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded clean out plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at clean out for rodding of drainage system. Coordinate all cleanout locations with the architect. DOMESTIC PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Furnish and install cleanouts at locations as specified and required by local plumbing code. D. Pipe relief from backflow, preventer to nearest drain. E. Encase exterior clean out in concrete flush with grade. F. Install floor clean out at elevation to accommodate finished floor. G. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur, on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior hose bibbs and exterior wall hydrants. H. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation ball valve on hot and cold water supply piping where indicated on the drawings. I. Provide floor drains installed above slab on -grade with membrane clamp and 3' x 3' vinyl membrane. Membrane is by the mechanical contractor. J. Coordinate all floor drain locations with associated equipment. K. Coordinate all wall mounted device locations with architect. END OF SECTION DOMESTIC PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 221119 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 23 0050 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 12046 PART IGENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic HVAC Requirements specifically applicable to Mechanical Division Specification Sections. B. Division 23 Specification requirements also include, by reference, all "common" specification sections; Notices, Advertisements, Instructions to Bidders, Proposals and General Conditions. This contractor is responsible to review these specification sections. Requirements of these specification sections are included as a part of this contract. C. Division 23 Specification requirements also include, by reference, all Division 1 - General Requirements specification requirements. Requirements of these specification sections are included as a part of this contract. r_o 1.02 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The owner will not occupy the premises during the construction period. B. Limit use of site and premises to allow owner occupancy. C. Cooperate with the owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate owner's operatiorfs!_ D. Schedule the work to accommodate this requirement. - - 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. This contractor shall give proper authorities all requisite notices relating to work in his charge, obtain official permits, licenses for temporary construction and pay proper fees for it. B. This contractor is to be solely answerable for and shall promptly make good all damage, injury or delayto other contractors, to neighboring premises or to persons or property of the public by himself, by his employees or through any operation under his charge, whether in the contract or extra work. C. No attempt has been made to reproduce in these specifications any of the rules or regulations contained in city, state or federal ordinances and codes pertaining to the work covered by these specifications that the contractor be thoroughly familiar with all such ordinances and codes. D. The fact that said various rules, regulations and ordinances are not repeated in this specification does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of making the entire installation in accordance with the requirement of those authorities having jurisdiction. E. All work shall comply with the applicable recommendations of: 1. The National Board of Fire Underwriters 2. American Gas Association 3. The National Fire Protection Association (NEPA) 4. The Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 5. Current IBC Building Code 6. Current applicable city building codes. F. Mechanical: Conform to current mechanical code. G. Plumbing: Conform to current plumbing code. H. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0050 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on the drawings unless prevented by project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of owner and architect/engineer before proceeding. C. This contractor, before submitting his bid, shall visit the site of the project to familiarize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work. D. It is the intent of this specification that the contractor furnishes all labor and material required completing the installation as outlined in the drawings and specifications. No additions to the contract price shall be allowed due to the failure of this contractor to properly evaluate the effect of existing conditions on the work to be done under this contract. E. Whenever renovation or remodeling or relocation of existing equipment is included in the contract, it is imperative that all locations of existing piping, ductwork, equipment, services and grades be noted on the job site before bid is submitted and that all elevations and grades be verified before roughing in new work. This contractor shall provide holes as necessary for the installation of his work and in accordance with other specification sections in materials other than the structure. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. This contractor shall arrange his work in order that it progresses along with the general construction of the building. B. This contractor shall be kept informed as to the work of other trades engaged in the project and shall execute his work in such a manner so as not to delay or interfere with progress of other contractors. C. Where space for mechanical and electrical lines and piping is limited, it is imperative that all such trades coordinate their work so as to insure concealment in space provided. Where conflict exists, the engineer shall decide priority of space. If work is not properly coordinated, the engineer may require removal and relocation of work without additional compensation. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all of the apparatus, materials, equipment furnished and labor installed under this contract for a period of one year after date of final acceptance, unless a longer period is specified. B. Neither final certificate of payment nor any provisions in the contract documents nor partial or complete occupancy of premises by owner shall constitute an acceptance for work not done in accordance with contract documents or relieve the contractor of liability in respect to any gzpress Warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. C. Should any defects arise as the result of defective workmanship or material within the guarantee r periodset-forth, this contractor shall make the necessary correction at his own expense. 4:07ENGtNEERAPPROVED EQUAL PRODUCTS A. When .the engineer, at the request of the interested parties, including the contractor, supplier and manufacturer approved "engineer approved equal' products for this project, such products are approved on the assumption that they will equal or exceed the performance of the products s specified. BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0050 -PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. If such products do not do so after being installed on this project, this contractor shall replace or modify the particular product as necessary to equal the performance of the products specified at no expense to the owner, architect or engineer. C. Request for "engineer approved equal" products shall be received by the architect/engineer prior to the last addendum being issued. Requests for substitutions received after this date will not be considered. Substitution requests shall clearly state which products are being considered for substitution. Substitution requests shall include all pertinent product information needed to evaluate the substitution as an "equal". D. Similar products shall be all of the same manufacturers and style. There is no exception to this unless prior approval has been granted from engineer. 1.08 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Where necessary to connect to any existing utility service, this contractor shall -contact the owner and shall coordinate any building service connection with the owner so thi 't-nprn a{ operation to the building is disrupted as little as possible. 1.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of_higwdrk,o all, existing and new buildings unless otherwise noted. B. This contractor shall arrange for openings in the building as required for the insfallatiou_of equipment furnished under this contract. Where [ductwork] or [piping] must be extended or changed, patching with concrete will be done in the building. Patching shall be at both the top and bottom of sleeves where above grade. C. In areas where the integrity of new or existing fire separation assembly/wall is compromised by the work, contractor shall be responsible to patch and/or seal openings as necessary to maintain/return fire separation to rating as required by applicable codes. 1.10 CLEANING AND RUBBISH A. This contractor, upon completion of his work, shall remove all rubbish and debris resulting from his operation and shall remove it from site at his own expense. B. In so far as his work is concerned, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition. C. This contractor shall maintain the work area each day to prevent hazardous accumulation of waste from his work. 1.11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. This contractor shall turn over all magnetic starters, thermal protective switches, and speed changing switches furnished under this contract for all motor driven equipment to the electrical contractor who will install such starters and switches and wire them to their respective motors as a part of the electrical contract. 1.12 UTILITY COMPANY A. Any fees by the utility company are to be billed directly to the owner. B. The contractor is required to assist the owner in the preparation of all utility company rebate forms that deal with equipment furnished and/or installed as a part of this contractor. BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0050 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 12046 A. If the contractor stores any hazardous solvents or other materials on the site, he shall obtain copies of the safety data sheets for the materials and post them on the site. He shall inform the owner and all employed of any potential exposure to this material. B. At no time shall any product containing asbestos be incorporated into the work. 1. If asbestos materials are encountered, report to the owner. The owner will be responsible for asbestos removal. 1.14 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. This contractor shall provide at the conclusion of the project one clean, non -torn, neat, and legible "as -built' set of drawings to the owner. These drawings shall show the routing of pipes, ductwork and equipment drawn in at scaled locations. All dimensions indicated shall be referenced to a column line. A set of construction blue prints will be furnished for this work. B. All mechanical systems installed shall be shown on the "as -built' drawings. This includes all addendum items and change orders. C. Refer to respective architectural specification section for additional information. D. This contractor shall update these drawings during the project at least every week. 1.15 REVIEW OF MATERIALS A. This contractor shall submit to the engineer for review One (1) electronic copy of a brochure giving a complete list of materials and equipment he proposes to furnish. The brochure shall contain complete information as to the make of equipment, type, size, capacities, dimensions and illustration. One of these returned copies shall be kept on the job at all times. B. Checking of submittal drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings and for their conformity to drawings and specifications unless he notifies engineer in writing of such deviation at time such drawings are furnished. C. All submittals shall have the date marked on them when the contractor receives them from the supplier. Submittals shall be submitted through the contractor and shall not come direct from the supplier to the architect or engineer. D. This contractor shall mark the date and sign each set that he has checked each of them in their entirety before submitting to the engineer. Submittals that are not dated and signed by the contractor will not be accepted, or checked and will be marked "resubmit' and sent back to the contractor. 1.16 TEST OF SYSTEMS A. This contractor, before concealed, shall test all systems installed under this contract as called for in these specifications and as required by local codes. Tests shall be made in the presence of the engineer, local authorities or their duly authorized representative. Any defects discovered in testing shall be corrected and the tests repeated until all defects are eliminated. k B. ,` This contractor shall be held responsible for all damage resulting from defects in the system. C. --At the loonclusion of construction (before any covering up, painting or finishing) each element of Jhe system shall be thoroughly tested against leakage, with appropriate pressure tests, as outlined herein and in appropriate sections of the specifications. All testing shall be hydrostatic unless permission is granted otherwise. BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0050 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 D. After completion of installation, the systems shall be given tests under full operating conditions and pressures and all adjustments shall be made to make the system operative as required. All safety devices shall be tested for correct operation. 1.17 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work shall be performed by well-qualified and licensed mechanics with a thorough knowledge of the various systems involved in this building. It shall be this contractor's responsibility to see that his mechanics are familiar with all the various codes and tests applicable to this work. B. All equipment shall be new and of the type as specified by the engineer unless otherwise noted in these specifications or on the drawings to remain and or be reused. C. The intent of the drawings and specifications is for complete installation of the systems outlined in the drawings and specifications so that at the conclusion of construction the system will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe and efficient operation. D. This contractor shall be required to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which, while not mentioned directly herein or on the drawings are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished'bn quality installation of this type. The drawings and specifications cannot deal individually with the many minute items that may be required by the nature of the systems. E. If there is a discrepancy between the drawings and the specifications or wi i either document, the more stringent requirement shall be estimated unless broai the engineer's attention and an addendum is issued for clarification. 1.18 VERIFICATION OF ELEVATION OF EXISTING LINES A. This contractor shall before starting any new work, verify the elevations of all existing piping to which he must connect under this contract. He shall report any discrepancies between drawing elevations and actual elevations to the engineer before proceeding with the work. Failure of the contractor to do so shall make him liable for the cost of extra work involved. 1.19 DAILY HOUSEKEEPING A. At the end of each working day, this contractor shall remove all of his debris, rubbish, tools and surplus materials from the project work area. The work area shall be broom clean and left in a neat and orderly condition. The contractor for the removal of debris from the project shall not use the owner's waste disposal facility. B. At end of construction, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition as far as this contractor's work is concerned. 1.20 CLEANING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. This contractor shall clean all piping systems by flushing with water until free from all sand, grit, gravel, oil, etc. B. Where connections are made to existing piping systems, this contractor shall provide isolation valves, threaded tees, etc., as required to facilitate the cleaning and testing of all new piping. C. This contractor shall thoroughly clean all rust, grease, plaster, cement, etc., from all equipment and piping furnished and installed by him as required to leave surfaces suitable for finish painting. D. This contractor shall keep all pipes, traps, waste lines, ducts, etc., plugged, drained or otherwise protected during construction. All items of mechanical equipment shall be suitably protected and upon completion of project shall be equal to new condition. BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0050 -PAGE 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1.21 ALTERNATES A. Refer to General Specification Sections for alternate bid description. 1.22 DIGITAL MEDIAAGREEMENT A. Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) documents maybe available to the contractor for some uses. Contact the engineer prior to bidding to determine what information is available to be transmitted to the contractor in digital form. B. When documents are determined to be available, and as requested by the contractor, they will be transmitted upon the completion and execution of the MODUSdigital media agreement. A service fee for each document transmitted will be assessed to the contractor_ Documents will be transmitted upon payment receipt. Current service fee is $100.00 per CAD sheet. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0050 - PAGE 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT �3 PART 1GENERAL - 7.01 SECTION INCLUDES `- A. Nameplates. B. Labels. r; 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color -coding for mechanical identification. B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. 12046 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves, include valve tag numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.02 LABELS A. Description: Laminated Mylar, size 1.9" x 0.75" adhesive backed with printed identification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. De -grease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. Apply paint primer before applying labels.for unfinished canvas covering. D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction. Identify on both sides of any wall. E. Conform to owner's existing identification scheme. Verify with owner prior to bid. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES � A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 REFERENCES 7' L� A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance- B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers. C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 12046 D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing. Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. C. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance. G. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance Forms. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of flow measuring stations, balancing valve, and rough setting. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Balancing shall be done by the mechanical contractor, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor. 1.07 SEQUENCING A_ Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before substantial completion of project. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions - 1 . onditions:1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. Z. - Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 3F.__' Final-Jiiters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters: 4'. ? D,uctsystems are clean of debris. 5. Fans are rotating correctly. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 7.. Aii outlets are installed and connected. $ Ductsystem leakage is minimized. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services that pr6vents system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to the engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within +/- 5% of design for supply systems and +/- 10% of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within + 10% and - 5% of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within +/- 10% of design. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 -PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the owner. F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. C. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. D Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent those adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Affect the volume control by duct internal devices (such as dampers and splitters). E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. F- Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. G. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. Fans 2. Air Filters - 3. Air Inlets and Outlets B. Report Forms -- 1. Title Page: C7 a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency - c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project Name e. Project Location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project Altitude j. Report Date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of system. c. Description of systems operation sequence. d. Summary of out door and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization. e. Nomenclature used throughout report. f. Test conditions. 3. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 -PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure I, Sheave Make/Size/Bore j- Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM END OF SECTION r--, r- 12046 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 23 3100 12046 HVAC DUCTS AND CASING; PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductwork fabrication B. Manufactured ductwork and fittings._-- C;c.. 1.02 RELATEDSECTIONS _ A. Specification Section 23 0593- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC B. Specification Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation. C. Specification Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories. D. Specification Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality. E ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. F. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. G. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. W ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled. L ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. J. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. K. NBS PS 15 - Voluntary Product Standard for Custom Contact -Molded Reinforced -Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment. L. NFPA 91 - Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal or Conveying. M. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. O. UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. HVAC DUCTS AND CASING 23 3100 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.05 SUBMITTALS 12046 A. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gauges, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for four inch (4") pressure class and higher and kitchen hood exhaust systems. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, and duct connectors. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Maintain are copy of document on site. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three -years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three -years experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A, Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A Standards. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws_ C. Sealant: Nan -hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape. D. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36, steel, galvanized: threaded both ends, threaded one end. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing and sealing for operating pressures indicated. c,r B. `66rease-duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever possible: mZiximum 30 degree divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degree convergence t downstream. ti r` HVAC DUCTS AND CASING " 23 3100 -PAGE 2 CV SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with fiberglass insulation. D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gauges heavier than duct gauges indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum four inch (4") cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs or 90 degree conical tee takeoffs. F. Fabricate all exposed ductwork using paint grip galvanized sheet metal. 2.03 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for 0 rating pressures indicated. c' PART 3 EXECUTION r 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Sland ards-- Metal" and Flexible. C. All ductwork shall be sealed to provide a SMACNA Seal Class A installation for all londit6dinal seams, all transverse seams and all duct penetrations. Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25 and smoke developed shall not exceed 50 when tested in compliance with ASTM -E-84-87. D. Sealant shall be non -hardening and water resistant. Sealant shall be capable of being applied with a brush and shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each seam or penetration shall be dressed after application of sealant for neat appearance. E. Ductwork shall be installed following essentially lines indicated on the drawings. Install offsets, and angles. Transitions may be required to avoid interference with other work and existing conditions. Maintain full capacity of ductwork. F. Duct Sealant Manufacturers: 3M Engineer approved equal. G. Duct sizes are net outside dimensions. Maintain outside sizes for lined ducts. Do not increase duct dimensions. H. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. I. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. J. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes eight inch (8") and smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. K. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. HVAC DUCTS AND CASING 23 3100 -PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 L. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with five foot (5') maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. M. Set plenum doors six inch (6") to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swing so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. N. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. O. All joints in rectangular rigid round or oval ductwork that exceeds 100 inches in perimeter length shall be made with the "Ductmate Industries' flanged and caulked joint system. 3.02 SCHEDULES DUCTWORK MATERIAL AIR SYSTEM Low Pressure Supply Return and Relief General Exhaust Outside Air Intake MATERIAL Galvanized Steel Concrete, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Galvanized Steel Galvanized Steel Fiber Reinforced Plastic Reinforced Plastic Galvanized Steel DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Supply 2" Return and Relief 1" General Exhaust 1" Outside Air Intake 1/2" END OF SECTION HVAC DUCTS AND CASING 23 3100 - PAGE 4 t.� HVAC DUCTS AND CASING 23 3100 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES c A. Inline Exhaust Fan i' r 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 23 3100- HVAC Ducts and Casings. B. Specification Section 23 3300 -Air Duct Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES — A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. D. AMCA 300 -Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. E. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. F. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. G. UL 705 - Power Ventilators. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 12046 A. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INLINE EXHAUST FAN A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Carnes 3. Penn Ventilators 4. Cook 5. Twin City Fan 6. Engineer approved equal. B. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal-, constructed of aluminum direct drive, fan shaft to include anti -corrosive coating. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Motor: resilient mounting, electronically commutated, speed controlled by 0-10V signal; permanently lubricated. D. Housing: Constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with integral duct collars. Provide 112" neoprene insulation liner for sound attenuation. E. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non -fusible in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted. F. Access Doors: Bolted to provide access for inspection and cleaning of fan wheel, located on both sides of housing. G. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. PART EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Inline Fans: 1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. 2. Install flexible connections between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. C. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. D. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. E. If equipment is to be operated prior to building turn over to the owner, the mechanical contractor must install filter media on all return and exhaust grilles. The contractor shall provide documentation that filters have been check on a daily basis. END OF SECTION HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 -PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 23 3700 12046 A. Manufacturers: 1. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Price Ind. A. Diffusers/registers/grilles. 6. Nator �a Engineer approved equal. B. Louvers. 1.02 REFERENCES > A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ARI 650 -Air Outlets and Inlets. ; D. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and li }ets. E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Review ceiling type and style before submitting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSERS/REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Carnes 3. Tuttle & Bailey 4. Price Ind. 5. Krueger 6. Nator 7. Engineer approved equal. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Refer to schedule on drawings for style, size, and finish. 2.02 LOUVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. American Warming 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Pottorff 5. Greenheck 6. Engineer approved equal. B. Type: Drainable blades on 37-112 degree slope, heavy channel frame bird screen with 112 inch square mesh for exhaust and 314 inch for intake. (See drawings). C. Fabrication: Extruded aluminum, 0.080 inch thick welded assembly with factory anodized finish. Color to be selected by architect. Architect has authority to select multiple colors. D. Mounting: Furnish with exterior flat flange for installation. Verify with architect prior to ordering. E. Interior louvers shall be constructed of .125 inch thickness with welded construction. F. Refer to drawings for louver dimensions. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position and type to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C, Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. See drawings. END OF SECTION AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS =' 7 PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Electrical Division Specification Sections. B. Division 26 Specification requirements also include, by reference, all "common "specification sections, Notices, Advertisements, Instructions to Bidders, Proposals and General Conditions. This contractor is responsible to review these specification sections. Requirements of these specification sections are included as a part of this contract. C. Division 26 Specification requirements also include, by reference, all Division 1 - General Requirements specification requirements.. Requirements of these specification sections are included as a part of this contract. 1.02 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The owner will not occupy the premises during the construction period. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. This contractor shall give proper authorities all requisite notices relating to work in his charge, obtain official permits, licenses for temporary construction and pay proper fees for it. B. This contractor is to be solely answerable for and shall promptly make good all damage, injury or delay to other contractors, to neighboring premises or to persons or property of the public by himself, by his employees or through any operation under his charge, whether in the contract or extra work. C. No attempt has been made to reproduce in these specifications any of the rules or regulations contained in city, state or federal ordinances and codes pertaining to the work covered by these specifications that the contractor be thoroughly familiar with all such ordinances and codes. D. The fact that said various rules, regulations and ordinances are not repeated in this specification does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of making the entire installation in accordance with the requirement of those authorities having jurisdiction. E. All work shall comply with the applicable recommendations of: 1. The National Board of Fire Underwriters 2. The ANSI-NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. The Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 5. IBC Building Code (current) and any current applicable city building and or electrical codes. 6. Fire Protection: Conform to UFC and NFPA. F. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. G. Confrom to latest approved versions of codes. 1.04 PROJECTISITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on drawings unless prevented by project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of owner and architect/engineer before proceeding. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0050 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. This contractor, before submitting his bid, shall visit the site of the project to familiarize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work. D. It is the intent of this specification that the contractor furnish all labor and material required to complete the installation as outlined in the drawings and specifications. No additions to the contract price will be allowed due to the failure of this contractor to properly evaluate the effect of existing conditions on the work to be done under this contract. E. This contractor shall provide, as necessary, for the installation of his work and in accordance with materials other than the structure. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. This contractor shall arrange his work in order that it progresses along with the general construction of the building. B. This contractor shall be kept informed as to the work of other trades engaged in the project and shall execute his work in such a manner so as not to delay or interfere with progress of other contractors. C. Where space for mechanical and electrical lines and piping is limited, it is imperative that all such trades coordinate their work so as to insure concealment in space provided. Where conflict exists, the engineer shall decide priority of space. If work is not properly coordinated, the engineer may require removal and relocation of work without additional compensation. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all of the apparatus, materials, equipment furnished, and labor installed under this contract for a period of one year after date of final acceptance, unless a longer period is specified. B. Neither final certificate of payment nor any provisions in the contract documents nor partial or complete occupancy of premises by owner shall constitute an acceptance for work not done in accordance with contract documents or relieve the contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. C. Should any defects arise as the result of defective workmanship or material within the guarantee period set forth, this contractor shall make the necessary correction at his own expense. 1.07 ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL PRODUCTS A. When the engineer, at the request of the interested parties, including the contractor, supplier and manufacturer approved "engineer approved equal" products for this project, such products are approved on the assumption that they will equal or exceed the performance of the products specified. B. If such products do not do so after being installed on this project, this contractor shall replace or modify the particular product as necessary to equal the performance of the products specified at no expense to the owner, architect or engineer. C. Request for "engineer approved equal" products shall be received by the architect/engineer prior tb the last addendum being issued. Requests for substitutions received after this date will not 6e-,consiitered. Substitution requests shall clearly state which products are being considered for substitution. Substitution requests shall include all pertinent product information needed to evaluate the substitution as an "equal". D. Similar products shall be all of the same manufacturers and style. There is no exception to this rfnless prCor approval has been granted from engineer. [J BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0050 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.08 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE 12046 A. Protect any building openings from unauthorized entry. Coordinate with owner where building entry must be controlled. 1.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of his work. 1.10 CLEANING AND RUBBISH A. This contractor, upon completion of his work, shall remove all rubbish and debris resulting from his operation and shall remove it from site at his own expense. B. As far as his work is concerned, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition. C. This contractor shall maintain the work area each day to prevent hazardous accumulation of waste from his work. 1.11 SEALING AND PENETRATION A. Clearance around the piping passing through fire or smoke rated construction shall be sealed to maintain the rated integrity of the construction (1 hr. 2 hrs. etc.). One and two-hour rated assemblies are to be patched on both sides of the assembly. B. This contractor shall verify rating and location of all such construction with the architectural drawings and seal all penetrations. h (T:3 C. Manufacturer offering products to comply with the requirements include the foflowing; 1. Dow Corning "Silicone RTV Foam" 1=� 2. 3-M Corporation "Fire Barrier Caulk and Putty" 3. Thomas & Betts "Flame Safe Fire Stop System" D. Installation of these products are to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's r+' recommendations. E. This contractor shall submit shop drawings showing approved sealing asseriblies to be utilized on this project. 1.12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. This contractor shall mount and wire all magnetic starters, thermal protective switches, and speed changing switches furnished under the mechanical contract and install such starters and switches and wire them to their respective motors as a part of the electrical contract. B. All other magnetic starter switches, safety switches and speed control devices indicated on the electrical drawings or specifications are the responsibility of the electrical contractor to furnish and install. C. Unless specifically stated elsewhere, the wiring of the temperature control system shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0050 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1.13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. If the contractor stores any hazardous solvents or other materials on the site, he shall obtain copies of the safety data sheets for the materials and post them at the site. He shall inform the owner and all employed of any potential exposure to this material. B. At no time shall any product containing asbestos be incorporated into the work. 1. If asbestos materials are encountered, report to the owner. The owner will be responsible for asbestos removal. 1.14 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. This electrical contractor shall provide (at the conclusion of the project) one clean, non -torn, neat and legible "as -built" set of drawings to the owner. These drawings shall show the routing of conduit, wiring and equipment drawn in at scaled locations. All circuits shall be labeled and shall conform to labeled panel breakers. All dimensions indicated shall be referenced to a column line. A set of construction drawings will be furnished for this work. B. All electrical panels and electrical installed equipment shall be shown on the "as -built' drawings. C. Refer to General Specification Sections for additional requirements. D. This contractor shall update these drawings during the project at least once a week. 1.15 ALTERNATES A. Refer to description of alternate bids under General Specification Sections. 1.16 REVIEW OF MATERIALS A. This contractor shall submit to the engineer for review one (1) electronic copy giving a complete list of materials, fixtures, devices and panels he proposes to furnish. The submittal shall contain complete information as to the make of equipment, type, size, capacities, dimensions, and illustration. One copy shall be kept on the job at all times. B. Checking of submittal drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings and for their conformity to drawings and specifications unless he notifies engineer, in writing, of such deviation at time such drawings are furnished. C. All submittals shall have the date marked on them when the contractor receives them from the supplier. Submittals shall be submitted through the contractor and shall not come direct from the supplier to the architect or engineer. D. This contractor shall mark the date and sign each set. This indicates that each of them have been checked in their entirety before submitting to the engineer. Submittals that are not dated and signed by the contractor will not be accepted or checked and will be marked 'resubmit' and sent backtothe contractor. 1.17 TEST OF SYSTEMS A. This contractor shall, before concealed, test all systems installed under this contract as called far..in these specifications and as required by local codes. Tests shall be made in the presence of the'engir, eer, local authorities or their duly authorized representative. Any defects discovered s i6.testing shall be corrected and the tests repeated until all defects are eliminated. B. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damage resulting from defects in the system. C. Each individual feeder circuit shall be tested at the panel and in testing for insulation resistance to ground, the power equipment shall be connected for proper operation. In no case shall the insulation resistance to ground be less than that required by the National Electrical Code (NEC). BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0050 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.18 SCOPE OF WORK 12046 A. This contractor shall furnish all the labor and material necessary to install a complete electrical system for the building. The system shall include all items of work as outlined in these specifications and on the drawings. B. All work shall be performed by a well-qualified, licensed electrician with a thorough knowledge of the various systems involved in this building. It shall be this contractor's responsibility to see that his employees are familiar with all the various codes and tests applicable to this work. C. All equipment shall be new and of the type specified by the engineer unless otherwise noted in these specifications or on the drawings to remain and or be reused. D. The intent of the specifications and drawings is for complete installation of the systems outlined in the specifications and drawings so that at the conclusion of construction the system will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe and efficient operation. The specifications and drawings cannot deal individually with the many minute items that may be eventually required by the nature of the systems. E. This contractor is required to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which, while not mentioned directly herein or on the drawings are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installation of this type. F. This contractor, before proceeding with any work, shall review the architectural drawings. Any conflict between the electrical and architectural drawings shall be reported to the engineer for clarification. G. If there is a discrepancy between the drawings and the specifications or within either document, the more stringent requirement shall be estimated unless brought to the engineer's attention and an addendum is issued for clarification. C" 1.19 DAILY HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEANING _^ A. At the end of each workday, the contractor shall remove all of his debris, rubbish, tools`, a'nd surplus materials from the project work area. The work area shall be broom cleaned and left in a neat and orderly condition. The contractor shall not use the owner's waste disposal facility for the removal of debris from the project. B. At end of construction, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in -first class condition as far as this contractor's work is concerned. 1.20 UTILITY COMPANY A. Any fees by the utility company are to be billed directly to the owner. B. The contractor is required to assist the owner in the preparation of all utility company rebate forms that deal with equipment furnished and/or installed as a part of this contractor. 1.21 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Each contractor is responsible for their own individual trenching and backfilling unless otherwise noted in the drawings or addendum. B. All underground utilities, telephone conduit, etc shall be exactly located prior to digging. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damages caused by failure to do so. C. Any backfill shall be tamped and compacted to prevent future settling. The backfill shall be installed to a smooth and level grade and installed in accordance with local codes_ D. All excess dirt shall be cleared from the area and disposed of as directed by the owner BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 3Y4rFYin2_[el= SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 E. Refer to architectural specification sections for additional information. 1.22 TEMPORARYPOWER AND LIGHTING A. Temporary electrical power and lighting necessary for the construction process is the responsibility of the electrical contractor and shall be included in the base bid amount. 1.23 HAND DRYER (HD-1) A. Manufactured by World Dryer to include a 1/4 inch thick cast iron cover. Cover to be finished with porcelain enamel. Motor shall be of the universal type, 1/10 hp at 7500 rpm. Dryer shall deliver 7300 linear feet of air per minute. B. Hand dryers shall be activated by means of a push button control device. C. Timer shall be the mechanical, cam -operated type. D. Hand dryer shall be UL listed. E. Nozzle shall be fixed. F. Dryer shall be 120 volt, 2300 watt. G. Color shall be white. 1.24 DIGITAL MEDIA AGREEMENT A. Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) documents maybe available to the contractor for some uses. Contact the engineer prior to bidding to determine what information is available to be transmitted to the contractor in digital form. B. When documents are determined to be available, and as requested by the contractor, they will be transmitted upon the completion and execution of the MODUS digital media agreement. A service fee for each document transmitted will be assessed to the contractor. Documents will be transmitted upon payment receipt. Current service fee is $100.00 per CAD sheet. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION s k L-� BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0050 - PAGE 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1GENERAL i 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Building wire. B. Wiring connectors. 1.02 REFERENCES o 12046 A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. E. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Include wire and cable lengths within 10 foot of length shown. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required_ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Okanite 2. Bell/Hubbell #BICC 3. American Insulated Wire 4. General Cable ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 5. Southwire 6. United Copper Industries 7. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Insulated conductor wire. 1. All wire shall be stranded. 2. Provide solid wire pigtails at all wiring devices and lighting control devices. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. IKill R E. Insulation: NFPA 70, type #THHNITHWN-2. All cable installation procedures or sizing shall be based on 75 deg C temperature rating. 2.02 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Burney 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Thomas & Betts 2. Engineer approved equal. C.- Compression Connectors: 1. Burndy 2. ; Thomas & Betts 3.: Engineer approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3:01 EXAMINATION A;_'; Verify,that interior of building has been protected from weather. B`r Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway over two inch (2") in size or buried below grade before installing wire. 3.03 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type #THHNITHWN-2 insulation in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type #THHNITHWN-2 insulation in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, type #THHNITHWN-2 insulation in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type #THHN/THWN-2 insulation in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, type #THHNITHWN-2 insulation, in raceway. Use liquid -tight wiring methods. Use liquid -tight connections. ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 -PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 F. Underground Installations, Use only building wire, type #THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway. Use liquid -tight wiring methods. G. Interior Installations: Use only building wire, type #THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway. H. Use wiring methods indicated. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." C. Use stranded conductors for feeders and branch circuits larger than 12 AWG: D. Use conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. Only pre -manufactured fixture whips are allowed to be 14 AWG. E. Use #10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet._ F. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. G. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire #4 AWG and larger. H. Protect exposed cable from damage. I. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. J. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panel boards. K. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. L. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. M. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors. N. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, #6 AWG and larger. Tape non -insulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150% of insulation rating of conductor. O. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. P_ Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, #10 AWG and smaller. All connections in exterior hand holes shall have liquidtight connections. Q. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Specification Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. R. Do not install multi -wire branch circuits. No sharing of neutral shall be permitted. ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 12046 A. Perform field inspection and testing. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - PAGE 4 r•., 4, o LJ .� l'V END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ^' PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rod electrode and conductors. B. Mechanical connectors. C. Wire. D. Grounding well components. 1.02 SUMMARY 12046 A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to properly install a grounding system conductor in all new branch wiring and feeder installations, which shall be in full compliance with all applicable codes as accepted by the authorities having jurisdiction. The secondary distribution system shall include a grounding conductor in all raceways in addition to the return path of the metallic conduit. B. In general, all electrical equipment (metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards, etc.) shall be bonded together with a green insulated or bare copper system grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the NEC and local codes. The bonding conductor through the raceway system shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from panel grounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices. C, All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. The grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings. All grounding conductors that run with feeders in PVC conduit outside of building shall be bare only. D. Provide and install all grounding and bonding as required by the National Electrical Code (NEC) including but not limited to Article 800 of the NEC. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents to accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. B. Submit test results of each ground rod. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirementsof ANSI/NFPA 70- B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODE AND CONDUCTORS A. Material: Copper -clad steel. B. Diameter: 5/8 inch. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 -PAGE 1 k46y1J2=M k1 12046 C. Length: 10 feet (min). Increase number and/or lengths of ground rod electrodes as required to meet and achieve specified resistance. D. Maintain separation of not less than eight foot (8') and not more than 20 feet between ground rod electrodes. 2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. All grounding connectors shall be in accordance with UL 467 and UL listed for use with rods, conductors, reinforcing bars, etc., as appropriate. B. Connectors and devices used in the grounding systems shall be fabricated of copper or bronze materials, and properly applied for their intended use. All connectors and devices shall be compatible with the surfaces being bonded and shall not cause galvanic corrosion by dissimilar metals. C. Lugs: Substantial construction, of cast copper or bronze with "ground" (micro -flat) surfaces, twin clamp, and two -hole tongue equal to Burndy QQA Series. D, Grounding and Bonding Bushings: Malleable iron. 1. Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts b. Engineer approved equal. E. Piping Clamps. Burney GAR -TC Series with a two -hole compression terminal. F. Grounding Screw and Pigtail: Race #983. G. Building Structural Steel: Thompson #701 Series heavy duty bronze "C" clamp with two -bolt vise -grip cable clamp or equal. H. Mechanical lugs or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction boxes and panel cabinets. 2.03 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Sze to meet NFPA 70 requirements as a minimum. Increase size if called for on drawings or in ;hese specifications. C. tnsula(6d'THWN (or bare as noted elsewhere). 2.04 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS A. r Well "12"x12"x12" Eritech inspection well, Quazite box, or engineer approved equal. B. r-.UVelf '-Cnver: Bolt attachment, skid resistant with "GROUND" embossed on cover, suitable for 5Ldesigr aced traffic rating. Verify with engineer. C. Material: Polymer concrete with a minimum 10,0001b. load rating. D. Increase depth or size as required to provide proper access at installed location. PART EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. install grounding electrodes conductor, bonding conductors, ground rods, etc. with all required accessories. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 C. Grounding shall meet (or exceed as required to meet these specifications) all the requirements of the N.E.C., the NFPA, and applicable standards of IEEE. D. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the above applicable codes/standards or between this section of these specifications and other sections, then the most stringent or excessive requirement shall govern. Where there is an omission of a code/standard requirement in these specifications then the current code/standard requirements shall comply. E. Requirement in these specifications to complywith a specific code/standard article, etc. is not to be construed as deleting of requirements of other applicable codes/standards and their articles, etc. 3.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. All connections shall be exothermic welded unless otherwise noted herein. AIL -connections above grade and in accessible locations may be by exothermic clamping with klevices Ui listed as suitable for use except in locations where exothermic welding is specificallyspecified;in these specifications or called for on drawings. B. Each rod shall be die stamped with identification of manufacturer and rod length's'" C. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated and/or as called for in these specifidations. D. Ground Resistance: --- 1. Main Electrical Service: a. Grounding resistance measured at main service electrode system and shall not exceed 5 ohms. b. Other Locations 1) Resistance to ground of all non-current carrying metal parts shall not exceed 5 ohms measured at motors, panels, busses, cabinets, equipment racks, and other equipment. 2) Resistance called for above shall be maximum resistance of each ground electrode prior to connection to grounding electrode conductor. Where ground electrode system being measured consists of two or more ground rod electrodes then the resistance specified above shall be the maximum resistance with two or more rods connected together but not connected to the grounding electrode conductor. E. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground (specified ground resistance is for each ground rod location prior to connection to ground electrode conductor). 1. Provide grounding well with cover at each rod location. Install grounding well top flush with finished grade. 2. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3. Install ground rods not less than one foot (1') below grade level and not less than two feet (2') from structure foundation. 3.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR A. Conductor shall be sized to meet or exceed the requirements of NEC 250 to meet these specifications and/or drawings. 3.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be provided with every circuit to meet (or exceed as required to meet these specifications and/or drawings) the requirements of NEC 250. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. At every voltage level, new portions of the electrical power distribution system shall be grounded with a dedicated copper conductor, which extends from termination back to power source in supply panelboard. C. Provide separate, insulated (bare if with feeder in PVC conduit outside of building) conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug. D. Except as otherwise indicated, each feeder raceway on the load side of the service entrance shall contain a ground conductor sized as indicated and where not shown shall be sized to meet (or exceed as required) these specifications and/or drawings the requirements of NEC 250. The conductor shall be connected to the equipment grounding bus in switchboards and panelboards, to the grounding bus in all motor control centers, and as specified to lighting fixtures, motors, and other types of equipment and outlets. The ground shall be in addition to the metallic raceway and shall be properly connected thereto, using a lug device located within each item enclosure at the point of electric power connections to permit convenient inspection. E. Provide green insulated ground wire for all receptacles and for equipment of all voltages. In addition to grounding strap connection to metallic outlet boxes, a supplemental grounding wire and screw equal to Race No. 983 shall be provided to connect receptacle ground terminal to the box. F. All metallic surface raceway shall contain a green insulation ground conductor from supply panel ground bus connected to grounding screw on each receptacle in strip and to strip channel. Conductor shall be continuous. G. All motors, all heating coil assemblies, and all building equipment requiring flexible connections shall have a green grounding conductor properly connected to the frames and extending continuously inside conduit with circuit conductors to the supply source bus with accepted connectors regardless of conduit size or type. 3.05 MAIN ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Complete installation shall meet and exceed the requirements of the NEC 250. B. Artificial electrodes shall be provided for the main service in sufficient number and configuration to secure resistance specified. C.,Bond To All Of The Following When Available On Site: 1. Ground Rods. -:2. ; 'Metal Water Pipe (Interior and Exterior to Building) 3 Building Metal Frame, Structural Steel and/or Reinforced Structural Concrete 4.: "(}II,Piping Entering or Leaving All Buildings. --5. .Rwvide a main ground, bare copper conductor, sized per applicable table in NEC -2-59, but in no case less than #210, shall be run in conduit from the main switchgear -- bleach building to the building steel in each respective building. Reference NEC 20.104 (c). This ground conductor shall also be run individually from the main ` switchgear and be bonded to the main water service ahead of any union in pipe and must be metal pipe of length as acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide properly sized bonding shunt around water meter and/or dielectric unions in the water pipe. D. Ground/bond neutral per NEC 250. 3.06 LIGHT FIXTURES A. All new fixtures in building interior, and exterior fixtures shall be provided with green grounding conductor, solidly connected to unit. Individual fixture grounds shall be with lug to fixture body, generally located at point of electrical connection to the fixture unit. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. All suspended fixtures and those supplied through flexible metallic conduit shall have green ground conductor from outlet box to fixture. Cord connected fixtures shall contain a separate green ground conductor. ^• C. Installation shall exceed minimum requirements of NFPA 780. 3.07 MISCELLANEOUS GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. Provide bonding to meet regulatory requirements. B. Required connections to building steel shall be with UL accepted non-reversible c iinpiype ground lugs exothermically welded to bus bar that is either exothermically welded or bolted to steel in locations where weld will affect the structural properties of the steel. Required.._ connections to existing building structural steel purlins/i beams shall be with heavy duty bronze "C" clamp with two bolt vise -grip cable clamp. C. Grounding conductors shall be so installed as to permit shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground; be installed in conduit; be bonded to conduit at both ends when conduit is metal; have connections accessible for inspection; and made with accepted solderless connectors brazed or bolted to the equipment or to be grounded; in NO case be a current carrying conductor; have a green jacket unless it is bare copper; be run in conduit with power and branch circuit conductors. The main grounding electrode conductor shall be exothermically welded to ground rods, water pipe, and building steel_ D. All surfaces to which grounding connections are made shall be thoroughly cleaned to maximum conductive condition immediately before connections are made thereto. Metal rust proofing shall be removed at grounding contact surfaces, for 0 ohms by digital Vm. Exposed bare metal at the termination point shall be painted. E. All ground connections that are buried or in otherwise inaccessible locations, shall be welded exothermically. The weld shall provide a connection which shall not corrode or loosen and which shall be equal or larger in size than the conductors joined together. The connection shall have the same current carrying capacity as the largest conductor. F. Install ground bushings on all metal conduits entering enclosures where the continuity of grounding is broken between the conduit and enclosure (i.e. metal conduit stub -up into a motor control center enclosure or at ground bus bar). Provide an appropriately sized bond jumper from the ground bushing to the respective equipment ground bus or ground bus bar G. Install ground bushings on all metal conduits where the continuity of grounding is broken between the conduit and the electrical distribution system (i.e. metal conduit stub -up from wall cutlet box to ceiling space. Provide an appropriately sized bondjumper from the ground bushing to the respective equipment ground bus or ground bus bar. H. Each feeder metallic conduit shall be bonded at all discontinuities, including at switchboards and all sub distribution and branch circuit panels with conductors in accordance with applicable table in NEC 250 for parallel return with respective interior grounding conductor. I. Grounding provisions shall include double locknuts on all heavy wall conduits. J. Where reinforced concrete is utilized for building grounding system, proper reinforced bonding shall be provided to secure low resistance to earth with "thermite" type devices, and #10AWG wire ties shall be provided to not less than ten full length rebars that contact the connected rebar. 3.08 TESTING AND REPORTS A. Raceway Continuity: Metallic raceway system as a component of the facilities ground system shall be tested for electrical continuity. Resistance to ground throughout the system shall not exceed specified limits. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 -PAGE 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Ground resistance measurements shall be made on each system utilized in the project. The ground resistance measurements shall include building structural steel, driven grounding system, water pipe grounding system and other accepted systems as may be applicable. Ground resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather, not less than 24 hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from other grounds and equipment. Resistances measured shall not exceed specified limits. C. Upon completion of testing, the testing conditions and results shall be certified by the electrical contractor and submitted to the engineer. 3.09 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Interface with communications system installed under other specification sections. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation 13. Use suitable test instrument with current certificate of calibration to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall -of -potential method. END OF SECTION Celii119i•I�aaaI�7:I�Llt•]1►[�1Y�7:���xHI:�[�7�f��91�bL4 26 0526 - PAGE 6 i e,1 la; _ <a END OF SECTION Celii119i•I�aaaI�7:I�Llt•]1►[�1Y�7:���xHI:�[�7�f��91�bL4 26 0526 - PAGE 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES r, A. Product requirements. r, B. Formed steel channel. C. Indoor housekeeping pads.—:.- -- D. Outdoor housekeeping pads - 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). - -- cr B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data for fastening systems. 12046 B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of products. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes 1. Corrosion resistant. 2. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Anchors and Fasteners' 1. Concrete Structural Elements Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.02 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers - 1 . anufacturers:1. Globe Strut 2. Uni-Strut 3. Kindorf HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized steel. 2.03 INDOOR HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. This contractor shall provide and install four inch (4") high concrete housekeeping pads under all floor -mounted equipment he has supplied and/or installed. The housekeeping pads shall extend a minimum of six inch (6") beyond the largest dimensions of the equipment mounted on the pad. The housekeeping pads shall have wire mesh embedded in the pad to reinforce the structure. All edges shall be rounded with a 112 inch radius. 2.04 OUTDOOR HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. This contractor shall provide and install concrete pads under all electrical equipment installed outdoors. The pads shall be as detailed on the drawings unless indicated otherwise. This contractor shall install pads under all utility company supplied and installed transformers. The pad dimensions shall be detailed on the drawings unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A, Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and utility company regulations where applicable. B. Provide anchors, fasteners and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. 3. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. 4. Do not drill or cut structural members. C. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. D. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. E Use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch (1 ") off wall in all wet and damp locations. F. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. G. Reinforce outdoor concrete pads with 112 inch steel reinforcing bars on 12 inch centers or as shown on the drawings, c� a r, _.. r r' ea, END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYAND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit requirements B. Conduit types. l J ^'- C, Box types. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 7 C. A ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit. I a i c> ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. E. ANSI/NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 12046 F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electric Equipment. G. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. I. NECA(National Electrical Contractor's Association) Standard of Installation. J. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0543 - Underfloor Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than two inches. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS 12046 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to the site. B. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect products from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough in. C. Conduit routing is shown on the drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required completing the wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch for power wiring and 3/4 inch for low voltage wiring unless noted otherwise. B. Size conduit per ANSI/NFPA 70. C. Underground Installations: 1. Within Five Feet (5') from Foundation Wall Including Below Building Slab: Use rigid steel conduit or schedule 80 PVC conduit. 2. More Than Five Feet (5') from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or schedule 80 PVC conduit. 3. Provide rigid steel turn -ups to above grade. 4. Minimum Size: One inch. 5. Provide warning tape. D. Above Grade Outdoor Locations: Use rigid steel and aluminum conduit. Aluminum conduit shall not contact concrete mortar or block. E. Above Grade In or Under Slab: <-1 Use rigid steel conduit or schedule 80 PVC conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: Total of 50% of pour depth. 3 Minimum Size: One inch. _4; 'Provide rigid steel turn -ups above slab. F. `Wet an4�amp Locations: -•.. 1, 'U�` Igid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit. { Use :aluminum conduit and fitting in pool and pool equipment room. G. `Dry Locations: <_., c1'. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit. intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2.02 CONDUITTYPES A. Metal Conduit: RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. 4. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. �U B. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction. c, - a 2. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FB 1. ; C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: r 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Y 1. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1; steel compression type with steel lock nut, and ring or steel setscrew fittings. Install compression type fittings in all wet and damp areas. E. Pre -manufactured Fixture Whips: 1. Manufacturers: a. Southwire. b. EPCO. c. Engineer approved equal. 2. Description: UL listed flexible conduit with conductors and die-cast screw connectors on the end. 3. Size: no longer than 6', 3/8" diameter. 4. Wire: 14 AWG minimum for lighting and required by the load. 5. Install between junction box and light fixture only in concealed and unfinished spaces. Use interior raceway or surface raceway where exposed in finished spaces. F, Fittings and Conduit Bodies: 1. NEMA TC 3 2. Install offsets at surface boxes. 3. Install single hole strap connectors on all exposed conduit one inch (1") and smaller. 2.03 BOX TYPES A. Outlet Boxes: 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. a. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported. Include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. b. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete Type. 2. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, type #FD, cast alloy. Provide gasket cover by box manufacturer. B. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1 _ Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1 galvanized steel. 2. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, type #4 and #6, flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: a. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 3. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support conduit using coated steel, malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related conduit support using conduit rack_ Construct rack using steel channel and provide space on each for 25% additional conduits. E. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces. F. Do not support conduit with perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. G. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps for support H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 1 Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings, parallel and perpendicular to walls. L Route the conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. M. Do not cross conduits in slab. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degree F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter, de -burr cut ends. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R_ Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. S. Install no -more than the equivalent of three 90 -degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (as around beams)- Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than two inch (2") size. T. «Avoidmoisture traps, provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system_ U. Vrov de, citable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses - ^ ;,Qbntr61 and expansion joints. n V. `rovide'gbitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. W. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture X. Ground and bond all conduits. Y. Identify conduit. Z. Use flexible and liquidtight conduits where required by NEC AA. Flexible conduit up to six feet (6') in length can be used to connect mechanical equipment wiht motors, compressors, etc. AB. Flexible conduit length shall be limited to six feet (6') unless directed by the engineer. AC. Install insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves serving low voltage wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted. AD. Install grounded insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves serving data wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 -PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 AE. All low voltage conduits shall be sized to have less than 30% fill. Each penetration through a surface of any kind shall have a conduit sleeve with insulated bushings. AF. Junction boxes shall not be installed over four foot (4') above accessible ceiling prior written approval by owner. 3.02 BOX INSTALLATION r A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." - B. Install electrical boxes in locations as shown on the drawings and as requiredEforslic s, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirem'rtCs. , C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated. D. Electrical boxes are shown on the drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to ten foot (10') if required to accommodate intended purpose. -Verify with architectural drawings and elevations for additional information. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Junction boxes shall not be installed over four foot (4') above accessible ceilings. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than six inches (6") from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and back splashes. J. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on the drawings. If light fixture locations conflict with ceiling plans, the electrical contractor shall document discrepancies and send to the engineer for clarification. K. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. L. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in wall, provide minimum six inch (6") separation. O. Provide minimum 24 inch separation in acoustic rated walls. P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. O. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. R. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. S. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. T. Support boxes independently of conduit. U. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. V. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. W. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - PAGE 5 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 X. Large Pull Boxes: Use set screw enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. Y. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Z. Group devices associated with each other eight inches (8") on center (i.e. receptacle, data, voice outlet). AA. All floor mounted device locations shall have a dimensioned drawing from the Architect prior to installation. 3.03 SURFACERACEWAY A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide all trim and accessories. B. Use flat -head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level. C. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. D. Wire Way Supports: Provide steel channel. E. Close ends of wire way and unused conduit openings. F. Ground and bond raceway and wire way. G. Install surface metal raceway in exposed finished areas where indicated on the drawing. Coordinate all raceway routing with architect. H. Install insulated bushings on all Wiremold terminated above accessible areas serving low voltage wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A, Install conduit using materials and method to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. B. Piping and Ductwork: Route conduits through roof openings or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified. C. Coordinate installation of outlet and junction boxes for equipment connection. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.06 CLEiANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean imposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - PAGE 6 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART IGENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire markers. r, C. Underground warning tape. D. Identification. 1.02 REFERENCES -4Y' A. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS 12046 A. Product Data. Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. B. Samples: Submit two nameplates 4" x 4" in size illustrating materials and engraving quality. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAM EPLATESAND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic white letters on black background. B. Locations: 1. All electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. C. Letter Size - 1 . ize:1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations, and communication outlets. 2.02 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Tape feeders to indicate phases. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams. 2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Seaton 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Plastic four inch (4") wide tape, detectable type, colored RED with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines and inscribed "CAUTION - ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW". C. Location: Along length of each underground conduit. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify All Junction Boxes With Appropriate Marker As Follows: 1. 208 Volt System: Black (circuit name and number) B. Write the circuit number of each device inside the device box (not ON the device cover). All receptacles and light switches (new and existing) shall have the final circuit number installed on each device cover with a nylon label. Coordinate exact requirements with the owner prior to installation. C. Label all outlets and switches with an adhesive label identifying panel and circuit the device is energized by. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify conduit using field painting. E. Identify underground conduits or wiring using one underground warning tape per trench at three inch (3") below finished grade. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - PAGE 2 cti IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ca A. Light switches. B. Occupancy sensors. C. Wall face plates. ^r 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0533 -Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems B. Specification Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS 12046 A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.04 REFERENCES A. NECA- Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Dimensional Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors and configurations. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment specified in this specification shall be manufactured by one of the below listed companies unless specified elsewhere. Model numbers stated in this specification are for basis of design information only. 1. Light Switches: a. Pass & Seymour b. Hubbell c. Cooper LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM d. Lutron e. Engineer approved equals. 2. Occupancy Sensors: a. WattStopper b. Hubbell Building Automation c. SensorSwitch d. Engineer approved equals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHT SWITCHES 12046 A. Toggle Style: 1. Basis of Design: Pass & Seymour #PS20AC 2. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty, AC only general -use, toggle switch. 3. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 4. Provide two-way, three-way, four-way or lighted switch configurations as needed. Refer to drawings. 2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. See drawings for schedule: 1. Default device rating to be 20 amp. 2. Wire all per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Wire multiple sensors serving the same area to operate as a single unit. 4.,.; Provide and install power packs as required to obtain switching pattern shown on the drawings. 2.03 WALL FACERLATES A. Cover Plate; 1- - Basis pf Design: Pass & Seymour #SL (Metal), to be confirmed by architect. Provide cover plate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. B. Jumbo Cover Plate: .•1S Basis of Design: Pass & Seymour#SLO (Metal) to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide cover plate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. 3. Provide jumbo plates on masonry rough -in. Verify with architect prior to work being performed. PART 3 EXECUTION (RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR) 3.01 SAMPLES A. Upon request, electrical contractor is to provide a sample of any device specified in any available color. 3.02 COLOR A. All colors of devices, flanges, and faceplates shall be determined during the submittal process by the Architect. In the electrical bid, include any allowances needed to allow for selection of all cataloged colors. 3.03 OCCUPANCY SENSOR OVERSIGHT AND COMMISSIONING A. Supplier to verify layout of occupancy sensor devices during submittal process and all suggestions are to be brought to the engineer's attention immediately. B. Supplier is to give instructions to the electrical contractor for installation locations. Locations, shown on the drawings, are intended to provide device count for bidding, All placement must be per manufacturer's recommendations. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 END OF SECTION LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923 - PAGE 3 C. Supplier is to visit site, calibrate, and verify proper operation of all automatic occupancy devices at substantial completion of building. Coordinate this meeting with project engineer. D. Supplier is to visit site and confirm proper operation of all automatic occupancy devices one week after owner occupancy. Supplier shall make modifications and calibrations as needed. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Verify that boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.05 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. c , 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." c..j B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmer. c_, E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Install wall plates on switches in finished areas - G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. 3.07 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Specification Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems to obtain mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Before roughing in any floor devices the electrical contractor shall obtain a dimensioned drawing signed by the owner showing device locations. B. Install wall switch 48 inches on center above finished floor. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Branch circuit panelboards. 1.02 RELATEDSECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0526 B. Specification Section 26 0553 SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS Q Grounding and Bonding for Electrical System \T" Identification for Electrical Systems C. Specification Section 26 4313- Surge Protective Device 1.03 REFERENCES r� crn f�T C—] A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. C. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project record documents. D. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. E. It is the electrical contractors and suppliers responsibility to confirm the appropriate size and quantity of circuit breakers in the submitted panelboards with the information shown on the plan sheets, including the panelboard schedule, and the mechanical contractor prior to releasing the panelboards for construction. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. PANELBOARDS 26 2416 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 12046 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRANCH CIRCUIT PAN ELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. #NO or NF 2. General Electric 3. Eaton (Cutler -Hammer) 4. Siemens 5, Engineer approved equal. B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Service entrance rated Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: See schedule on the drawings. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AS 1, bolt -on or (plug -on) type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers with common trip handle for all poles, listed as type #SWD for lighting circuits. type #HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Provide arc fault circuit breakers in all dwelling units as required by NEC Code. Do NOT use tandem circuit breakers. Handle ties to make multiple pole breakers are NOT permitted. F. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK -5 fuse. Handle ties to make multiple pole breakers are NOT permitted. G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, type #1. H. Cabinet box is to be 6" D x 20" W for 240 volt and less panelboards. L c"uCabinetFront: Flush or surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal -dirt:ctory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. J. `' Door: •Provide hinged door -in -door trim. K.` 'Surge.Protection Device: Each 277/480V and 120/208V branch panelboard shall be equipped c -_.with a,.surge protection device within the panelboard enclosure. The surge protection device i_ sha1comply with Specification Section 26 4313. L.;::.'All parielboards 225 amp or less, are to have either intermediate supports on the bus bars to prevent deflection, or are required to have 800 amp/square inch bus bars if the bus bars are only supported at each end of the bus. PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 12046 A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation. B. Height is to be six feet (6') to top of the panelboard. Install panelboards taller than six feet (6) with bottom no more than four inch (4") above floor. C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Use actual room numbers and not plan room numbers. Coordinate with owner. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Typed circuit directories shall be completed in Microsoft Excel. The electrical contractor shall submit a CD with all directories included. E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Specification Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. F. Ground and bond the panelboard enclosure. G. Any panel field modifications and associated means and methods shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the equipment manufacturer. Any costs associated shall be included in the bid. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect in accordance with NETA ATS. B. Perform inspections listed in NETA ATS. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 26 2416 -PAGE 3 Q, PANELBOARDS 26 2416 -PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification grade receptacles. { B. Wall face plates. — C. Miscellaneous devices. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0533 -Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System B. Specification Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA- Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 -Dimensional Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors and configurations. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A_ All equipment specified in this specification shall be manufactured by one of the below listed companies unless specified elsewhere. Model numbers stated in this specification are for basis of design information only. 1. Pass & Seymour 2. Hubbell 3. Cooper 4. Engineer approved equals. WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPECIFICATION GRADE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle - Traditional Style: 1. Basis of Design: Pass & Seymour #5362 2. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 3. Hard use specification grade with back and side wiring. 4. Provide red devices where powered by a redundant power supply. B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Basis of Design: Pass & Seymour #2095 with LED indicator light. 2. Provide GFCI models where indicated. 3. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 4. Specification grade duplex GFCI. 5. Provide red devices where powered by a redundant power supply. 2.02 WALL FACE PLATES A. Cover Plate: 1. Basis of Design: Pass & Seymour#SL (Metal), to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide coverplate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. B. Jumbo Cover Plates: 1. Basis of Design: Pass & Seymour#SLO (Metal) to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide coverplate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. 3. Provide jumbo plates on masonry rough -in. Verify with architect prior to work being performed. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: 1. NEMA 3R "While -In -Use" weatherproof box and cover. Must meet NEC requirements for wet location covers. Provide with plate kits as required. Provide multi -gang or deep cover configurations as required for application. V11 PART EXECUTION 3.91' SAMPLES -' A. ,-U�por request, electrical contractor is to provide a sample of any device specified in any avail�bke:color. :3.02_ COLOR,`=-'•= A. ,Al colorTof devices, flanges, and faceplates shall be determined during the submittal process by the Architect. In the electrical bid, include any allowances needed to allow for selection of all cataloged colors. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install wall plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. G. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. Provide stainless steel cover plate in finished areas. L Install protective rings and split nozzles on active flush cover service fittings. 3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS Wrzro, A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Specification Section 26 0533 Raceway and Boxes to obtain mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Before roughing in any floor devices the electrical contractor shall obtain a dimensioned drawing signed by the owner showing device locations. B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inch on center above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle eight inch (8") on center above counter. (Refer to architectural and electrical drawings for additional information.) 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. Test with ground loop impedance tester. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - PAGE 3 J WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 2816 1.2046 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL LD 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Safety Switches. B. Motor -Rated Switches r" ' 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems ra 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007). B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (1 C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association, 2007. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. E. NECA- Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SAFETYSWITCHES A. Manufacturers 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Cutler -Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Engineer approved equal. B. Heavy duty safety switches shall be used for all motor loads over 1 HP and all non -motor loads 20 amps and greater - ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2816 - PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. a. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. b. Handle lockable in OFF position. 2. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. a. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1 . b. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. c. Enclosures shall be provided with a method of opening the cover without opening the switch. 3. Enclosure shall include a grounding bar. 2.02 MOTOR -RATED SWITCHES A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Cutler -Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Cooper-Bussmann 6. Engineer approved equal. B. Motor -rated switches may be used for all motor loads 1 HP and less and all non -motor loads under 20 amps. 1. Nonfusible Motor -Rated Switch (single-phase loads only) a. Basis of Design: Square D "FG2". b. Description: Fractional horsepower manual switch with melting alloy type thermal overload relay. C. Handle lockable in OFF position. d. For use with single-phase motors only. e. Provide and install thermal units sized per NEC 430. 2. Nonfusible Disconnect Switch - three phase loads: a. Basis of Design: Square D "KG2". b. Description: Fractional horsepower manual switch with melting alloy type thermal overload relay. c. Handle lockable in OFF position. d. For use with single or three phase motors. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. -laspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. C .Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.2. END OF SECTION c� ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2816 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING c PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES F c A- Ballasts. B. Lamps. ! ? 1.02 REFERENCES A ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps — Reflector Lamps -- Classification of Beam Patterns, 1994 (R 2003). 12046 B. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast; 2004. C. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High -Intensity -Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type), 2002. D. NECA/IESNA 500 - Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems, National Electrical Contractors Association; 1998, E. NECA/IESNA 502 - Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association, 1999. F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 2002. G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association: 2005, H. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2003. I. IESNA LM -79-08 - Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid -State Lighting Products. J. IESNA LM -80-08 - Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. K. IESNA TM -21-11 - Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. L. EU Directive 2002/95/1- Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (Rol as amended by directive 2005/618/EC. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide cut sheet indicating dimensions and components for each luminaire. B. Provide ballast schedule for all ballasts used. Include manufacturer's data sheet for each type of ballast. C. Provide lamp schedule for all lamps used. Include manufacturer's data sheet for each type of lamp. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 -PAGE 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and 101 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Products with Light Emitting Diodes: 1. Fixtures shall comply with LM -79-08: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid -State Lighting Products. 2. Interior fixture diode arrays shall maintain +/-100 degrees Kelvin (K); exterior fixture diode arrays shall maintain +/- 500 K color temperature range through the life of the fixture. 3. Diode arrays shall be wired so that if one diode fails, at least 90% of the remaining diodes will operate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BALLASTS A. T8 Fluorescent Ballast 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Optanium b. Osram/Sylvania c. Universal Lighting Technologies d. General Electric e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Ballast shall be "instant start". _3_ "Instant start" ballast shall provide Independent Lamp Operation (ILO) for allowing remaining lamp(s) to maintain full light output when one or more lamp fails. 4: Ballast shall contain auto re -start circuitry in order to re -start lamps without re -setting power. 5. Ballast shall operate from 50/60 Hz input source of 120 V through 277 V with sustained variations of +/-10% (voltage and frequency) with no damage to the ballast. 6. rBbila'st shall be high frequency electronic type and operate at a frequency above 42 kHz throilgh 52 kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems and eliminate visible flicker. ,:1. Ballast shall have a power factor greater than 0.98 for primary lamp. 8. Ballast Shall Have a Minimum Ballast Factor for Primary Lamp Application as Follows: a. 0.770.71 for low watt. b. 0.87 or 0.88 for normal light output. c. 1.18 for high light. 9. Ballast shall provide for a lamp current crest factor of 1.7 or less in accordance with lamp manufacturer recommendations. 10. Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10% when operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp. 11. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating for all four foot (4') lamps and smaller. 12. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -20 deg F or 0 deg F for standard T8 lamps and 60 deg F for energy -savings T8 lamps. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - PAGE 2 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 13. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage. 14. Ballast shall contain an anti -striations circuitry to prevent striations on energy -savings lamps. 15. The electronic ballast shall carry a five-year warranty from the date of manufacture against defects in material or workmanship, including replacement for operation at a maximum case temperature of 70 deg C. Ballasts with a 90 deg C designation in their catalog number shall also carry a three-year warranty at a maximum case temperature of 90 deg C. 2.02 LAMPS A. T8 and T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Philips Alto b. General Electric c. Osram/Sylvania d. Ushio e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Lamps shall have a rated average life of 20,000 hours (based on 3 -hour starts). 3. Lamps shall have a minimum color rendering index of 85. 4. Lamps are to be TCLP compliant — low mercury level. 5. All fluorescent lamps shall be by same manufacturer. 6. The design team shall select the color of all fluorescent lamps from the following options: a. 3000K b. 3500K c. 4100K d. 5000K r., PART EXECUTION — S 3.01 INSTALLATION C > A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Furnish products as specified in schedule on the drawings. C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. D. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required suspending luminaire at indicated height. E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling drawing and electrical lighting drawings. F. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. G. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. I. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. J. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as scheduled. K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 -PAGE 3 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM 12046 L. Fixture whips utilizing THHN/THWN-2 wire in flexible metal conduit shall be used to connect all luminaires, emergency lights, and exit signs. Minimum wire size for all fixture whips shall be 14 AWG. Fixture whips shall be wired directly from the luminaire to an accessible junction box. Fixture to fixture whips are not allowed. Maximum length for any fixture whip shall be 6'. M. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. N. Bond products and metal accessories to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor, O. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITYCONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean all electrical parts to remove all of the conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer, D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Re -lamp all failed lamp luminaires that have failed lamps within 6 months after the substantial complete date. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. See the drawings. END OF SECTION INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - PAGE 4 _ i J f`•J INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - PAGE 4 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM SECTION # 31 23 00 — EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES -� A. Backfill for structures. - C) B. Dewatering. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REMAINING BACKFILL A. Job -excavated material: 1. Material: Free from debris, stones larger than 1-1/2" , organic matter, and frozen material. 2. Use: All locations except where select backfill is required. 12046 B. Select backfill: 1. Material: Well -graded mineral particles with 100% passing 1-1/2" sieve and not over 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 2. Use: 2'-0" layer around foundation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING A. Construct sheeting, shoring, and where required to hold walls of excavation to protect existing utilities, trees, structures, and other similar features and to provide protection of employees. B. Soil excavations at other areas may be sloped as required to meet OSHA requirements. C. Design of sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be responsibility of Contractor and shall comply with OSHA requirements. 3.02 DEWATERING A. Execute Work in the dry. B. Provide equipment for handling water encountered. C. Do not pour concrete on excessively wet soil. D. Prevent surface water from flowing into excavation; promptly remove any water accumulated. E. Divert stream flow and/or sewage away from areas of construction. F. Do not discharge water pumped from excavations to existing sanitary sewers. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL SECTION # 31 23 00 - PAGE # 1 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM G. Methods used shall not cause settlement or damage to adjacent property. 3.03 BACKFILL OF STRUCTURES A. Notify Design Professional prior to backfilling. B. Backfill and compact as required. C. Backfill simultaneously on all sides. END OF SECTION END OF SECTION 12046 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL SECTION # 31 23 00 - PAGE # 2 Cwa END OF SECTION 12046 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL SECTION # 31 23 00 - PAGE # 2 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division of Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240.(319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 12-531 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON THE 8T" OF JANUARY, 2013 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Hickory Hill Park Restroom Project account # 4136. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 8th day of January, 2013, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 18th day of December , 20 12 ATTEST: /`lCC2e� zc� �C -.� ✓ CITY CLERK MAYOR Approved by City Attorney's Office 1;2 /-7)J 1— S\PNG\PW,Resolutions\Project Resolutions\Setting Public Hearing\Set Publle Hearing Project South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Project 12 18 2012.Aoc 12112 Resolution No. 12-531 Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: the Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Minis Payne Throgmorton NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY. IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Project in said City at 7 p.m. on the 81" day of January, 2013, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Coun- cil of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK S.ENGARCHITECTGRE F1LEW1.jWa%9outh Hickory All Safes Room PojjecllBid Dowmenls and FEMIA Rcvicw documentenph for Smnh Hickory All Park Safe Room Project doc ,V Trot 6 nom� Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 13-16 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE TO BIDDERS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Hickory Hill Park Restrooms account # 4136. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 2:30 p.m. on the 14th day of February, 2013. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 19th day of February, 2013, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 8th day of ATTEST: %)l -k CITY CLERK Sanua f 2013 Approved by City Attorney's Office t Zf f7ba, S'. 1ENGTMResolutionsTroject Resolubons%Accept Plans & Specs)Approve Plans & Specs. South Hickory Hill Park Safe Roam Project 01 08 13.doc 12112 Resolution No. Page 2 13-16 It was moved by Mims . and seconded by Dobyns the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Miens Payne Throgmorton Printer's Fee19-51 CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN FED,ID#42-00330)6770p being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN,a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): G6MSE�gl_r 7.OL�-- Legal rl. Subscribed and sworn to before me this .-21 day of A.D. 2o—L,?-- 01Notary NotaryPublic Gl..is LINpAKl -I Commission Number 73261y rt?' My Commission 6ipires January 27, 2014 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR SOUTH HICKORYL PAR AFE RSM o�JFCr--¶V'TTHE C[[ Z7- WA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Project in said City at 7 p.m. on the sin day of January, 2013, sold meeting to be held in the Emma J. Hallat Heflin City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall In Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con- cerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cast of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the Clty Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa aro as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK a.wr .+e,e veers December21,2012 NOTICE TO BIDDERS SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 230 P.M. on the 14th day of February, 2013. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 19" day of February, 2013, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. There will be a pre-bid meeting on Tuesday, January 22 n' at 10 a.m. in the Engineering Conference Room in City Hall, at 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa. The Project will involve the following: The construction of a single story structure, with ADA accessible restrooms and Saferoom facility at South Hickory Hill Park. Construction shall include, but will not be limited to: cast in place concrete walls, mechanical, electrical and plumbing, site paving, an asphalt trail and finished site grading. This project will be funded by HMESD Funding and FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CFR Section 13.36(i) are incorporated into the specifications, All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Neumann Monson Architects, of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1 ) year(s) from and after its com- pletion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: April 15,2013 Completion Date: July 31, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $ 400.00per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Technigraphics Inc 415 Highland Ave Suite 100 Iowa City Iowa 52240 319-354-5950 and 31-354-8973 ax by bona fide bidders. A $30.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics. The fee will be returned if the plans are returned in unmarked and reusable condition within 15 days of Council Award. A separate and nonrefundable $15.00 shipping and handling fee will apply to plans that are sent through postal mail. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK S'.IENGI RCHITECTURE FILES mleclsl5outh Hickory HAI Saf, Room P,opUVJ Oocumenls and FEMA Reviaw do .nlslnoliwe to UWJ,e SOUTH HICKORY HILL SAFEROOM PROJECT. NO OATES.Aoc Printer's Fee $_4C.._A9 CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN FED.ID#42-0330670 being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN,a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper tune( on the following date(s): i Legal Alt Subscribed and sworn to b re me this i5ill day- of A.D.20�• Notary Public LINDA11I Commission Number 732619 My Commission Expires or. • January 27. 2014 _.-. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an OFFICIAL PUBLICATION amount equal to one hundred per - NOTICE TO BIDDERS cent (100%) of the contract price, SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK said band to be issued by a SAFE ROOM PROJECT responsible surety approved by the Sealed proposals will be received City, and shall guarantee the by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and Clty, Iowa, until 2.90 PM. on the 14th day of February, 2013. Sealed save harmless the City from all proposals will be opened immedi- claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the ately thereafter bythe City Engineer operation of the contract, and shall or designee. Bids submitted by fax also guarantee the maintenance of machine shall not be deemed a the Improvement for a period of -sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after one M year(s) from and after its this deadline will be returned to the completion and formal acceptance bidder unopened. Proposals will be by the City Council. The following limitations shall acted upon by the City COuncil at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. apply to this Protect: Hamot Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 19th Specified Start Date: April 15,2013 Islas of February, 2013, or at a ape- Completion Date: July 31, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $ 400.00 per tial meeting called for that pur- day pose. There will be a pre-bid meeting on The plans, specifications and pro - posed contract documents may be Tuesday, January 22nd at 10 a.m. in the Engineering Conference examined at the office of the City Room in City Hall, at 410 East Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa blanks may be secured at the The Project will involve the follow- Office of Techniera h' Inc 415 ing' The construction of a single Highland Ave,Suite 100 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 319-354-5950 and story structure, with ADA acces- sible restrooms and Saferoom 31-354-6973 (fax), by bona fide facility at South Hickory Hill bidders. A$30.00 refundablefee is required Park. Construction shall include, for each set of plans and seacirds- but will not be limited to, cast In tions provided to bidders or other place concrete walls, mechani- cal, electrical and plumbing, elle Interested persons. The fee shall be paving, an asphalt trail and fin- in the form of a check, made pay- able to Technigraphics. The fee will ished site grading. This project will be funded by HMESD be returned if the plans are returned Funding and FEDERAL in unmarked and reusable condi- tion within 15 days of Council CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CER Award. A separate and nonrefund- Seclion 13.36(i) are incorporat- able $15.00 shipping and handling ed into the specifications, fee will apply to plans that are sent All work is to be done in strict through postal mail. Prospective bidders are advised compliance with She plans and by that the City of Iowa City desires to specifications prepared Neumann Menson Architects, of employ minority contractors and Iowa City, Iowa, which have hereto- subcontractors on City projects. A fore been approved by the City listing of minority contractors can Council, and are on file for public be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic examination in the Office ofthe City Development at (515) 242-4721 Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed and the Iowa Department of on a form furnished by the City and Transportation Contracts Office at must be accompanied In a sealed (615) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid Proposal the names of persons, bond executed by a corporation firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of subcontract. This list shall include 10% of the bid. The bid security the type of work and approximate shall be made payable to the subcontract amount(s). TREASURER OF THE GIN OF The Contractor awarded the con - IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be tract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder subcontractors, together with fails to enter into a contract within quantities, unit prices and extend - ten (10) calendar days of the City ed dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City preference must be given to prod - ensuring the faithful performance ucts and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, M the contract and maintenance of and to Iowa domestic labor, to the said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and extent lawfully required under Iowa the other contract documents. Bid Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resi- bonds of the lowest two or more dent bidder preference law applies bidders may be retained for a peri- to this Project. The City reserves the right to od of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days fallowing award of reject any oral) proposals, and also the contract, or until rejection Is reserves the right to waive techni- made, Other bid bonds will be calities and irregularities. Published upon order of the Cry returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and Council of Iowa City, Iowa. reported to the City Council. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Fce0000 lax January 14, 2013 f c� Prepared by Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 1 3-45 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN' AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT. WHEREAS, City Construction Group LC of Iowa City, Iowa has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $258,758.00 for construction of the above-named project; and WHEREAS, the bid includes the base bid and Alternates #1 and #5; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Hickory Hill Park Restroom Project account # 4136. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1 The contract for the construction of the above-named project for the base bid plus Alternates #1 and # 5 is hereby awarded to City Construction Group LC, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Director of Parks and Recreation is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Passed and approved this 19th day of February 20 11 ATTEST: ,J e, -ez2Lr% IT LERK Approved by City Attorney's Office It was moved by Payne and seconded by n1 k uc the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT, X Champion X Dickens X Dobyns X Hayek X Mims x Payne X Throgmorton s:`,ENGRWWasolunnns\pmJesA Resom uonswwara OontreWS.Oh He,., Mnl se Is Raom P'.e nae red+.ve-02142013.a 0219 2013 Res aIueon m AwaN Ccnlmodac FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and City Construction Group, L.C. ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 17`" day of December, 2013 for the SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM PROJECT ("Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers 1 & 2; b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction' AIA DOC A201-2007, as amended; C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; - e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond; -- h. Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects; I. Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements); j. FEDERAL CONTRACT CLAUSE REQUIREMENTS- 44 CFR Section 13.36(i) k. Proposal and Bid Documents; and I. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -0 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are shown as "ATTACHMENT A." Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 4. Project to be substantially complete by July 31, 2013. 5. The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of. Two hundred fifty-seven thousand and eight hundred Dollars and seventy Cents 257,800.7.0). City will also award Alternates #1 and #5 as listed below: Alternate #1: Provide and Install LED Lighting, in the amount of: nine hundred and eighty -five -Dollars and 001100 Cents 985.00 Alternate #5: Provide and Install Automatic Door Lock system on timer, in the amount of: Zero Dollars and 001100 Cents 0.00 For a Total contract amount of: Two hundred fifty eight thousand and seven hundred and eighty five Dollars and 761100 Cents ($258,785.70). 6. DATED this 19"' day of February, 2013 [DATE BASED ON FORMAL COUNCIL MEETING AWARDING CONTRACT BY RESOLUTION NUMBER 13-451 Ci 'I (Signature) (Printed name) Mayor ATTEST: City Clerk AG -1 iitie) C ATTEST,, -1Y S iA--, `�Ilr.��/��' (Title) �� U (Company Official) Approved By: �14f.g City Attorney's Office CONTACTS I SUBCONTRACTORS I SUPPLIERS Hickory Hill Park Safe Room ATTACHMENT"A" City Construction Group, LC Section I Description Firm Approximate Contract 03 3000 Reinforcing Supplier Construction Materials $9,500 03 3000 Form Liner Supplier Karlson Forming Specialties $6,800 07 1400 Waterproofing Empire Construction Group, LLC $5,500 07 9005 Joint Sealers 07 1900 Water Repellant Sparkle Wash $4,100 07 6100 Sheet Metal/RcofingASI Custom Sheet Metal $11,100 D8 1113 Door Supplier Opening Specialists, Inc. $19,600 08 7100 Door Supplier 08 8613 Fema Glazing Dubuque Glass $7,500 Div 22 Plumbing Professional Plumbing Service $27,600 Div 23 HVAC S & S Plumbing and Heating Div 26 & 28 Electrical Miller Electric $12,900 Div 31 Lynch's Excavating $14,200 Div 32 Asphalt Pate Asphalt $4,100 Page 1 of 1 ENGINEER'S REPORT April 21, 2014 City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa Re: South Hickory Hill Safe Room Project Dear City Clerk b h STA CITYAML CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washingron Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-1826 (319) 356-5000 (319) 356-5009 FAX www.icgov.org I hereby certify that the construction of South Hickory Hill Safe Room Project has been completed by City Construction Group LC of Iowa City, Iowa in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications prepared by Neumann Monson Architects. The project was bid as a lump sum contract and the final contract price is $ 259,324.70 There were change or extra work orders for the project as described below by project area: 1. Submittal Exchange $1,736.00 Credit 2. Door Hardware Change $1,435.00 Credit 3. 40' of HMA Trail $2,047.00 Add 4. Replace existing meter socket $376.00 Add 5. Anti -graffiti Coating $575.00 Add TOTAL Additional Costs to Original Contract $ 539.00 I recommend that the above -referenced improvements be accepted by the City of Iowa City. Sincerely, _7 4v-= Ronald R. Knoche, P.E. City Engineer pwenglmassWenginsele letter south hickory hill safercom project- accepting 05 06 2014. doc 4d(10) Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 14-118 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE SOUTH HICKORY HILL SAFE ROOM PROJECT WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the South Hickory Hill Safe Room Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and City Construction Group LC of Iowa City, Iowa, dated February 19, 2013, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Hickory Hill Park Restroom Project account # 4136; and, WHEREAS, the final contract price is $ 259,324.70 NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 6th day of ATTEST: AtGrez , CITY IMERK 201_. MAYOR g Approved by Awl A{�tC City Attorney's Office It was moved by trims and seconded by Dobyns the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Botchway x Dickens x Dobyns x Hayek x Mims x Payne x Throgmorton SAENGARCHITECTURE FILDProjectslSouth HickoryHill Safe Room Project\Close out documantslSowh Hickory Hill Safe Room Project -accepting project doc 4114 D r VICINITY MAPS CA OLINEAVL CAROLINE CT F w CAROLINE = a /S� DR RD 3 z w 0 a _ _ = r V) z ¢ J o w g KIMBALL v~i U AVE � m �1 N On 1— to BLOOMINGTON z GENERAL NOTES S-101 o J a w z MAIN SECTION S-501 � F > h MAYFIELD RD m A-501 N a N N a Q W MECHANICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES g LU > W LD o w a w o W U Whq X 2� z J Z� QGF' 00 tJ DODGE ST CT C EDAR ST / . PLEASANT ST ST ROCHESTER AVE W 'Jw LJ Q� U > HOTZ AVE m: a zo 0-1 Do o of E WASHINGTON' JQ w � a _LEGE South Hickory H'111 Park Safe Room PROJECT LOCTATION Q� n ti O a U p N a- a3 a a vm v PL GO HICKORY TRAIL RAIL a -3- m = O� n A O m m � m \_� o o of o O O 3 TUDOR u' OR A 2 WINDSOR z 56 Z 0 CT Of N 41 00 O > W O a a ROCHESTER CT V) T ON O Q� RIDGEWAY DR HEATHER HEATHER c� C C I J W � o N� p V=i GLENOALE o w AZ a J J a a of WASHINGTON ST w z w HEATHER of o 0 r MORNI NGSI pF 'r `G\O� ) A S. 011111111111111, Lu. • 090tz ;c> t= z. NOS'=1NV(l .z_ �. d moi• .•�%$ I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. &,,� G Siignc:ure / s, ? Da;c Registration expires: 12 — 3r — ZL 3 ec Pages neer covered by this seal: s zoo s v o �HIGH ST S`T <qo W Q B > _ a A �Q sr Fel e�pSNiP C ST TFa ' ;7 71 - .a� GENERAL NOTES S-101 O S-201 w ut '�cG MAIN SECTION S-501 DETAILS F > z O � DR MAYFIELD RD J Gr P/ A-501 t� N N N 3 Q W MECHANICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES ST LU > W LD o w a w o COURT a UO w � a � CRES7IA FRIENDSHIP ST oo N MAPLE ST 41L I s C, w a w > GRAN > CT n O J O Of z to N U ST O CENTER AVE SEYMOUR AVE 011111111111111, Lu. • 090tz ;c> t= z. NOS'=1NV(l .z_ �. d moi• .•�%$ I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. &,,� G Siignc:ure / s, ? Da;c Registration expires: 12 — 3r — ZL 3 ec Pages neer covered by this seal: s zoo s v o �HIGH ST S`T <qo W Q B > _ a A �Q sr Fel e�pSNiP C ST TFa ' ;7 71 - .a� t hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Inwn. '%2Lf.tJ /7 ��Q Siynature ate Registration expires: 1,2/31120x1 Pages Peers covcrce by 'Pis sect: IOWA CITY, IA I hereby certify that the portion of this technical ,,,1ttttrrrrrr, submission described herein was prepared by me or le �o``�pFESSIpNq am under a dulydirect lcensedsupervision fessionall Engineerbundeathe laws �� Q ' • of the State of Iowa. F y�. ADRIAN L. 'yam HOLMES :o 12�I t��o12 ! 17935 �.- Registration expires: 1./0:/1013 / ,,��j * • " - • •*��,,,` Pages or sheets coverer by this seal: G /OMIA����.o• I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or .tttlr<< under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I `��(QHER p ......... Q am a duly registered Architect under the laws of the Pi State or [own. lbtATf CSL C R STOPHER P. DeGR00T =coif• i0- 03867 ' 1= -. (f_ -14 -12 � 5 arae i ��0 •• ` Registrnlion expire=_. J'iJC 3UZ 2df¢ i�''�••••%L�ifA .:�`� P.:ges sneer: adv. nr 'Ips sen: �7 -01:21 C'T - GYJZ A 201 -•hof J INDEX OF DRAWINGS SPECS 1 SEALS PAGE - SPECS GENERAL INFORMATION DRAWINGS G-001 TITLE SHEET, & SHEET INDEX G-002 FEMA DESIGN INFORMATION DATA CIVIL DRAWINGS C-101 CIVIL PLAN STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S-001 GENERAL NOTES S-101 O S-201 ELEVATIONS S-301 MAIN SECTION S-501 DETAILS F > z O � DR MAYFIELD RD z A-501 WALL SECTIONS, DETAILS, & SCHEDULES z DRAWINGS ME000 3 COURT MECHANICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS LU > W LD o w a w o a g w � a � CRES7IA FRIENDSHIP ST t hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Inwn. '%2Lf.tJ /7 ��Q Siynature ate Registration expires: 1,2/31120x1 Pages Peers covcrce by 'Pis sect: IOWA CITY, IA I hereby certify that the portion of this technical ,,,1ttttrrrrrr, submission described herein was prepared by me or le �o``�pFESSIpNq am under a dulydirect lcensedsupervision fessionall Engineerbundeathe laws �� Q ' • of the State of Iowa. F y�. ADRIAN L. 'yam HOLMES :o 12�I t��o12 ! 17935 �.- Registration expires: 1./0:/1013 / ,,��j * • " - • •*��,,,` Pages or sheets coverer by this seal: G /OMIA����.o• I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or .tttlr<< under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I `��(QHER p ......... Q am a duly registered Architect under the laws of the Pi State or [own. lbtATf CSL C R STOPHER P. DeGR00T =coif• i0- 03867 ' 1= -. (f_ -14 -12 � 5 arae i ��0 •• ` Registrnlion expire=_. J'iJC 3UZ 2df¢ i�''�••••%L�ifA .:�`� P.:ges sneer: adv. nr 'Ips sen: �7 -01:21 C'T - GYJZ A 201 -•hof J INDEX OF DRAWINGS SPECS 1 SEALS PAGE - SPECS GENERAL INFORMATION DRAWINGS G-001 TITLE SHEET, & SHEET INDEX G-002 FEMA DESIGN INFORMATION DATA CIVIL DRAWINGS C-101 CIVIL PLAN STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S-001 GENERAL NOTES S-101 PLANS AND SECTIONS S-201 ELEVATIONS S-301 MAIN SECTION S-501 DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A-101 FLOOR PLAN, CEILING PLAN & BLDG SECTIONS A-201 ELEVATIONS A-501 WALL SECTIONS, DETAILS, & SCHEDULES MECHANICAL DRAWINGS ME000 ME COVERSHEET M-101 MECHANICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E-101 ELECTRIICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES 1 2 3 1 5 IC NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 fIf TH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX Consultants: 0 Project Title: South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owner City of Iowa City 3 Project No.: 2012.046 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker Issue: Dote: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12-14-12 ISSUE FOR BIDS Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDIIIpTE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON—INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DRAWINGS IS PROHIBITEO. sheet T `e. TITLE SHEET, & SHEET INDEX Sheet Number: G -00 l 2 3 D 0 SHADED AREA INDICATES SAFE ROOM LOCATION (FEMA 361 STANDARDS FOR CONSTRUCTION) QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN REFER TO SECTION 01 43131.05F QUALITY REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTIONS. EACH CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ANY COMPONENT LISTED IN THE QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN SHOULD SUBMIT A WRITTEN STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY TO THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, THE ARCHITECT AND THE OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK ON THE SYSTEM OR COMPONENT. THE STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY SHOULD CONTAIN: a. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF AWARENESS OF THE SPECIAL CRITERIA CONTAINED IN THE QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN. b. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THAT CONTROL WILL BE EXERCISED TO OBTAIN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. c. PROCEDURES FOR EXERCISING CONTROL WITHIN THE CONTRACTOR'S ORGANIZATION, AND THE METHOD AND FREQUENCY OF REPORTING AND THE DISTRUBUTION OF REPORTS. d. IDENTIFICATION AND QUALIFICATIONS OF THE PERSON(S) EXERCISING SUCH CONTROL AND THEIR POSITION IN THE ORGANIZATION. PROJECT INFORMATION TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: NEW CONSTRUCTION, IIB DESCRIPTION: PARK RESTROOMS/ FEMA SAFE HOUSE LOCATION: 16021". CODE COMPLIANCE FEMA 361, 2ND EDITION 2008 IBC, 2009 ICC -500,2008 SAFE ROOM INFORMATION TYPE - SINGLE USE LOWER HICKORY HILL PARK, IOWA CITY, IOWA IOWA CITY, IOWA DURATION: 2 HOURS OCCUPANCY CLASS: A-3 NUMBER OF EGRESS POINTS: 3 TOTAL PROPOSED OCCUPANTS: 62 (INCLUDING 1 ADA / 200) 61 STANDING @ 5sf EA. 1 WHEELCHAIR (@ 10sf EA. REQUIRED AREA 320 SF USABLE AREA SCHEDULE DESIGN METHODOLOGY: Area use Usable area Usable SF per factor Occupant Occupants MEN'S RR 74 SF 50% 5 7 STORAGE 68 SF 0% 5 0 WOMEN'S RR 74 SF 50% 5 7 WOMEN'S ROOM 116SF 85% 5 20 CORRIDOR 57 SF 65% 5 7 MEN'S ROOM 116 SF 85% 1 5 20 Grand total: 6 504 SF 62 DEDUCTION FOR HANDICAPPED 1 TOTAL ACTUAL SAFE ROOM CAPACITY 61 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN REFER TO SECTION 01 43131.05F QUALITY REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTIONS. EACH CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ANY COMPONENT LISTED IN THE QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN SHOULD SUBMIT A WRITTEN STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY TO THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, THE ARCHITECT AND THE OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK ON THE SYSTEM OR COMPONENT. THE STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY SHOULD CONTAIN: a. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF AWARENESS OF THE SPECIAL CRITERIA CONTAINED IN THE QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN. b. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THAT CONTROL WILL BE EXERCISED TO OBTAIN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. c. PROCEDURES FOR EXERCISING CONTROL WITHIN THE CONTRACTOR'S ORGANIZATION, AND THE METHOD AND FREQUENCY OF REPORTING AND THE DISTRUBUTION OF REPORTS. d. IDENTIFICATION AND QUALIFICATIONS OF THE PERSON(S) EXERCISING SUCH CONTROL AND THEIR POSITION IN THE ORGANIZATION. PROJECT INFORMATION TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: NEW CONSTRUCTION, IIB DESCRIPTION: PARK RESTROOMS/ FEMA SAFE HOUSE LOCATION: 16021". CODE COMPLIANCE FEMA 361, 2ND EDITION 2008 IBC, 2009 ICC -500,2008 SAFE ROOM INFORMATION TYPE - SINGLE USE LOWER HICKORY HILL PARK, IOWA CITY, IOWA IOWA CITY, IOWA DURATION: 2 HOURS OCCUPANCY CLASS: A-3 NUMBER OF EGRESS POINTS: 3 TOTAL PROPOSED OCCUPANTS: 62 (INCLUDING 1 ADA / 200) 61 STANDING @ 5sf EA. 1 WHEELCHAIR (@ 10sf EA. REQUIRED AREA 320 SF TORNADO SAFE ROOM 250 MPH SAFE ROOM DESIGN WIND SPEED (3 -SECOND GUST) MISSILE IMPACT RESISTANCE: 15 LBS. 2x4 @ 100 MPH (HORIZONTAL) 15 LBS. 2x4 @ 67 MPH (VERTICAL) SAFE ROOM MANUFACTURE / BUILDER: THD SIGN TYPE 1 ST 1 SIGN TYPE 2 ST 2 Ilk 5 WIND HAZARD REINFORCED CONCRETE (10" DESIGN METHODOLOGY: TOTAL AREA: 504 SF BUILDING AREA SCHEDULE DESIGN EXPOSURE CAT: 85% OCCUPIABLE AREA: 232 SF ENCLOSED DIRECTIONALITY FACTOR(kd): 1.0 65% OCCUPIABLE AREA: 57 SF IMPORTANCE FACTOR(I): GROSS BUILDING AREA 616 SF 0.55 50% OCCUPIABLE AREA: 148 SF EXTERIOR WALL AREA 80 SF HORIZ. MISSILE SPEED: NON -OCCUPIABLE AREA: 68 SF INTERIOR WALL AREA 31 SF TOTAL USABLE AREA: 369 SF NET USABLE AREA 504 SF TORNADO SAFE ROOM 250 MPH SAFE ROOM DESIGN WIND SPEED (3 -SECOND GUST) MISSILE IMPACT RESISTANCE: 15 LBS. 2x4 @ 100 MPH (HORIZONTAL) 15 LBS. 2x4 @ 67 MPH (VERTICAL) SAFE ROOM MANUFACTURE / BUILDER: THD SIGN TYPE 1 ST 1 SIGN TYPE 2 ST 2 Ilk 5 WIND HAZARD REINFORCED CONCRETE (10" DESIGN METHODOLOGY: ASCE METHOD 2 SAFE RM DESIGN WIND ZONE: IV (250 MPH (3 -SEC GUST)) DESIGN EXPOSURE CAT: B ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION: ENCLOSED DIRECTIONALITY FACTOR(kd): 1.0 TOPOGRAPHIC EFFECTS(Kzt): 1.0 IMPORTANCE FACTOR(I): 1.5 INTERNAL PRESSURE CO. (GCpi): 0.55 DEBRIS IMPACT CRITERIA: MISSILE SIZE: 15 LBS 2x4 HORIZ. MISSILE SPEED: 100 MPH D VERT. MISSILE SPEED: 67 MPH FLOOD HAZARD SFHA: NO FIRM PANEL NO.: 1 901 71 01 95E FLOOD ZONE: ZONE X BASE FLOOD ELEVATION 1.0% CHANCE OF ANNUAL EXCEEDANCE: N/A 0.2% CHANCE OF ANNUAL EXCEEDANCE: NIA LOWEST FLOOR FEE: 673.8' LOWEST FLOOR FEE (M&E): DATUM:NAVD1929 OTHER HAZARDS NEHRP COMPLIANCE: YES OTHER: SAFE ROOM IS DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND DAMAGE FROM COLLAPSE OF ADJACENT TREES WALLS/ OPENINGS/ DOOR ASSEMBLIES WALL CONST: REINFORCED CONCRETE (10" CAST IN-PLACE W/ # 5 BARS @ 12' O.C. EW) N/A ROOF CONST: REINFORCED CONCRETE (10" CAST - MANMADE: IN -PLACE W/ # 5 BARS @ 12" O.C. EW) SYSTEM TEST METHOD FOR TORNADO: ICC -500, SEC. 306 AND 804, RESULT: PASS SOILCOVERAGE: NO AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION: CITY OF IOWA CITY MECHANICAL/ VENTILATION/ ELECTRICAL VENTILATION METHOD: PASSIVE VENTILATION SYSTEM (Exhaust fan included to assist with odor control during the usage season.) LIGHTING: EMERGENCY LIGHTING BATTERY POWERED OPENING PROTECTION: YES METHOD OF PROT. EQUIP. WIND FORCES: ICC -500 DEBRIS IMPACT: ICC -500 FLOODING: N/A SEISMIC: PER IBC CODE MANMADE: N/A OTHER ADA REQUIRMENTS: SAFE ROOM IS ACCESSIBLE TO INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES. TOILETS: THREE (3) WCS, ONE (1) URINAL, TWO (2) LAVS ARE PROVIDED WITHIN SAFE ROOM. SIGNAGE: SAFE ROOM DIRECTIONAL SIGN LOCATED AROUND PARK, ONE OUTSIDE OF EACH MAIN DOOR. EMERGENCY SUPPLIES: THE FOLLOWING ITEMS WILL BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER AND STORED IN STORAGE ROOM; FLASHLIGHTS & RADIOS W/ CONT. CHARGING BATTERIES, SUPPLY OF EXTRA BATTERIES, AUDIBLE SOUNDING DEVICE THAT CONT. CHARGES SIGN TYPE 213 ST 2R 0 SIGN TYPE 2L ST 2L NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338.7878 319-338-7879 FAY 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX Consultants: Project Tit s South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owner: City of Iowa City Project No.: 2012.046 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker Issue: Date: Description: 8.27.12 EVA SUBVITTAL 11Q.2p14z F"BIMS BHRFEMA COMMENTS Note FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCE'; DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHIP DR,0PN-S AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS - LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INT'R,ERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DRAWINGS . PRO 'BITED Sheet Title: FEMA DESIGN INFORMATION DATA Sheet Number: G -002 C E 1 2 3 4 5 695 :._ .... _........................ ......... i......... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... _. ..... ..... ..... ..... :695 \ _ GRAPHIC S - SAFE ROOM BUILDING HIC CALE 690 �._.\ ........ .................. ..................i....... ..... .... ..... .......i 690 10 0 5 10 \ .:.. ..:.. ..: 685 :......... ................. `.....:......... ......... ......... :....... :685 680 ...._ . ......_......... ......... ......... ...... � \`.........:. ..... ................... ..... .......: 680 \ I 1 V 6'PC \\ 1 1 675 ....... :.........:......... :................. ... ..... 675 ....:..... ..:..... PCGSTOOP DRAINAGE SWALE - - - EXISTING RE ASPHALT \ ° _ _ _ . . 670 ............... .... ... ..... ..... 670 E TRAIL (FUTURE OVERLAY R FALL FOUNDAT10N EXCAVATION & BACKFILL: PLANNED FOR 2012) 665 :.........:.........:................. .:.........:......... :......... :......... :......... :.................... ................. ..:.........:...................: 665 \ \ 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 130 124 \ SECTION THROUGH SAFE ROOM SITE CONSTRUCTION NOTES 129 126 125 \ \ C101 � � I \ CONNECT TO EXISTING SEWER TRUNK 1. All construction for site work, includingmeasurement for payment, » p \ \ 5 HM TRAIL \ MAIN WITH SERVICE RISER. QWIKSEAL BY provision of materials, and execution, shall be done in conformance with \ � � ,� the Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specifications (SUDAS). _ 5" HMA TRAIL (24" S) I l 121 `- I FERNCO OR APPROVED EQUAL. \ (24 s) L4 S) 1 2 SAFE ROOM GUIDE SIGN � 2. The location of all utilities shown on the plans is approximate. The exact \ 41 S) S) (24" S location and elevation of all public and private utilities must be determined \ lZ \ \ ) (24"s) - --T'Sj \ b the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to 5�- \ 120 (24 - -- Y P Y s 4 EX SANITARY MH � � ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the - �� 8" IE = 667.15' W ALSEY TAYLOR SURFACE MOUNT DRINKIN plan may be present. (2 4" s� \ 24" IE = 658.95' N 119 FOl1N� WITH PET FOUNTAIN MODEL 20DB 3. As soon as practicable, after the fill has been placed, embankment n \ (OR APPROVED ,EQUAL) SEE DETAI /C101 shaping completed and topsoil re -spread, erosion protection measures shall '�2 \ 24 IE = 658.95 S \ be provided along all slope surfaces. Vegetation shall be established as \ \ soon as possible thereafter. \ \ 128 127 4. The subgrade under the HMA trail surface shall be treated with herbicide \ 11 \ prior to placement, cost incidental. \ \ \ \ \ \ 123 5. HMA pavement shall be constructed per SUDAS Section 7030-1.08-C. 118 ° � Pavement shall be 5" total thickness constructed in two lifts as follows: \ -� 6 8 � �� 116 � o Lift 1: 3" HMA (300k ESAL) Base, 1/2", PG 58-28 or 64-22. \ - 68 LF 4" SDR �3.5 PVC Lift 2: 2 HMA (300k ESAL) Surface, 3/8", PG 58-28 or 64-22.. \ � 12 SANITARY SEWE� SERVICE. n \ \ \\ \ 113 115 f -I \ \ PIPE SLOPE 2% i IN - 5% MAX \ ISTING SHE R l 114 STOP BOX / SAFE ROOM STRUCTURE -- - _ GUIDE SIGN MAINTAIN STANDARD CLEAR DISTANCE i On � I \ 68o I / - \ O\ I / I 6' WIDE PCC STOOP / SEE ARCHITECTURAL D�AWINGS Point Table \ \ BBj�min Point # Elevation Northing Easting \ \ \ \ \ \ \ `� LF^ TYrE TREE TO B�RELOCATED \ \ \ \ \ < COPPER WA R SERVIC PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION 100 675.89 612833.85 2183185.48 \ 68 \ 131 - \ 101 675.58 612818.93 2183181.89 \ � � \ 106 ' \ 102 672.42 612800.71 2183204.22 \ \ \ 6I7 \ \ 103 675.59 612848.84 2183190.53 ` \ \ \ \ \ \ _ CONTRACTOR TO VERIF \ yy s�� \ 104 676.30 612846.49 2183191.05 LOCATION 0-UT}MES, \ W c; W \ W nc�_ SWALE \ 6 105 676.30 612819.50 2183183.60 \ \ ` ` \ \ \ - f 77 LF 2"\T'FPE.\ W \ SAFE OM \ A - 106 673.80 612813.65 2183204.81 \ \ \ COPPER WATER SERVICE \ \ \ \ 6 .+ FF = 73.8 107 673.68 612812.06 2183210.59 \ \ \ \ \ \ \ 108 673.68 612839.05 2183218.04 HALSEY TAYLOR 4420DB DRINKING FOUNTAIN WITH PET FOUNTAIN OR APPROVED EQUAL �_ ^,� > .'t•' 673 - 109 673.80 612840.64 2183212.25 ( ) 680 110 673.63 612841.30 2183218.63 PR� E%S TRE _ 1 676 .' - 4 NYLON REINFORCED s81 _ 675 - 111 673.76 612842.84 2183212.84 ° NYLONBRAID TUBING W/ MIP J ` ` - sa2 ' - - i �} \ \ RARY ROLLED 676 - ` 112 672.79 612866.38 2183247.73 (SUPPLY WATER) _ 3" LiCYEfi�OF-FIVER ROC\ K`STAIJE MULCH _ _ R00 NT1�OL - 113 672.88 612872.35 2183247.06 HOSE BIB - tw \ sa3 - - 2' -WIDE ALONG BACK -SIDE OF BUILDING _PRP�DUE�(RECP)- 677 - \ _ _ \ IRED_ ON` - - 678 - 114 672.76 612865.46 2183242.81 684 _ - - _ \ \ = CAT CHSLOPE AND _ ACCE 1 PVC TRAP679 115 672.66 612860.42 2183246.32 DOOR __ SURFACE MOUNT TEMPLATE NOTES: Ln _'� 685 �_ - - \ - - SOfL EORING EA6J�1101L� DRAINAGE 680 1. MEETS ADA REGULATIONS. i 116 672.66 612859.44 2183251.22 PAVEMENT SPOT WELD 2. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE \ - \ \ - - _ _ _ - - - 681 - 117 672.82 612867.37 2183254.79 WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. / \ ` - - - - - - _ - - 682 _ ` 7' 3. STAINLESS STEEL SURFACE CARRIER REQUIRED. - - - - 683 118 672.90 612872.87 2183251.77 ` - - " cv c POROUS BACKFILL (125 CU -FT REQUIRED) - - _ _ - _ _ ` - -- - 684 \ 119 673.72 612885.50 2183270.81 EXPANSION 120 673.74 612890.48 2183273.60 JOINT (TYP) r _ _ _ 685 121 673.64 612887.11 2183277.95 WATER '' - - ' A,� �" x 12" ZINC PLATED ROD � � � \ ` � � �_ - -0-686 � 122 673.63 612882.57 2183276.05 SERVICE �, DRAIN LINE l _� - -687 6"0 PERFORATED SUBDRAIN pgRk 123 672.81 612866.91 2183252.44 - Y Ln - - 68 \ \ \ 124 675.39 612929.98 2183294.84 r-- \ l gCCf QRI \ \ - '689 \ \ CONCRETE FOUNTAIN BASE PAD 125 675.61 612931.44 2183288.22 _ -- (19"x19"x54" REINFORCED WITH #4 _ � / � � _ 69 126 675.88 612937.21 2183288.03 HOOPS (2) AT 6" C -C VERT.) - - co ` ` 697 \ 127 676.81 612934.42 2183258.16` 92\ 128 676.81 612940.40 2183257.60 69,3 129 675.97 612943.14 2183287.07 DRINKING FOUNTAIN 1 \ \ \ - - I _ 694 \ 130 675.87 612945.08 2183292.70 NTS C101 \ \ \ \ 131 673.85 612844.07 2183211.12 3 4 5 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 1000 WALNUT ST. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX Consultants: Shoemaker �Haaland www, 5hoemaker-haaland,com ProjeCt Title: Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owner: City of Iowa City 3 Project No.: 2012.046 Drawn by: SAH Checked by:ALH Issue: u Date: Description: 2/14/2012 lissued for Bid Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINSS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. GCOPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT NRITTEN PERMISSION B. NEUMANN MONSON PO 1.="0918ITED. UNAUTHORIZED SCANNI _- d^:GS IS P _ Sheet Title: SITE LAYOUT AND GRADING PLAN Sheet Number: C-10 1 GENERALSTRUCTURALNOTES NUMBER 1. DESIGN BASIS: INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2009 EDITION (IBC 2009) AT AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE (ACI 318-08) 0 ICC -500, 2008 APPROX 2. WIND LOADS ARCH DESIGN METHOD ASCE METHOD2 BASIC WIND SPEED 250 MPH EXPOSURE CLASS B IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.5 Kd 1.0 Kzt 1.0 ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION ENCLOSED GCpi 0.55 MISSILE SIZE 15 LB 2X4 HORIZONTAL SPEED 100 MPH VERTICAL SPEED 67 MPH 3. SNOW LOADS GROUND SNOW LOAD 30PSF IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.0 4. SEISMIC LOADS SHORT PERIOD DESIGN ACCELERATION, SDS 0.144g LONG PERIOR DESIGN ACCELERATION, Sol 0.101g SITE CLASS D SEISMIC USE GROUP 1 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY B IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.0 SEISMIC FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS 5. LIVE LOADS ROOF 10OPSF 6. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS FOR DIMENSIONAL LOCATION OF NON-BEARING PARTITION WALLS, DOOR AND WINDOW LOCATIONS, RECESSED PENETRATION DIMENSIONS AND DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL PLANS 7. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ELEVATIONS ARE TO TOP OF BEAMS, FOOTINGS, SLABS, ETC 8. BUILDING DRAINAGE, INSULATION, FLASHING, VAPORIMOISTURE PROTECTION AND FIREPROOFING ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL PLANS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND/OR MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR REQUIREMENTS 9. ALL SECTIONS, DETAILS AND NOTES SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO BE TYPICAL AND SHALL APPLY TO SIMILAR SITUATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 10. THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE BUILDING SHOWN ON THESE PLANS IS DEPENDENT UPON COMPLETION ACCORDING TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO FURNISH ALL TEMPORARY BRACING AND/OR SUPPORT THAT MAY BE REQUIRED AS A RESULT OF CONSTRUCTION METHODS AND SEQUENCES. 11. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES FOR ITEMS EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE AND OPENINGS IN CONCRETE REQUIRED FOR OTHER TRADES, SUCH AS, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DUCT WORK, LOWERS, PIPING, DOORS AND WINDOWS. GENERAL FOUNDATION NOTES 1. FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED ON RECOMMENDATIONS FROM THE TERRACON GEOTECHNICAL REPORT DATED AUGUST 8, 2012. 2. FOUNDATIONS SHALL BEAR ON SUITABLE NATIVE SOILS OR COMPACTED STRUCTUAL FILL EXTENDING TO SUITABLE NATIVE SOILS AS DETERMINED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. 3. EXISTING UNSUITABLE FILL MATERAL ENCOUNTERED BELOW FLOOR SLABS AND FOUNDATIONS, AS DETERMINED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER, SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH PROPERLY PLACED AND COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL. 4. EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE FREE OF WATER AND LOOSE SOIL PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT. ANY UNSUITABLE MATERIAL IS TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH COMPACTED GRANULAR MATERIAL. 5. ANY FILL MATERIAL THAT MAY BE REQUIRED TO BRING THE SUBGRADE TO BEARING ELEVATION IS TO BE TESTED AND APPROVED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. FILL MATERAIL SHALL BE PLACED IN LIFTS NOT TO EXCEED 9 INCHES WHEN HEAVY COMPACTION EQUIPMENT IS UTILIZED, THINNER LIFTS IF HAND HELD COMPACTION EQUIPMENT IS UTILIZED. FILL MATERIAL SHALL BE COMPACTED AS DETERMINED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER AND SOILS REPORT, OR: UNDER SLABS: MATERIAL SHOULD BE COMPACTED TO AT LEAST 95% OF STANDARD PROCTOR DRY DENSITY (ASTM D-698) UNDER FOOTINGS: MATERIAL SHOULD BE COMPACTED AT LEAST 98% OF STANDARD PROCTOR DRY DENSITY (ASTM D-698) THE HIGHER DEGREE OF FILL COMPACTION BELOW FOOTINGS SHALL EXTEND LATERALLY BEYOND THE EXTERIOR EDGES OF THE ELEMENT AT LEAST 81NCHES PER 1 FOOT OF THICKNESS BELOW THE ELEMENTS BASE ELEVATION. 6. LOCATE, VERIFY AND MARK LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES PRIOR TO EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATIONS. 7. PROVIDE 42" WELL GRADED GRANULAR MATERIAL BELOW ALL SLABS ON GRADE 2 1. EXCEPT WHERE MODIFIED BY THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, ALL CONCRETE WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 301-08, 'SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE BUILDINGS" AND ACI 318-08, 'BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE". 2. REINFORCING IS TO BE DETAILED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 315-M, 'MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES". 3. MINIMUM CONCRETE 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS: FOOTINGS ...................................................3000 PSI ALL OTHER CONCRETE............................4000 PSI 4. CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS: REINFORCING BARS.....: ... ........... ASTIM A615, GRADE 60 WELDED WIRE FABRIC................ASTM All 85 5. THE FOLLOWING LAP -SPLICES SHALL BE MAINTAINED INCLUDING DOWEL EXTENSION AND EMBEDMENT, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE: REINFORCING BARS: #6 AND SMALLER: HORIZONTAL BARS.......... 48 BAR DIAMETERS VERTICAL BARS..............40 BAR DIAMETERS WELDED WIRE FABRIC: 81NCHES 6. MAINTAIN THE MINIMUM CONCRETE COVERAGE FOR REINFORCING AS INDICATED, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS: CONCRETE DEPOSITED DIRECTLY AGAINST EARTH ...... 3 INCHES CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER #6 AND LARGER...........................................2 INCHES #5 AND SMALLER ......................................... 1-112INCHES CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: SLABS AND WALLS.........................................1 INCH COLUMN I PIER TIES....................................1-12 INCHES PLACE THE REINFORCING BARS AS NEAR TO THE SURFACE AS THESE MINIMUMS PERMIT, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 7. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE #5 X 4'-V BAR, AT 45 DEGREES TO MAIN REINFORCING AT CORNERS OF OPENINGS AND INSIDE CORNERS OF SLABS. 8. SHIFT REINFORCING TO CLEAR ANCHOR BOLTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS, CUTTING OF REINFORCING BARS IS NOT PERMITTED. 9. REINFORCING SHALL RUN CONTINUOUS THROUGH CONSTRUCTION JOINTS UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 10. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN WALLS AND ROOF SHALL HAVE KEYWAYS 1-12 INCH X ONE THIRD THE WALL THICKNESS AND BENTONITE WATERSTOP 11. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL REINFORCING CONTINUOUS AROUND ALL CORNERS UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. PROVIDE CORNER BARS WITH 48 BAR DIAMETER LAP SPLICES AT ALL INTERSECTIONS OF FOOTINGS, AND WALLS, SAME SIZE AND SPACING AS HORIZONTAL REINFORCING, UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 12. ALL HORIZONTAL REINFORCING SHALL RUN CONTINUOUS THROUGH CONTROL JOINTS. PROVIDE DOUBLE 12' CHAMFER STRIP AT JOINTS. 13. HOT WEATHER CONCRETE OPERATIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 305. COLD WEATHER CONCRETE OPERATIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 306. 14. 1% AIR ENTRAINMENT SHALL BE ADDED TO CONCRETE USED FOR EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION 15. ALL CONCRETE EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL HAVE XYPEX ADMIXTURE FOR WATER PROTECTION. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 16. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE WITH SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ACTUAL OPENING DIMENSIONS, RECESSES IN CONCRETE AT PENETRATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS, LOUVERS, ETC SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL AND MEP DOCUMENTS. PRECAST CONCRETE ALTERNATE(ALTERNATE#3 1, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED WITH PRECAST CONCRETE PANELS. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH PRECAST SUPPLIER EXTENT OF PRECAST SUBSTITUTION. PRECAST SUPPLIER TO DESIGN AND PROVIDE ALL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE AND PRECAST CONCRETE. PRECAST SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE DESIGN CALCULATIONS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ICC -500 AND NOTED DESIGN CRITERIA 2. PRECAST CONCRETE OUTSIDE CORNER EDGES SHALL BE MITERED CORNERS 3. PRECAST CONCRETE EAVE CORNER SHALL BE MITERED 4. PRECAST CONCRETE PEAK JOINT SHALL BE MITERED 5. GABLE WALL - ROOF JOINT SHALL BE FORMED WITH A BEARING LEDGE 6. INTERIOR WALL JOINTS SHALL BE BUTTED 7. EXTERIOR WALL OUTSIDE CORNERS SHALL BE MITERED 8. JOINTS SHALL BE SEALED 9. CONDUIT AND PIPING SHALL BE EMBEDDED IN WALLS/SLAB AND COORDINATED WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR FOR EXACT PLACEMENT AND MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 10. JOINTS IN WALLS ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE HORIZONTAL ONLY 1. THE FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL ITEMS REQUIRE SPECIAL TESTING AND/OR INSPECTIONS: SOILS - TABLE 1704.7, IBC 2009 CONCRETE -TABLE 1704.4, IBC 2009 2 3 Z SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS Building Section SIM S-101 Callout S-101 L -------J View Title View Name SCALE: 118" =1'-0" Grid Head and Grid Line Revision Tag d Cloud Al Spot Elevation 8 Level Markers Name Elevation # NUMBER @ AT ° DEGREES 0 DIAMETER APPROX APPROXIMATE, -LY ARCH ARCHITECT, -URE, -URAL BI BOTTOM OF BP BASE PLATE BRG BEARING CFSF COLD FORM STEEL FRAMING CJ CONTROL JOINT CL CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONIC CONCRETE CONST CONSTRUCTION CONT CONTINUOUS DEG DEGREE DIM DIMENSION DTL DETAIL DWG DRAWING EA EACH EF EACH FACE EJ EXPANSION JOINT EL ELEVATION EMBED EMBEDDED EQ EQUAL EW EACH WAY EXP EXPANSION EXT EXTERIOR fc CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH FDN FOUNDATION FIN FINISHED FL FLOOR FT FOOT FTG FOOTING Fy YIELD STRESS GA GAGE OR GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GRADE BEAM GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR HDG HOT -DIPPED GALVANIZED HORIZ HORIZONTAL HWS HEADED, WELDED STUD IN INCH INT INTERIOR JST JOIST JT JOINT L LENGTH LF LINEARF00T LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL MAX MAXIMUM MEZZ MEZZANINE MIN MINIMUM MISC MISCELLANEOUS MK MARK N NORTH N LENGTH (AS PLATES) NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NUMBER NTS NOT TO SCALE OC ON CENTER OPNG OPENING OPP OPPOSITE PAF POWER ACTUATED FASTENER PC PRECAST PL PLATE PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH R RADIUS RD ROOF DRAIN REINF REINFORCING, -MENT, -ED REQ'D REQUIRED REF REFERENCE, REFER TO RTU ROOF -TOP UNIT SC TC WITH CLASS A FAYING SURFACE SCHED SCHEDULE SIM SIMILAR SP SPACE(S) SPEC SPECIFICATION(S) SPECD SPECIFIED SQ SQUARE STD STANDARD STIFF STIFFENER TI TOP OF TO PRE -TENSIONED BOLT TYP TYPICAL LINO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VERT VERTICAL VIF VERIFY IN FIELD VWA VERIFY WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS WP WORKING POINT WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC YD YARD 5 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240' 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX C cnsj'tan,s: SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 0 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owne-: CITY OF IOWA CITY B Project No.: 12-272 Drown by: EPD Checked by:FES A Issue: Dote: Description: 3.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL IA.12 SS'JE FnR BIDS •,10 01 - l7 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owne-: CITY OF IOWA CITY B Project No.: 12-272 Drown by: EPD Checked by:FES A Issue: Dote: Description: 3.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL IA.12 SS'JE FnR BIDS Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DPAWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PP OR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. QCOPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSIC'.,' BY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNA', SCANNING OF ,:;; Shee; GENERAL NOTES Sheet Number: S-001 D x fo W LU LU x S-201 O z 2 3 4 5 S-201 EAST ELEVATION 24'-5" STOOP WIDTH - PROVIDE (3) CONTROL JOINTS WEST ELEVATION S-201 n FOUNDATION PLAN NOTES: 1. 4" SLAB ON GRADE WITH 6X6 W1.4XW1.4 WWF SEE DETAIL 61S4, 7/S4 AND 81S4 FOR TYPICAL SLAB ON GRADE DETAILS SEE ARCH FOR FLOOR SLAB SLOPE REQUIREMENTS THICKEN SLAB AT DOORWAYS 2. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINT IN SLAB ON GRADE 3 SECTION z O JJ W x =O S-201 co NOTE: COORDINATE EXACT OPENING DIMENSIONS, SLOPES AND REQUIRED RECESSES WITH ASSEMBLY SHOP DRAWINGS AND MEPIARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ADDITIONAL OPENING SIZE TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES. _ PEAK n 19'-0" _ EAVE n 10'-00^ _FINISH FLOOR n 0'-0111�1 T/FOOTING —5'— 0" V 28'- 0" r--------------------------------------- ________ I i t 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I '12-272 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I DOWN I I I I I I EPD l 10" ROOF SLAB Issue: SEE S-301 FOR Date: I REINFORCING 1 1 I I I I 8.27.12 I 2.14.12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I DOWN I I I 11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L —L—L ________—J-1 ________—J n ROOF FRAMING PLAN U 1/4" =1'-0" 3 S-101 TYPICAL INTERIOR WALL SECTION 1/4" = 1'-0" _ PEAK 0" _EAVE 10'-0" 3H FLOOR 0'-0" /FOOTING —5-00" 2 7 Z� 5 191 or, NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 5224C 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-78/9 FAX SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room CITY OF IOWA CITY Project No.: '12-272 c? Drawn by: EPD Checked by:FES Issue: c) Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTA_ 2.14.12 IISSUEFOR BIDS South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room CITY OF IOWA CITY Project No.: '12-272 3 Drawn by: EPD Checked by:FES Issue: Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTA_ 2.14.12 IISSUEFOR BIDS Note. FIE.-'- -_='=Y ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARAL_ES DO -C ALE DRAWINGS, CONSULT SHOP DPWINGS ANC - - 'PROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY - ^.ORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOF TO INST----- -P ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH C:-S.-PADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. O C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSON cY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNALITHCP'.ZEO SCANNING OF DRAWING`_ '� PR -HIS -ED. PLAN AND SECTIONS Sheet Number: S 101 D CONTROL JOINT,TYP 2 4 1 S-101 S-301 n EAST ELEVATION 1/4" VV -0" PEAK 19'-P� EAVE 10'-00" FINISH FLOORAL 0'-00^ 3 FINISH LEGEND T/FOOTING - -5'-0" METAL PANEL OVER CIP n WEST ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" CIP WITH FORMLINER NOTE: COORDINATE EXACT OPENING DIMENSIONS, SLOPES AND REQUIRED RECESSES WITH ASSEMBLY SHOP DRAWINGS AND MEPIARCHITECTURALDOCUMENTS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ADDITIONAL OPENING SIZE TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES. PEAK 19' - 0" �1 EAVE 10'-0" FINISH FLOOR T/FOOTING -5'- 0" �1 n NORTH ELEVATION 1 /4" = V-0" 3 S-101 PEAK n 191.01. EAVE - - -- 10'-0.1 _ _ FINISH FLOOR 0'-01 I T/FOOTING -- -5'-0'I 2 3 i. n SOUTH ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" PEAK -- 19'-0" EAVE FINISH FLOOR n 0'-O" v T/FOOTING -5'-00" or NEUMANN MONSON A R C H IT E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAi; 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, 'A 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 F \X C onsuItonts: SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room CITY OF IOWA CITY B Project No.: 12-272 Drawn by: EPD Checked by:FES Issue: A Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12.14.12 r7 •L7 w+ C-> South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room CITY OF IOWA CITY B Project No.: 12-272 Drawn by: EPD Checked by:FES Issue: A Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12.14.12 ISSUE FOR BIDS Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEAPANCLS DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP JRAWINP� AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIrP 5O INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-HiTERFEi EN.;E WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL, Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DRAWINGS IS FROHIBITEU. Sheet Title: ELEVATIONS Sheet Number: S-201 11 2 Z. 5 2 5 4 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESS 1 O N A L CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338.7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX Consultants SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owner. CITY OF IOWA CITY 3 Project No.: "2-2 Drawn by: EPD Checked by:FES Issue: Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL ISSUE FOR BIDS Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARA?ICES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRIWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON—INTER. RENO_ WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MA,,UAL. © C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OF CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION E NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED, UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DPAWIN(',' PR<,HIDITJ MAIN SECTION S-301 PEAK 3'X3' AT ROOF JOINT MATCH VERT BAR SIZE AND SPACING P- D n: . :° .: se 4< •, 4 - i• p #5 @ 12" OC HORT AND VERT • EACH FACE TYPICAL ROOF ' REINFORCING,UNO c " WATERSTOP REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS ° -°:: EAVES -- - — - - - - — - - — - - ----- ---- -- ---- ----------------- ---------- - - - 10'-0" TXT ATWALLIROOFJOINT a MATCH VERT BAR SIZE AND SPACING a, ti•- #5@12"OC e_ l • , :• , HORT AND VERT EACH FACE TYPICAL WALL ° REINFORCING AT INTERIOR B" WALLS REINFORCE WITH #5 @ 12" OC HORT AND VERT a CENTER IN WALL ' a: •ti .:e •:. , I •9 SLAB ON GRADE SEE PLAN •'.•- Q. .e a, •` FINISH FLOOR n _ .. .e-.' .. _ - .q.-. - - •° •" - a. - - .•'w". • '. • a., - - - .' ..:a .. — —_ - - .. .. a .. .: a•" -• I I-1111 -I _- • III—III—III—I I I �• �' '• • � III—III—I a" ,-� - , >,�... I I—III—I I I— III—III—III—I ":. 2" @ 12- e; 12, @,r :-.."w'� III—IIII I—I I I—I 11: ORT AND VER FH�OCHANDVERT `,. EACH FAG :: p I I—III—I TYPICAL WALL .e:..-'• ` RE NF RCINGA —III REINFORCING AT • 14"WAL III—I a 10"WAL . •i .' °` = I I— e•. a 'HOOK LEG +•= .. " T/FOOTING --—-—- — - — - —- e -5'-0., MAIN REINFORCING PLAN :°: n " ,. NOTES: 4' - 0" TYPICAL FOOTING 1. SEE 1/S4 FOR TYPICAL CONTROL JOINTS. SEE ELEVATIONS FOR PROPOSED CONTROL JOINTS. 14) #5 X CONT 2. SEE 2/S4 AND 3154 FOR TYPICAL WALL CORNER BAR DETAIL. 4'-0" WIDE X 1'-0' THICK 3. SEE 4154 FOR TYPICAL REINFORCING AROUND OPENINGS. SEE ELEVATIONS AND PLANS FOR OPEINGS. 4. SEE 51S4 FOR TYPICAL FOOTING CORNER BAR DETAILS. 5. SEE 10154 FOR TYPICAL WALUSLAB INTERSECTION DETAILS 2 5 4 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESS 1 O N A L CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338.7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX Consultants SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room Owner. CITY OF IOWA CITY 3 Project No.: "2-2 Drawn by: EPD Checked by:FES Issue: Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL ISSUE FOR BIDS Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARA?ICES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRIWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON—INTER. RENO_ WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MA,,UAL. © C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OF CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION E NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED, UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DPAWIN(',' PR<,HIDITJ MAIN SECTION S-301 0 (V t/12 CAULKJOINT a TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN I" 'a . 1/4" TYP. PROVIDE SIMILAR CHAMFERS AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND CAULK JOINT n CONTROL JOINT 1" = 1'-0" P$olY x ° a a ti CORNER BARS TO MATCH LONGITUDINAL FOOTING REINFORCING e LONGITUDINAL FOOTING REINFORCING a. 0 - A.4 r n FOOTING CORNER BARS 3/4" =1'-0" CONSTRUCTION JOINT ROOF SLAB LU T-0" x3'-0" DOWEL - SIZE - AND SPACING TO MATCH ° HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING a TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN SEE PLAN INTERIOR WALL 2 3 UNBONDED ON THIS SIDE a TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN ° 2'-6" x 2'-6" DOWEL -SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING $ 0'-3" MAXIMUM (TYPICAL) z _ ga s W _a. (1) ADDITIONAL VERTICAL BAR - SIZE TO MATCH TYPICAL VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING n CORNER BARS 3/4" =1'-0" SMOOTH DOWEL BARS - SEE NOTE 1 4 G, !' FIRST POUR THIS SIDE SLAB ON GRADE - SEE PLAN FOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING NOTE: 1. WHEN T' IS LESS THAN 6" USE 112" DIA. x 1'-4" SMOOTH DOWEL BARS @ 18" O.C. WHEN "t" IS GREATER THAN 6" USE 3W DIA. x 1'-4" SMOOTH DOWEL BARS @ 12" O.C. TYPICAL SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINT r,-\ v = 1'-0" BACKER ROD AND SEALANT - SEE SPECIFICATIONS SAWCUT JOINT WITHIN 24 HOURS OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT z a SLAB ON GRADE - SEE u PLAN FOR THICKNESS y LU AND REINFORCING U) �•� mush • •1=i�r Irl ! � � • �a • �� I=1� ae •������r����• ?-i •fir; iii •�•����i'����•. -� � 17 ••�����r����s��s• �!! Iy1�F1 •' �w PROVIDE SIMILAR CHAMFERS AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND CAULK JOINT n CONTROL JOINT 1" = 1'-0" P$olY x ° a a ti CORNER BARS TO MATCH LONGITUDINAL FOOTING REINFORCING e LONGITUDINAL FOOTING REINFORCING a. 0 - A.4 r n FOOTING CORNER BARS 3/4" =1'-0" CONSTRUCTION JOINT ROOF SLAB LU T-0" x3'-0" DOWEL - SIZE - AND SPACING TO MATCH ° HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING a TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN SEE PLAN INTERIOR WALL 2 3 UNBONDED ON THIS SIDE a TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN ° 2'-6" x 2'-6" DOWEL -SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING $ 0'-3" MAXIMUM (TYPICAL) z _ ga s W _a. (1) ADDITIONAL VERTICAL BAR - SIZE TO MATCH TYPICAL VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING n CORNER BARS 3/4" =1'-0" SMOOTH DOWEL BARS - SEE NOTE 1 4 G, !' FIRST POUR THIS SIDE SLAB ON GRADE - SEE PLAN FOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING NOTE: 1. WHEN T' IS LESS THAN 6" USE 112" DIA. x 1'-4" SMOOTH DOWEL BARS @ 18" O.C. WHEN "t" IS GREATER THAN 6" USE 3W DIA. x 1'-4" SMOOTH DOWEL BARS @ 12" O.C. TYPICAL SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINT r,-\ v = 1'-0" BACKER ROD AND SEALANT - SEE SPECIFICATIONS SAWCUT JOINT WITHIN 24 HOURS OF z `,� $ .�.. TYPICAL SLAB ON GRADE CONTROL JOINT 1" CONSTRUCTION JOINT ROOF SLAB z - � Q. 3'-0" x T-0" DOWEL - SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING y TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING -SEE PLAN "SEEPLAN GABLE END WALL 10 WALL/ROOF SLAB JOINT 3/4 = V- L SEE PLAN 4. TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN b� 2'-6"x 2'-6" DOWEL - SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING a. W w -a-' - - (4) ADDITIONAL VERTICAL BAR - SIZE TO MATCH TYPICAL VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING n INTERSECTION DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" VAP17.19cal eIN9:1NI_1I P. E- SEE PLAN b -ill I :• 11 FII. 1`I 11'• • 1 •'FFjI1I 1111 I I11• 11 /� 1'iI � ••1111 •�I:IIIII NOTE: SPECIFICATIONS1 SEE • AND COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS. QTYPICAL SLAB ON • 1[1•I.19611d:1 CONSTRUCTION JOINT TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN !se 3'X3' AT WALUROOF JOINT MATCH VERT BAR SIZE AND SPACING SEE PLAN SIDE WALL BEND BARS TO M (2) VERTICAL B, TO MATCH (2) HORIZONTAL BOTTOM TO MATC WALT n OPENING DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" V-6" N #4 DOWELS @ 12" O.C. (TYPICAL) 6" CONCRETE SLAB WITH #4'S @ 12" O.C., EACH WAY, CENTERED IN THE SLAB THICKNESS SLOPE SLAB DOWN 1/4" PER FOOT CONCRETE PLACEMENT z a SLAB ON GRADE - SEE u PLAN FOR THICKNESS y LU AND REINFORCING U) z `,� $ .�.. TYPICAL SLAB ON GRADE CONTROL JOINT 1" CONSTRUCTION JOINT ROOF SLAB z - � Q. 3'-0" x T-0" DOWEL - SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING y TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING -SEE PLAN "SEEPLAN GABLE END WALL 10 WALL/ROOF SLAB JOINT 3/4 = V- L SEE PLAN 4. TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN b� 2'-6"x 2'-6" DOWEL - SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING a. W w -a-' - - (4) ADDITIONAL VERTICAL BAR - SIZE TO MATCH TYPICAL VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING n INTERSECTION DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" VAP17.19cal eIN9:1NI_1I P. E- SEE PLAN b -ill I :• 11 FII. 1`I 11'• • 1 •'FFjI1I 1111 I I11• 11 /� 1'iI � ••1111 •�I:IIIII NOTE: SPECIFICATIONS1 SEE • AND COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS. QTYPICAL SLAB ON • 1[1•I.19611d:1 CONSTRUCTION JOINT TYPICAL HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING - SEE PLAN !se 3'X3' AT WALUROOF JOINT MATCH VERT BAR SIZE AND SPACING SEE PLAN SIDE WALL BEND BARS TO M (2) VERTICAL B, TO MATCH (2) HORIZONTAL BOTTOM TO MATC WALT n OPENING DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" V-6" N #4 DOWELS @ 12" O.C. (TYPICAL) 6" CONCRETE SLAB WITH #4'S @ 12" O.C., EACH WAY, CENTERED IN THE SLAB THICKNESS SLOPE SLAB DOWN 1/4" PER FOOT 112" EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AND SEALANT CONCRETE SLAB -SEE PLAN FOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING FINISH FLOOR EL (SEE PLAN) WALL - SEE DETAIL AS AND REINFORCING T/FOOTING EL (SEE PLAN) 2 _. 10 or NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATIONJ 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 ,, u I - �•� mush • •1=i�r Irl ! � � • �a • �� I=1� ae •������r����• ?-i •fir; iii •�•����i'����•. -� � ••�����r����s��s• �!! Iy1�F1 •' �w 112" EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AND SEALANT CONCRETE SLAB -SEE PLAN FOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING FINISH FLOOR EL (SEE PLAN) WALL - SEE DETAIL AS AND REINFORCING T/FOOTING EL (SEE PLAN) 2 _. 10 or NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATIONJ 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX SELECT STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 2435 KIMBERLY ROAD, SUITE 240 S BETTENDORF, IA 52722 563.359.3117 South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room CITY OF IOWA CITY ,, -. - I - ae South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room CITY OF IOWA CITY A Note: 1 FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS R AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION B, NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED, i UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DPAW.NGS 'S PRCHIB'TED. DETAILS S1111111111501 ,, -. - I - A Note: 1 FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS R AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION B, NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED, i UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DPAW.NGS 'S PRCHIB'TED. DETAILS S1111111111501 A3 2 Al O (V , N A-201 A3 GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHALL EXTEND TO THE ROOF DECK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH INTERIOR PARTITIONS. 26 - 0" 14'-0" @ AT GA 1'-0' P1 ALT ALTERNATE (A-201 HOLLOW METAL 1'-0 A-101 HORIZ HORIZONTAL BNT BENT JT JOINT B.O. BOTTOM OF B4 LONG WAY BRING BEARING MAX MAXIMUM CJ CONTROLJOINT MIN MINIMUM C CENTER UNE MIRK. MIRRORED CLG CEILING MTL METAL CUR CLEAR NOM NOMINAL CIP CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE OC ON CENTER COL COLUMN OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER CONC CONCRETE OPP OPPOSITE DBL DOUBLE PNT PAINTED DIA DIAMETER REF REFERENCE DO AUTO DOOR OPERATOR REFR a EA EACH REINF REINFORCEMENT EHO STORAGE SIM SIMILAR E.J. EXPANSION JOINT SST STAINLESS STEEL EL ELEVATION STD STANDARD EQ EQUAL T&B TOP AND BOTTOM EXP EXPANSION T.O. TOP OF FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET TYP V F.F. FINISHED FLOOR VERT VERTICAL FLR FLOOR W/ m FTG FOOTING v io T� o N A-201 D2 O O - .. SIGNAGE 105 "MEN'S 107 A-201 RESTROOM' 236 CORRIDOR ,e MEMS RR '. WOMEN'S RR 1 OH 107 " DOOR SIGNAGE "WOMEN'S OPERATOR RESTROOM" BUTTON 105 10 107 � I I 9'-0" 9'-0" 5'-0" -I I -1 L •I I -I L A4 L SIGNAGE "MEN'S SIGNAGE SIGNAGE "WOMEN'S RESTROOM' 'TORNADO SAFE RESTROOM" ROOM"; SEE G-002 'ST 1' A-201 C1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN C3 FLOOR PLAN 1/4" -11-01,C O Al E PEAK 19'-0" -- _ _FIVE 10' - 0�I JISH FLOOR t� _ p" V T/FOOTING_ -5' - 0" x\11 b A3 EAST/ WEST SECTION 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 M PEAK n 19'-00" EAVE � 10'-00" I FLOOR -n 0'-0" )OTING_� -5'- 0" V 5 ... ARV 6, REFERENCE INDICATIONS DETAIL IDENTIFICATION SIM A SHEET WHERE SHOWN DETAIL 1 gef— ELEVATION IDENTIFICATION w 14(] 1 Al 1 SHEET WHERE SHOWN 1 Ref ELEVATION SECTION IDENTIFICATION SIM A10 SHEET WHERE SHOWN WALL SECTION SECTION IDENTIFICATION SIM A10 SHEET WHERE SHOWN BUILDING SECTION 1i WALL TYPE 13 DOOR NUMBER 1t WINDOW TAG ADDENDUM TAG Name____ Elevation _ELEVATIONS R.m"ama r ROOM NAME 10 ROOM NUMBER ROOM INDENTIFICATION MATERIAL SYMBOLS z■T��■m =I i=Iii GENERAL FILL UNDISTURBED EARTH o GRANULAR DRAINAGE FILL ■■■■■■■■I . I , iSTEEL PLYWOOD D GROUT GRANULAR/STRUCTURAL FILL BRICK CONCRETE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT GYPSUM SAND WOOD BLOCKING WOOD SHIM LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS @ AT GA GAGE ALT ALTERNATE HM HOLLOW METAL AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR HORIZ HORIZONTAL BNT BENT JT JOINT B.O. BOTTOM OF LW LONG WAY BRING BEARING MAX MAXIMUM CJ CONTROLJOINT MIN MINIMUM C CENTER UNE MIRK. MIRRORED CLG CEILING MTL METAL CUR CLEAR NOM NOMINAL CIP CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE OC ON CENTER COL COLUMN OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER CONC CONCRETE OPP OPPOSITE DBL DOUBLE PNT PAINTED DIA DIAMETER REF REFERENCE DO AUTO DOOR OPERATOR REFR REFRIGERATOR EA EACH REINF REINFORCEMENT EHO ELECTRIC HOLD OPEN SIM SIMILAR E.J. EXPANSION JOINT SST STAINLESS STEEL EL ELEVATION STD STANDARD EQ EQUAL T&B TOP AND BOTTOM EXP EXPANSION T.O. TOP OF FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET TYP TYPICAL F.F. FINISHED FLOOR VERT VERTICAL FLR FLOOR W/ WIDTH FTG FOOTING 5 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A P R O F E S S I O N A L C O R P 0 R A T 1 O N 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338.7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX onsulton'=. Project Tit e. South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room City of Iowa City Project No.: 2012.046 3 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker :sue: -ate: Description: 5.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12-14-12 ISSUE FOR BIDS Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCE` 00 NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON -IN --R _PEVCi WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q COPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMIS`_ON E'- NEUMANN MONSON PC 15 PROHIBITED. UNAUTHO='O SCANNI V7 OF DcANiNr S. I`, IR^H?ITED1 Sheet FLOOR PLAN, CEILING PLAN & BLDG SECTIONS A-1 01 D n nn INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - MENS V 4 1/4" = V-0" EAVE 10'-00" FINISH FLOOR 0" 62 NORTH ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" A2 SOUTH ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 3 4 5 PEAK _ _ 19'-0" 11 _ EAVE 10'-0" .LOUVER =1NISH FLOOR 00" 48X10 WINDOW PEAK EAVE 10' - 0" FINISH FLOOR � 0" D4INTERIOR 1/4" = 1'-0" 12X12 WIND( 0 r - SIGNAGE: HP ACCESSIBLE MEN/WOMEN SIGNAGE "ME RESTROOM" DOWNPOUT - WOMEN'S 'AT EAVE 10'-0" _ Level n 01. V M A WEST ELEVATION u"'t 1/4" = V-0" ou I I VIN A A EAST ELEVATION /-%`t 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 PEAK _ f§'-- 0' 12X12 LOUVER METAL GUTTER 12X12 WINDOW _ EAVE 10'-0" CIP W/FORMLINER DOWNSPOUT IISH FLOOR_ /1 0" v PEAK 19'-00" METAL RIDGE CAP METAL ROOF METAL GUTTER _EAVE 10'-0" CIP W/FORMLINER SIGNAGE "TORNADO SAFE ROOM" SEE SHEET G-002 SIGNAGE "WOMEN'S RESTROOM" FINISH FLOOR 0" V ME I NEUMANN MONSON 1 A R C H I T E C T S A P R O F E S S 1 0 N A L C O R P O R A T I O N 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. �- DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX C onsultonts: South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room City of Iowa City 3 Project No.:2012.046 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker ssue: Date: Description: N O_ FEMA SUBMITTAL U _Zn N — �- =� ri co Vy -- cn South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room City of Iowa City 3 Project No.:2012.046 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker ssue: Date: Description: x.27 2 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12-14-12 ISSUE FOR BIDS ILII FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DP.f.'INGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON -INTERFERED -CE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION c' NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHORIZED SCANNING OF DRAWINGS IS PROHIBITED. app -- ELEVATIONS A-2 O 1 2 3 r o 0 0 0 0 OA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O —7 SIGN TYPE 2, 2R, 2T; PER SHEET G-001 \ D A ROOF/ WALL DTL 5"x 5'x 1/4" GALVANIZED 4 1 1/2" = V-0" STEEL TUBING, CONCRETE FILLED; DRIVE 2" x 2" SQUARE SIGN POST INTO WET CONCRETE le V• a 7"• 13":. CV M —i 3/8" METAL ROOF D5tHVtL)I 3" = 1'-0" STEEL PROTECTION BARRIER AS DETAILED ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS CA 4• WATER PROOFING MEMBRANE WOOD FURRING METAL ROOF PANEL METAL CLOSURE / METAL FLASHING METAL GUTTER EAVE 10'-0" `a 10" CONCRETE WALL LOUVER WITH 1-1/2" POLYURATHANE NAILING FLANGE AND o SEALANT RUBBERIZED GASKET. R SEE MECHICALcc DRAWINGS. �!• - - EXTERIOR 3 4:/� . . C3SIGN DETAIL TYP. WINDOW DTL LOUVER DTL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" C4 1 1/2" = 1'-0 1 1/2" = V-0" 10 1'0 EXTERIOR •4 CIP WALL 4 CIP WALL 3 1 1/2" HM DOOR DRIP HM DOOR DRIP FRAME FRAME HM DOOR HM DOOR EXTERIOR 3/8'/ 1'-0" I B 1 DOOR HEAD DETAIL �� DOOR HEAD / D DETAIL , FRAME 0 PES O HIT DOOR EXTERIOR SLOPE CONCRETE 1/20 •RIP " SEALANT CLEAN JOINT • GRANULAR FILL I FILLER FLOORSLOPE 0 , I 4" VOID FORM AlCopy of THRESHOLD DETAIL 1 1/21' = 1'-0" DRIP �HIM DOOR THRESHOLD : SEALANT EXPANSIONSTOP STRIP INT FILLER G2NULAR FILL'' •F1N1SH FLOOR4" VOID FORM A3 THRESHOLD DETAIL 1 1/2" = V-0" f EXTERIOR A .DOOR TYPES 1/4" = 1'-0" 0 N 0 Room o.. Base Walls Door Schedule � No. Name North South 4 Door Mat Fin Mat Fin Mat Fin Mat Fin Door MEN'S RR Frame I B 1 DOOR HEAD DETAIL �� DOOR HEAD / D DETAIL , FRAME 0 PES O HIT DOOR EXTERIOR SLOPE CONCRETE 1/20 •RIP " SEALANT CLEAN JOINT • GRANULAR FILL I FILLER FLOORSLOPE 0 , I 4" VOID FORM AlCopy of THRESHOLD DETAIL 1 1/21' = 1'-0" DRIP �HIM DOOR THRESHOLD : SEALANT EXPANSIONSTOP STRIP INT FILLER G2NULAR FILL'' •F1N1SH FLOOR4" VOID FORM A3 THRESHOLD DETAIL 1 1/2" = V-0" f EXTERIOR A .DOOR TYPES 1/4" = 1'-0" 0 Room Schedule N 0 Room Floor Base Walls Door Schedule Ceiling No. Name North South East West Door Mat Fin Mat Fin Mat Fin Mat Fin Door MEN'S RR Frame - CONC — CONIC — Detail CONC — VARIES 106 No. Width HT Type Mat Fin Glazing Type Mat Fin Head Jamb Thres HDW 105A 3'-0" 7'-0' A HM PT — I HM PT B3/A-501 B1/A-501 SIM A&A -501 3 1058 3'- 0" 7'- 0" A HM PT — I HM PT BIA-501 B1/A-501 SIM 4 106A T - 0" 7'- 0" A HM PT — 1 HM PT B1A-501 B1/A-501 SIM 1 107A T-0- 7'-0' A HM PT — I HM PT B3/A-501 B1/A-501 SIM A3/A-501 3 1078 3'- 0" 7'- 0" A HM PT — I HM PT B1A-501 B1/A-501 SIM 4 108A 3'- 0" 7' - 0" B HM PT YES I HM PT 61A-501 B1/A-501 SIM Al/A-501 2 Room Schedule N 0 Room Floor Base Walls Ceiling No. Name North South East West Mat Fin HT Mat Fin Mat Fin Mat Fin Mat Fin 105 MEN'S RR CONIC - CONC — CONIC — CONC — CONC — CONC — VARIES 106 STORAGE CONC - CONIC — CONIC — CONC — CONC — CONC — VARIES 107 WOMEN'S RR CONC - CONIC — CONC — CONC — CONIC — CONIC VARIES 108 ICORRIDbR CONC - CONIC — CONC — CONC — CONC — CONIC — VARIES 109 SAFE RM CONC - CONC — CONC — CONC — CONIC — CONIC — VARIES 110 SAFE RM CONC - CONC — I CONC I CONIC CONC — I CONIC — CONIC — VARIES M 5 NEUMANN MONSONI ARCHITECT S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319.338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515-339-7800 319-338-7879 FAX Consultants: South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room City of Iowa City Project No.: 2012.046 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker Issue: Date: Description: N 0 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12-14-12 N . — �i > co J rn r, South Hickory Hill Park - Safe Room City of Iowa City Project No.: 2012.046 Drawn by: Author Checked by:Checker Issue: Date: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12-14-12 ISSUE FOR BIDS ate: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCEi DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DR::NINC- AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PP'0R TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-IHTERFEPFNI WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL. Q C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED UN _ Sheet - WALL SECTIONS, DETAILS, & SCHEDULES Sheet Number: A11111111111111501 SOUTH HICKORY HILL PARK SAFE ROOM IOWA CITY, IA MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LIST NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAYBE REOUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT SHEET METAL ® SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSER WITH ROUND NECK ® SQUARE CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLE ® SQUARE CEILING EXHAUST OR RELIEF AIR GRILLE e� DOMESTIC COLD WATER LIN - CW ® HEH+H FLEX DUCT WITH SIZE - - - DUCT Ste. HORIZONTAL WIDTH x VERTICAL HEIGHT H18x12 (NET OUTSIDE SHEET METAL DIMENSION) zRECTANGULAR ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES ® EXHAUST AIR DUCT SECTION UP OR TOWARDS 7F EXHAUST AIR DUCT SECTION DOWN OR AWAY 1I'-- DIRECTIONAL ROW ARROW HORIZONTAL DAMPER ?1P PSD = FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER, FD = FIRE DAMPER, SO = SMOKE DAMPER CD = CONTROL DAMPER L- VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER GRIUE/DIFRISER TAG WITH TYPE NUMBER AND CFM QUANTITY S = SUPPLY, R = RETURN, E = EXHAUST 2 PLUMBING - DOMESTIC COLD WATER LIN - CW -- DOMESTIC HOT WATER LIFE - HW - - - DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCIAATING LINE - Hi SS SANITARY SEWER LINE BEYOND RUING ST STORM SEWER LINE BEYOND BUILDING 55 SANITARY SEWER LINE BELOW FLOOR SLAB ® PLUMBING VENT LINE V C.O. 0 CLFANOIT IN FLOOR C.O. N- - - - - CEANOUT AT OR ABOVE CEILING C.O. IF --O CLEANOUT IN WALL 0 FLOOR DRAIN PIPING SPECIALTIES 0 PIPE RISER 3 PIPE DROP —�11 UNION C PIPE CAP ® EAMOW PREVENIER — FLOAT &THERMOSTATIC TRAP ® THERMOSTATIC TRAP - V STRAINER SNATCH -LEG IN CONDUIT SIMMER W/DRAIN VALVE -OU- UNDER GROUND CONDUIT _01 PRESSURE GALIGE FES- EXPANSION JOINT ® BALL VALVE ® BATTERY CIRCUIT INDICATED 2WAY CONTROL VALVE .IA— CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR BALANCING VALVE --�IHB HOSE BIBB --I IWH WALL HYDRANT _F_ P(r PORT —0— CURB STOP 3 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LIST NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY BE REOUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT WIRING DEVICES MISCELLANEOUS DUPLEX WALL RECEPTACLE 0 JUNCTION BOX © HAND DRYER QF AUTOMATIC FAKETNALVE EQUIPMENT WIRING LSP DISCONNECT SWITCH �v FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH © CONTROL PANEL BY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER MOTOR SWITCHES WALL SWITCH - SINGLE POLE 0 OCCUPANCY SENSOR 4 OCCUPANCY SENSOR IN -WALL DISTRIBUTION Uff SURFACE -MOUNT PANEL RUSH -MOUNT PANEL Q CITCABINEr D METER 4 LUMINAIRES MISCELLANEOUS TO TROFFER FLUORESCENT FIXTURE W/ TYPE NUMBER EX EXISTING - TO REMAIN Cr" 1X9' TROFFER FLUORESCENT FIXTURE W/TYPE NUMBER EXR EXISTING - TO BE RELOCATED -()= STRIP RUORMW FIXTURE W/TYPE NUMBER ER EXISTING - TO BE REMOVED ® RECESSED CAN FIXTURE W/TYPE NUMBER 515 CONDUIT O MACE MOUNTED FIXTURE W/TYPE NUMBER SNATCH -LEG IN CONDUIT Q WALL MOUNTED FDOIME WMPE NUMBER -OU- UNDER GROUND CONDUIT IOWA CITY, IOWA 52240 -EC- EMPTYCONDUIT EXIT & EMERGENCY ® POINT OF NEW CONNECTION ® BATTERY CIRCUIT INDICATED WP WEATHERPROOF EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISH GRADE ACCESS CONTROL WM DEVICE ON WIREMOLD G GUARD PDA DOOR OPENER BUTTON [FSI FIRE STOP EZ PASS-THROUGH JOB CONTACTS, PROJECT MANAGER/ENGINEER NAME: WESLEY MEIER PHONE: 319-248-4600 EMAIL: WMEIER@MODUS-ENG.COM ADDRESS: 118 EAST COLLEGE STREET SUITE #200 IOWA CITY, IA 52240 5 I NEUMANN MONSON A R C HI T E C T S A PR0=E531 CNA L C0 R30R,AT10N 221 E. COLLEGE S I. IOWA C I I Y, IA 522413 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515 339 7800 319 338 7879 FAX C onsultonts M v u u - Fri U U 214 EAST FOURTH STREET WATERLOO. IOWA 50703 0650 TEL 319235 235 0644 FAX 1717 INGERSOLL AVE. STE, III DES MOINES, IOWA 50703 J 251 7280 TEL 515 251 7349 FAX 118 EAST COLLEGE ST. STE. 200 IOWA CITY, IOWA 52240 4600 TEL 319248 248 0141 FAX MODUS-ENG.COM South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Owner: 3 Project No.: 2012.046 Drown by: Author Checked by:C hecker issue: Date:-scriotion: .27.12 'A Q_'_'PN,VTT 12.14.12 - Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWING. AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-I:ITERF cPENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANU QQ COPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSIOIJ i NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHORIZED JF DRAWINGS 6 Cjh cc_ _ ME Cover Sheet Sheet Number: ME00'1 N ra N Y J n c.n ,_o South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Owner: 3 Project No.: 2012.046 Drown by: Author Checked by:C hecker issue: Date:-scriotion: .27.12 'A Q_'_'PN,VTT 12.14.12 - Note: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWING. AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-I:ITERF cPENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANU QQ COPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSIOIJ i NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHORIZED JF DRAWINGS 6 Cjh cc_ _ ME Cover Sheet Sheet Number: ME00'1 2 EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE TAG TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL MATERIAL FACE SIZE MOTOR MAX. NC FINISH TAG TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL AIR FLOW (CFM) SP HP V PHASE MOUNTED MISCEANEOUS EF -1 INLINE DIRECT DRIVE BLOWER GREENHECK SQ 90-95 500 0.6 1/4 HP 120 1 HUNG SIDE DISCHARGE EXHAUST GRILLE SCHEDULE TAG TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL MATERIAL FACE SIZE CFM MAX. NC FINISH E-1 SQ. PANEL PRICE 91D STEEL 12"X12" SEE DWG. 20 WHITE POWER COAT NOTES: 1. PROVIDE LOUVER WITH STEEL DAMPER 2. DIFFUSER REQUIRES OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER LOUVER SCHEDULE ITEM TAG DR 1 MANUFACTURER MODEL FACE VELOCITY (FPM) LOUVER SIZE FREE AREA AIR FLOW (CFM) MAX. SP PM -5A TO L-1 NOTES OAL-1 BLADE GREENHECK ESD -403 56 12"X30" 1.02 SQ FT 140 0.01 WALL MOUNTED WATER CLOSET 1, 3, 4 OAL-2 CH DE GREENHECK FSG -801 60 12"X12" 0.36 SQ FT 60 - 3/4" 2, 3, 4 OAL-3 BLADE GREENHECK ESD -403 1666 12"x12" 0.3 SQ FT 500 0.2 KINGSTON K-2007 1,4 NOTES: 1. MOUNT LOUVER TO FEMA 361 RATED DUCT PER SAFE ROOM DUCT PENETRATION DETAIL. PROVIDE LOUVER WITH FLANGE. COORDINATE WITH ARCH. PLAN DETAIL. YES 2. PROVIDE FEMA 361 RATED LOUVER DESIGNED TO PROTECT EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE WITH OPTIONAL FLUSH/RECESSED MOUNT. COORDINATE WITH ARCH. PLAN. 3. LOUVER SIZES DETERMINED BY FEMA 361 VENTILATION CALCULATION TRUBRO LAV GUARD 4. PROVIDE BIRD SCREEN FOR ALL EXTERIOR LOUVERS FLOOR DRAIN SEE DRAWINGS FOR ACTUAL DUCT SIZES 12 GA. (MIN.) 90deg ELBOW THROUGH FEMA 361 RATED_ WALL/ROOF DUCTWORK SHALL BE BOLTED TO THE WALL OR STRUCTURE WHERE PENETRATING THE FEMA 361 RATED OPENING. (TYPICAL OF ALL ANGLES) n SAFE ROOM DUCT PENETRATION No Scale RETAINING ANGLES MINIMUM 2" X 2" X 12 GA.(0.109375") (MIN.) COORDINATE SUPPORT WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FEMA 361 RATED SAFE ROOM WALL/ROOF PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE ITEM WASTE SIZE VENT WATER SIZE SIZE HOT COLD WATER CLOSET(FLUSH VALVE) 4" 2" PM -3A TO WC -1 1-1/2" URINALS 2"M PM -5A TO L-1 - 1" LAVATORIES 1-1/2"1/2" 3/4" - PM -8A TO HB -1 1/2" DRINKING FOUNTAIN 1-1/2"- WC -2 WALL MOUNTED WATER CLOSET 1/2" FLOOR DRAINS/SINKS 3"- STUB COPPER FROM EACH FIXTURE THROUGH CONCRETE WALL, THEN PROVIDE PEX CONNECTION Y WATER METER - JANITORS SINK 3"3/4" CITY OF IOWA CITY WATER DEPARTMENT WALL MOUNTED URINAL 3/4" TYPICAL WASTE STACK 4"- WHITE I YES - TYPICAL VENT STACK 3" 1 - - NOTES: 1. ALL SANITARY SEWER BELOW GRADE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL VENT BELOW GRADE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 2" ULESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. NOT ALL FIXTURES ON THIS SCHEDULE MAY BE USED. - ---i WC -2 WC -1 U-1 - ---A LAV -1 LAV -11 - HB -1 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR NOTE: REFER TO PEX MANIFOLD SCHEDULE FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF CW CONNECTIONS. PEX MANIFOLD SCHEDULE ITEM BRANCH QUANTITIES CW HW PM -1A TO WC -1 1-1/2" - PM -2A TO WC -2 1-1/2" - PM -3A TO WC -1 1-1/2" - PM -4A TO U-1 1-1/4" - PM -5A TO L-1 1/2" - PM -6A TO L-1 1/2" - PM -7A TO HB -1 3/4" - PM -8A TO HB -1 3/4" GRADE —L4VMIN -------------- _ LOWEST PART OF DCW MAIN '{I" - TO CITY APPROX. 5'0" BELOW GRADE '�_CURBSTOP VALVE FRENCH DRAIN PIT RUED WITH GRAVEL WATER METER AND PEX PIPING DETAIL No Scale 3 GENERAL HVAC NOTES: A. LAYOUT AND ROUTING SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC. NOT ALL OFFSETS MAY BE SHOWN. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT ROUTING REQUIRED. B. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF AND ABOVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. DO NOT INSTALL EQUIPMENT OR ROUTE DUCTS IN CLEARANCE SPACE. C. PROVIDE VOLUME CONTROL BALANCING DAMPERS ON ALL EXHAUST AIR TAPS IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS FOR AIR BALANCING. D. COORDINATE DUCT ROUTING WITH STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND ALL TRADES. E. COORDINATE EXHAUST GRILLE LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS AND ALL TRADES. F. ALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA). REFERENCED HVAC NOTES: 1. MOUNT AT 14' 1" AFF TO BOTTOM OF LOUVER. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. SEE SAFE ROOM DUCT PENETRATION DETAIL FOR DESIGN OF FEMA RATED DUCT CONNECTED TO EXTERIOR LOUVER. FACE DUCT ELBOW UP AND PROVIDE INTERIOR SCREEN TO PREVENT OBJECTS FROM ENTERING. 2. MOUNT AT 60" AFF TO BOTTOM OF LOUVER. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. SEE SAFE ROOM DUCT PENETRATION DETAIL FOR DESIGN OF DUCT CONNECTED TO EXTERIOR LOUVER. 3. MOUNT AT 8'3" AFF TO BOTTOM OF GRILLE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. 4. MOUNT FEMA 361 COMPLIANT LOUVER AT V 9" AFF TO BOTTOM OF GRILLE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: A. INSTALLATION PLANS ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY PLACEMENT OF NEW EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. B. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCE AROUND ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND ABOVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING IN CLEARANCE SPACE. C. COORDINATE PIPING LAYOUT AND ELEVATIONS WITH FOOTINGS, FLOW LINES, LOCAL PLUMBING CODE AND THE SPECIFICATIONS. D. VERIFY ALL SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO START OF WORK. E. COORDINATE ALL PLUMBING AND PIPING ROUTING WITH BUILDING STRUCTURE AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION TO ALLOW FOR PROPER CLEARANCES. F. COORDINATE ALL VENTS THROUGH ROOF WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND MAINTAIN 10FT REQUIRED DISTANCE FROM MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INTAKES. OFFSET AS NECESSARY. G. COORDINATE STORM AND SANITARY SEWER CONNECTIONS WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. H. SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE FOR FIXTURE CONNECTION SIZES. I. ALL BUILDING CONSTRUC ION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA). REFERENCED PLUMBING NOTES: 1. SEE WATER METER AND PEX PIPING DETAIL. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 1. USE CONTINUOUS PIECE OF PEX PIPING BETWEEN MANUFACTURER MODEL MANIFOLDS AND FIXTURES. COLOR 2. WATER PIPING SHALL BE TYPE #L HARD DRAWN COPPER. RPZ BACK ROW PREVENTER USC REGISTERED 3. PEX PIPING SHALL BE CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE, WITH VALVES AND STRAINERS. DRAIN TO EXTERIOR KOHLER KINGSTON K-4330 INCLUDE ROOD PREVENTION VALVE AS SPECIFIED. WHITE BLUE FOR COLD. Y 4. BALL VALVES SHALL BE BRONZE WITH STAINLESS STEEL WC -2 WALL MOUNTED WATER CLOSET BALL AND STEM. BALL VALVE(TYP) I 5. STUB COPPER FROM EACH FIXTURE THROUGH CONCRETE WALL, THEN PROVIDE PEX CONNECTION Y WATER METER WALL -MOUNT, ELONGATED BOWL, 1-1/211 TOP SPUD SLOAN 111 EXPOSED MANUAL FLUSH CHURCH #9400 -CT SEAT CITY OF IOWA CITY WATER DEPARTMENT WALL MOUNTED URINAL SLOAN WEUS1000.1001-0.125 WILL FURNISH, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 90 GPM @ 1PSI PRESSURE DROP WHITE I YES WALL GRADE —L4VMIN -------------- _ LOWEST PART OF DCW MAIN '{I" - TO CITY APPROX. 5'0" BELOW GRADE '�_CURBSTOP VALVE FRENCH DRAIN PIT RUED WITH GRAVEL WATER METER AND PEX PIPING DETAIL No Scale 3 GENERAL HVAC NOTES: A. LAYOUT AND ROUTING SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC. NOT ALL OFFSETS MAY BE SHOWN. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT ROUTING REQUIRED. B. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF AND ABOVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. DO NOT INSTALL EQUIPMENT OR ROUTE DUCTS IN CLEARANCE SPACE. C. PROVIDE VOLUME CONTROL BALANCING DAMPERS ON ALL EXHAUST AIR TAPS IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS FOR AIR BALANCING. D. COORDINATE DUCT ROUTING WITH STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND ALL TRADES. E. COORDINATE EXHAUST GRILLE LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS AND ALL TRADES. F. ALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA). REFERENCED HVAC NOTES: 1. MOUNT AT 14' 1" AFF TO BOTTOM OF LOUVER. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. SEE SAFE ROOM DUCT PENETRATION DETAIL FOR DESIGN OF FEMA RATED DUCT CONNECTED TO EXTERIOR LOUVER. FACE DUCT ELBOW UP AND PROVIDE INTERIOR SCREEN TO PREVENT OBJECTS FROM ENTERING. 2. MOUNT AT 60" AFF TO BOTTOM OF LOUVER. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. SEE SAFE ROOM DUCT PENETRATION DETAIL FOR DESIGN OF DUCT CONNECTED TO EXTERIOR LOUVER. 3. MOUNT AT 8'3" AFF TO BOTTOM OF GRILLE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. 4. MOUNT FEMA 361 COMPLIANT LOUVER AT V 9" AFF TO BOTTOM OF GRILLE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION. GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: A. INSTALLATION PLANS ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY PLACEMENT OF NEW EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. B. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCE AROUND ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND ABOVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING IN CLEARANCE SPACE. C. COORDINATE PIPING LAYOUT AND ELEVATIONS WITH FOOTINGS, FLOW LINES, LOCAL PLUMBING CODE AND THE SPECIFICATIONS. D. VERIFY ALL SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO START OF WORK. E. COORDINATE ALL PLUMBING AND PIPING ROUTING WITH BUILDING STRUCTURE AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION TO ALLOW FOR PROPER CLEARANCES. F. COORDINATE ALL VENTS THROUGH ROOF WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND MAINTAIN 10FT REQUIRED DISTANCE FROM MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INTAKES. OFFSET AS NECESSARY. G. COORDINATE STORM AND SANITARY SEWER CONNECTIONS WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. H. SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE FOR FIXTURE CONNECTION SIZES. I. ALL BUILDING CONSTRUC ION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA). REFERENCED PLUMBING NOTES: 1. SEE WATER METER AND PEX PIPING DETAIL. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TAG TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL MATERIAL COLOR ADA, FIXTURE DESCRIPTION FLUSH VALVE/FAUCET MISCELLANEOUS WC -1 WALL MOUNTED WATER CLOSET KOHLER KINGSTON K-4330 VITREOUS CHINA WHITE YES WALL -MOUNT, ELONGATED BOWL, 1-1/2" TOP SPUD SLOAN 111 EXPOSED MANUAL FLUSH CHURCH #9400 -CT SEAT WC -2 WALL MOUNTED WATER CLOSET KOHLER KINGSTON K-4330 VITREOUS CHINA WHITE NO WALL -MOUNT, ELONGATED BOWL, 1-1/211 TOP SPUD SLOAN 111 EXPOSED MANUAL FLUSH CHURCH #9400 -CT SEAT U-1 WALL MOUNTED URINAL SLOAN WEUS1000.1001-0.125 VITREOUS CHINA WHITE I YES WALL -MOUNT, INTERGRAL FLUSHING RIM, 3/4" TOP SPUD SLOAN 186 EXPOSED MANUAL FLUSH L-1 LAVATORY KOHLER KINGSTON K-2007 VITREOUS CHINA WHITE YES WALL HUNG LAVATORY, WALL HUNG CARRIER DELTA SINGLE HANDLE, SLOW SELF-CLOSING TRUBRO LAV GUARD FD -1 FLOOR DRAIN WATTS FD -100A CAST IRON TWO PIECE, WEEP HOLES, ADJUSTIBLE STRAINER HB -1 KEYED HOSE BIB WOODFORD MODEL 65 CHROME - KEYED WALL HYDRANT, AUTO DRAINING NOTES: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS IIS HVAC PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" Z EE CIVIL DRAWINGS UNDER FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN FOR CONTINUATION �2 PLUMBING PLAN 5 FLOOR MOUNTED FIXTURE CARRIER (TYP.) 1 NEUMANN MONSON ARCH I T ECT S A P R O: E 5 5 1 0 N A L C O R- O R A T 1 O N 221 E. COLLEGE SI. IOWA CIIY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515 339 7800 319 338 7879 FAX Cn Com m v u u 214 EAST FOURTH STREET WATERLOO, IOWA 50703 f 235 0650 l TEL 31911235 0644 FAX 1717 INGERSOLL AVE. STE. III DES MOINES, IOWA 50703 f 25 I 7280 l TEL 515 11 25 I 7349 J FAX 118 EAST COLLEGE ST. STE. 200 IOWA CITY. IOWA 52240 319 248 4600 TEL 248 0141 J FAX MODUS-ENG.COM 0 CD o Fri -% CO Cn South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room Project No.: 2012.046 Drown by: Checked by: sae: -te: Description: =7.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 14.12 ISSUE FOR BIDS ,ote: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARAN'.ES DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TQ INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-IPRFRFE"ENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MAI.UAL.. (D C OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERM,�SIOII 3Y NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHOF�.ZED SCANNING OF - - --.. Sheet Title: MECHANICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES Sheet Number: M 1 O1 I .I IIIIYTMlHOR m REMDVE EMSIINE Bg E Q�IR 91H RE WE TWO(2)aR B WFAIXERONE NNEWS FE WITH WMINGANJREKIREES.ONEVEV . ROOM &1[IDING AND ONE f OR EYLSIING SHELTERS. GROUND FIELD. PROVIDE GROUND WELL FOR ONE OF THE RODS. BOND AND GROUND BUILDING PER NEC. SEE SPECS. n ELEC RISER DETAIL � No Scale REFERTO PANEL I GENERAL NOTES: SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL A ELECTRICAL POWER OUTAGES, IF REQUIRED, SHOULD BE QUIREMENTS STRATEGICALLY MINIMIZED AND SCHEDULED CLOSELY WITH OWNER CHANGEOVERS COULD BE REQUIRED TO OCCUR AT ANY HOUR 6OA-2P PANEL TI' OCCUPANCY SENSOR SCHEDULE CONDUCTORS (THOU ' CONDUTT PARALLEL Volts: 120/240 Single Phases: 1 Wires: 3 A BLoad PHASE NEUTRAL GROUND EMT ISCH801,RUNS Trip ® (2) #6 AWG 1 #6 AWG I - 3/4" 1 1" 1 1 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SCHEDULE BRANCH PANEL Location: STORAGE 106 Supply From: Mounting: Surface Enclosure: Type 1 Load Circuit Description Class Type L1 Trip Poles Volts: 120/240 Single Phases: 1 Wires: 3 A BLoad AREA Poles Trip LABEL MANUFACTURER MODEL COVERED TECHNOLOGY DESCRIPTION S WATTSTOPPER W -1000A 360/1000 ULTRASONIC CEILING MOUNT, SMALL RESTROOM 6V/HALOGEN Door Access Other 2 INDUSTRAL EMERGENCY LIGHT, MOUNT AT 16 AFF. OPERATE FOR MIN 2 HOURS CHLORIDE, DUAL LITE, SURE -LITE OCCUPANCY SENSOR, 24 VDC/VAC 2 i ELECTRICAL PLAN 1/4'=1'-O" NOTES: 1. ALL FIXTURE COLORS AND FINISHES SHALL BE DETERMINED, FROM STANDARD OPTIONS UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE, BY THE ARCHITECT DURING THE SUBMITTAL PROCESS. Notes: CKT BRANCH PANEL Location: STORAGE 106 Supply From: Mounting: Surface Enclosure: Type 1 Load Circuit Description Class Type L1 Trip Poles Volts: 120/240 Single Phases: 1 Wires: 3 A BLoad LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE Poles Trip A.I.C. Rating: 10,000 Mains Type: COPPER Mains Rating: 100 A MCB Rating: 60A SPD: Integral Type Class Circuit Description Lamp L1-1 Type # Manufacturer Model Size Lamp Watts Lamp QtyT Description Equals El LITHONIA INDX 1-1-2 6V/HALOGEN Door Access Other 2 INDUSTRAL EMERGENCY LIGHT, MOUNT AT 16 AFF. OPERATE FOR MIN 2 HOURS CHLORIDE, DUAL LITE, SURE -LITE Sl LITHONIA Z 4' 32W T8. 32 W 2 INDUSTRIAL STRIP LIGHT, SUSPEND FROM ROOF STRUCTURE AT 9' AFF DAY-BRITE, METALUX S2 KENALL MILLENIUM 4' 32W T8 (LED 32 W 2 WALL MOUNT VANDALL RESISITANT FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, MOUNT AT 10 -AFF. FOR ALT #1 PROVIDE THE SAME FIXTURE ACUITY BRAND 1 1500 STRETCH 1 ALT#1) — Spare L1-8 WITH LED LAMPS ADA Door Operator Other NOTES: 1. ALL FIXTURE COLORS AND FINISHES SHALL BE DETERMINED, FROM STANDARD OPTIONS UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE, BY THE ARCHITECT DURING THE SUBMITTAL PROCESS. Notes: CKT BRANCH PANEL Location: STORAGE 106 Supply From: Mounting: Surface Enclosure: Type 1 Load Circuit Description Class Type L1 Trip Poles Volts: 120/240 Single Phases: 1 Wires: 3 A BLoad A P R 0= E 5 S I O N A L Poles Trip A.I.C. Rating: 10,000 Mains Type: COPPER Mains Rating: 100 A MCB Rating: 60A SPD: Integral Type Class Circuit Description CKT L1-1 HVAC HVAC 20A 1 0 32 1 20A Lights Lights 1-1-2 L1-3 Door Access Other 20A 1 400 720 1 20A Power Power 1-1-0 L1-5 Lights Lights 20A 1 96 470 rn 1 20A Other HVAC 1-1-6 L1-7 Hand Dryer Other 20A 1 1500 0 1 0 A — Spare L1-8 L1-9 ADA Door Operator Other 20A 1 500 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 A 0 A — Spare — Spare L1-10 L1-12 L1-11 Spare — 0 A L1-13 Hand Dryer Other 20A 1 1500 L1-14 L1-15 L1-16 L1-17 L1-18 L1-19 L1-20 L1-21 L1-22 L1-23 L1-24 L1-25 L1-26 Lt -27 L1-28 L1-29 L1-30 L1-31 Ll -32 L1-33 Ll -34 Ll -35 4 L1-36 L1-37 L1-38 L1-39 L1-40 L1-41 0 Ll -42 Total Load: 2726 VA 2620 VA Total Amps: 23A 22A Type Legend: N=NORMAL G=GFI M=MOTORIZED E=EXISTING ST=SHUNT TRIP A=ARC FAULT Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals HVAC OVA 0.00% OVA Lights 256 VA 100.00% 256 VA Total Conn. Load: 5346 VA Other 4370 VA 100.00% 4370 VA Total Est. Demand: 5346 VA Power 720 VA 100.00% 720 VA Total Conn. Current: 22 A Total Est. Demand Current: 22 A Notes: PROVIDE 20 SPACE 2 POLE PANEL. PANEL BASIS OF DESIGN SHALL BE SQUARE D TYPE NO. DOOr Access Detail No Sole GENERAL NOTES: A. SURFACE RACEWAY SHALL NOT BE USED IN ANY AREAS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. B. INSTALL DEVICES SUCH THAT NO TWO DEVICES ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF SAME WALL ARE WITHIN 8" OF EACH OTHER. C. COORDINATE ALL DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. D. OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHALL BE LOCATED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. IN EVENT OF CONFLICT OF DESIGNED DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS, ENGINEER SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY. E. REFER TO SPECIFICATION 26 0923 FOR DETAILS ON OCCUPANCY SENSORS. EACH AREA OF CONTROL SHALL HAVE A DEDICATED POWER PACK WITH ALL DEVICES SHOWN ON PLANS OPERATING TOGETHER. F. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN SUCH WAY THAT BALLASTS AND DRIVERS ARE ACCESSIBLE WITHOUT CUTTING OF CEILING. THE ENGINEER SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY OF AREAS WHERE THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE. G. ALL WALL -MOUNTED FIXTURES SHALL HAVE EXACT ROUGH -IN LOCATION DETERMINED BY DESIGN TEAM PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. H. ALL EMERGENCY LIGHT BATTERY PACKS SHALL BE SIZED FOR A MINIMUM 2 -HOUR RUN TIME. I. ALL DISCONNECTS ON MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MOUNTED ON STRUCTURE TO ALLOW REMOVAL OF THE EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE WITH A MINIMUM OF WIRING WORK. VERIFY NEC CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS ARE MET PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 3. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCE AROUND ALL MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OR CONDUIT IN CLEARANCE SPACE. K. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE DEDICATED NEUTRALS. L PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN, COORDINATE ALL WALL DEVICES WITH OTHER TRADES. CONFLICTS SHALL BE BROUGHT IMMEDIATELY TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. M. MOUNT ALL EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT 16 AFF. N. ALTERNATE #1 IS ADDITION OF LED LIGHTING FIXTURE. SEE LIGHTING SCHEDULE FOR MORE DETAILS. REFERENCE NOTES: 1. ADA DOOR OPERATOR. EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR, ROUGH -IN AND WIRING BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 2. EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY ON/OFF TIMER. EXHAUST FAN SHALL RUN FOR 10 MINS, THEN SHUT-OFF FOR 10 MINS. 3. WORLD DRYER HAND DRYERS ARE BASE BID. DEDUCT ALTERNATE #2 IS NO HAND DRYER. 4. PROVIDE ROUGH -IN FOR DOOR ACCESS. REFER TO DOOR ACCESS DETAIL FOR MORE INFORMATION REGARDING CONDUIT ROUTING. COORDINATE WITH DOOR FRAME ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. 2 4 5 NEUMANN MONSON ARCH I TEC TS A P R 0= E 5 S I O N A L C O R 3 O R A T 1 O N 221 E. COLLEGE 51. IOWA C I I Y, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX 505 FIFTH AVE. DES MOINES, IA 50309 515 339 7800 319 338 7879 F;1X C 01S"'--c-)tS 214 EAST FOURTH STREET WATERLOO, IOWA 50703 319 235 05501TEL 235 0544 J FAX 1717 INGERSOLL AVE. STE. III DES MOINES, IOWA 50703 515 251 7280 TEL 251 7349 J FAX 118 EAST COLLEGE ST. STE. 200 IOWA CITY, IOWA 52240 248 4600 TEL 319 248 0141 J FAX MODUS-ENG.COM Project Titre: South Hickory Hill Park Safe Room =sue: Dote: Description: 8.27.12 N 0 12.14.15 -SUE FOR BIDS CD N -n o ._ CA 9 rn L Owner: Project No.: 2012.046 Drown by: Author Checked by:Checker =sue: Dote: Description: 8.27.12 FEMA SUBMITTAL 12.14.15 -SUE FOR BIDS FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCL� DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOE DRAv,1463 AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS, LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR Tu INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON—INTFRr rENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANURE. (DC OPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OF CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMIS&Ob: BY NEUMANN MONSON PC IS PROHIBITED. UNAUTHOFZED SCANNING OF DRAWINGS IS PR)HIBITEC. Sheet Title: ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES Sheet Number: El 01